1 ly t'/ 1*' ''; i'j'tiiii i f' 'r i^i -i

•l)i'i'.i:

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

§opl ^odetn of ^irtoria

VOL. XV. (New Series).

PART I.

Edited under the Authority oj the Coimcil.
ISSUED AUGUST, 1902.

(^Ccntdiiiiiii; Papers read before the Society diirim; the niontlis of
March, April, June, ami July, iy02.

THK AUTHORS OK THK SKVKRAL PAl'K.RS ARK SKVERALLY RKSroNSIBLK FOR THK

SOUNDNESS OK THE OPINIONS GIVEN AND FOR THE ACCURACY OK THE

STATEMENTS MADE THEREIN.

MELBOURNE :
FOKD & SON, PRINl'ERS, DEUMMOND STREET, CARLTON.

AGENTS TO THK SOCIETY :

WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14 HENRIETTA STREET, COVENT GARDEN, LONDON.

To whom all eommunioatioiis for transmission to the Royal Society of Victoria,
from all parts of Europe, should be sent.

1902.

CONTENTS OF VOLUME XV.-Pt. L

Art. I.— The Theory of Temporai-y Stars. By E. F. J. Love,

M.A., F.R.A.S. 1

II. -Further Descriptions of the Tertiary Polyzoa of Vic-
toria. Part VIII. By C. M. Maplestone. (Plates
I. and II.) ... . ... ... 17

III. — On the Occurrence of Glacial Beds at Wynward, near
Table Cape, Tasmania. By A. E. Kitson, F.G.S.
(Plate III.) ... .. ... ... ... 28

IV. — Notes on Some Recent Marine Deposits in the
Neighbourhood of Williamstown. By F. E. Grant
and E. O. Thiele. ... ... ... 36

V. — Further Notes on the River Yari'a Improvement
Sections, at the Botanical Gardens, Melbourne.
By A. E. KiTSON. F.G.S. ... ... ... 41

VI. — Description of Some New Victorian Fresh-water
Amphipoda, No 2. By O. A. Satce. (Plates IV.,
v., VI. and VII.) ... ... 47

VII. — Some little known Victorian Decai^od Crustacea with
Descriptions of New Species, No. 2. By S. W.
Fulton and F. E. Grant. (Plates VIII., IX.
andX.) ... .. ... 59

VIII. — Six Months' Daily Examination of Melbourne Tap

Water. By Thomas Cherry, M.D., M.S. ... 69

IX. — Description of Some New Lizards from Western
Australia. By A. H. S. Lucas, M.A., B.Sc, and
C. Frost, F.L.S. ... ... ... ... 76

X.- — New or little known Fossils from the Tertiaries of

Victoria. By T. S. Hall, M.A. (Plate XI.) ... 80

:}T82U

Airr. I.— The Theory of Temporary Stars/\"\:'i^'-'^'y-.^(. s

By E. R J. LOVE, M.A., F.R.A.S. 1^1^

'iLulLlBHAHY

[Eead 13th March, 1902.]

1. — Introductory.

The two rival theories concerning the origin of temporary
stars — or Novae — respectively ascribe their phenomena to col-
lision and to eruption. Till within the last three years the
collision theory was preferred by astrophysicists, a lai'ge majority
of them deeming the spectroscopic evidence conclusive in its
favour ; but the publication by Wilsing^ of his famous memoirs
"On the interpretation of the typical spectrum of new stars," and
" On the effect of pressure upon the wavelength of the lines in
the hydrogen spectrum," put a new face on the matter by
showing that the emission from the star of gases under pressure
was competent to account for the spectroscopic phenomena. Of
special importance was his experimental proof of the fact that
the dark lines must, on this hypothesis, always be more refran-
giVile than the corresponding bright ones, since this fact was one
of the principal difficulties in the way of the collision theory, or
for that matter of any reasonable mechanical explanation of the
typical spectrum, a difficulty emphasized of recent years by Mrs.
Fleming's discovery of a considerable number of novae on the
Draper memorial photographs."

Such was the state of the question when Nova Persei made its
appearance on 21st February, 1901. Owing partly to its great
brilliancy — even in the latest stages discussed here it was still
very little below the 6th magnitude — partly to the improvement
in photographic processes, the transformations of this star have
been studied with a degree of closeness, accuracy and continuity
never approached in the case of other novae. Naturally each
investigator attempts to explain his results in terms of the

1 Ap. J., X., pp. 113, 269.

2 See Pickering (Ap. J., xiii., p. 173) for a list of these.

2 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

theory which he favours most ; iny object, therefore, in writing
this paper is to discuss the work done on the star at different
observatories during last year, in order to see what light it
throws, taken as a whole, on the claims of the rival theories.

2.— Early History of the Outbreak.

Nova Persei was the first of the temporaries to have its
spectrum examined l)efore and during, as well as after, its epoch
■of maximum luminosity. Discovered by Anderson on 21st Feb-
ruary, its spectruni was photographed by Pickering^ at Harvard
on the 22nd ; by Vogel" at Potsdam, as well as at Harvard on the
23rd — the night of the maximum, when the star for a short time
held the proud pre-eminence of " the brightest star in the north-
ern heavens " — and at the Lick^ and Yerkes* observatories, as
well as at Harvard on the 24th ; all other photographs known to
me are of later date.

These earliest photographs prove that on 22nd February the
spectrum was that characteristic of the " Orion group " of stars ;
it showed a continuous spectrum crossed by a comparatively
small number of fine dark lines, practically undisplaced from
their normal positions, among which those of hydrogen and the
magnesium line X4481 were decidedly the most prominent ;
Pickering records these as "bright on the less refrangible edge;"
there was no sign of the typical spectrum. One the next
night Pickering found K present ; otherwise the spectrum was
"apparently unaltered," but the star was obscured by clouds,
and the photograph faint. On the same night, however — and,
judging from the difference in longitude of the two observatories,
some time previous to Pickering's photograph — Vogel obtained
two plates, showing a bright continuous spectrum, crossed by
broad hazy hydrogen absorptions,^ and by a number of fine
dark lines, H and K being conspicuous among the latter, but he

1 Ap. J., xiii., pp. 170, 232.

2 Ap. J., xiii., p. 217.

3 Ap. J., xiv., p. 269.

4 Ap. J., xiii., p. 238.

5 Possiblj' the cloudy weather prevented these from showiiij,' on Pickering's second
plate.

Tlie Theory of Temvporary Stars. 3

found no trace of bright lines or bands on his plates ; the broad
hazy absorptions were displaced towards the violet by an amount
corresponding to a velocity of 700 kilometers per second towards
the sun. By the 24th the typical /lova spectrum was fully estab-
lished. It differed slightly from that of Nova Aurigae, showing
the bright bands much broader, and the dark ones less dark
relatively to their surroundings, than they appeared in the
spectrum of the earlier star.^ These bands, in addition to the
lines of hydrogen, included the "enhanced lines" of iron, calcium
and magnesium, and (possibly) D.^; H and K showed both as
bands and as fine lines.

3. — Bearing of the Earliest Observations on Theory.

This may be summed up as follows : —

1. The star, when near the maximum, was certainly exceed-
ingly hot. The coincidence of the tirst spectrum with that of
the Orion stars establishes this fact, which is even better
attested by its great extension into the ultraviolet and
the high relative intensity of that portion. The presence of
"enhanced line" absorptions proves the same thing.

2. The change to a typical nova spectrum, though rapid, was
gradual. Pickering, on the basis of his own photographs,
regards it as " very sudden " ; but the coincident work of Vogel
shows that the dark bands mad« their appearance before the
bright ones, and that at first they were feeble ; consequently the
setting up of the typical spectrum seems to have had nothing
catastrophic about it.

3. Pickering- calls attention to a possible experimentum crjicis
for deciding between the rival theories. He points out that, on
the collision hypothesis, the maximum separation of the bright
and dark bands should occur at the epoch of maximum bright-
ness, and considers that the comparison of his second and third
photographs shows that the separation had increased between
23rd and 24th February — i.e., after the maximum was passed —
and consequently the collision hypothesis cannot be true.

1 Pickering (Ap. J., xiii., Plate iv.) reproduces the spectra of the two stars.
- Ap. J., xiii., p. 277.

lA

4 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Of course his argument falls to the ground if, on the night of
23rd February, the bright bands were absent from the spectrum.
It seems to me that the presence of the bright edges of the fine
absorptions, recorded by Pickering, may be regarded as doubtful,
seeing that Vogel got no trace of them on plates taken under
better atmospheric conditions ; the latter observer, indeed, is of
opinion that a large part of the bright light of the continuous
spectrum of that night was due to very dense hydrogen. If
this be the case, these observations, taken alone, do not
furnish the experimentum crucis, which will have to be discussed
— if at all — on the basis of evidence furnished by the later
observations.

4.— Second Stage of the Star's History.

While the typical spectrum was predominant, a number of
photographs of the spectrum were taken at the Lick^ and by
Lockyer at South Kensington,- which demonstrate the important
fact that the wavelengths of the bright hydrogen lines increased
progressively in value for a time, while the wavelengths of
the dark lines — which were much shortened — remained nearly
stationary in magnitude. As Lockyer gives no measures, but
merely records the fact that a change did occur, I have put
together the scattered measures of the Lick observers in Tables
I. and 11.

Table I. — Dark Bands.

Line

Normal \.

Feb. 25.

Mar. 13.

Mar. 18.

Ap. 1.

Ap. 5.

H^ -

3889

3870

3870

He -

3970

3952

3950

3950

—

—

HS -

4102

4084

4081

4081

4100

4103

Hy -

4341

4322

4318

4319

4340

—

H^ -

4862

4838

4835

4837

—

4861

1 Ap. J., xiv., loc. cit.

2 M. N., Ixi., App., pp. 15, 21, 37.

The Theory of Temporary Stars.
Table II. — Bright Bands.

Line.

Normal X.

Feb. 25.

Mar. 13.

Mar. 18.

Ap. 1.

Ap. 5.

HC -

3889

3896

3893

_

H€ -

3970

. —

3974

3975

3971

3972

HS -

4102

4094

4105

4108

4102

4102

Hy -

4341

4335

4342

4347

4341

4342

H^ -

4862

4853

4863

4869

4864

4861

From these figures we see that the dark bands were at first
strongly shifted towards the violet, regaining their normal posi-
tions about the beginning of April. The bright lines, too, were
at first displaced towards the violet (though less than the dai'k
ones) but by the middle of March this was exchanged for a much
smaller displacement towards the red, the lines returning to their
normal positions at about the same time as the dark ones. In
the April photographs, therefore, the characteristic paired lines
are no longer seen, being replaced by broad bright bands in
the normal positions, upon which broad hazy absorptions are
mesially superposed.

The gaps in the Lick series of photographs are bridged by
those taken at South Kensington, as well as at the Yerkes^ and
Stonyhurst- observatories. These agree with the Lick photo-
graphs in showing that early in March the bright lines were
displaced towards the red ; while the South Kensington plates
show that on 26th February^ the displacement either way — •
if it existed — must have been small. On the other hand, the
Stonyhurst observations tend to show — in opposition to the
Lick observations — that the bright-line displacements remained
unchanged from 3rd March to 26th April ; it is, however, to
be noted that Father Sidgreaves' method of comparison is much
better suited to differential measurements than to absolute

1 Ap. J., xiii., pp. 173, 238.

2 M. N., Ixii., p. 137.

3 It must not be forgotten that South Kensington is more than ten hours ahead of the
Lick Observatory in longitude ; a fact of fundamental importance where possibly rapid
changes are concerned.

6 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

determinations of wavelengths,' while Lockyer's direct com-
parison, on 25th April, between the H/3 and D.^ lines of the
Nova and those furnished by vacuum tubes, showed the wave-
lengths on that date to be normal. The Yerkes plates also, to.
a certain extent, support the Lick results ; seven plates taken
before 22nd March gave for the wavelength of He 3973, six plates
subsequent to that date made it 3970. The cumulative evidence
is strongly in favor of the accuracy of the Lick determinations of
the absolute wavelengths of the bright lines as against those of
Stonyhurst.

There still remains a difficulty about the dark lines. The
Yerkes and Stonyhurst observers agree in representing them
as dying out in sM, and completely disappearing before the end
of March, owing possibly to decay in brightness of the continuous
spectrum. It is, however, noteworthy (1st) that these bands
had each of them several components, the more refrangible of
which disappeared first, and (2nd) that Lockyer's simultaneous
observation and plotting of the intensity curves for the bright
bands shows their maxima as shifting from the violet towards
the red side of the bands. In other words, the phenomena, taken
as a whole, seem to indicate a gradual coalescing of the bright
and dark bands, such as the Lick observers found completed in
the beginning of April.

We must not lose sight of the fine dark lines due to metallic
absorptions, which were examined with special care by the Lick
observers. H, K, D, and D,, were present as very narrow, sharp
lines, side by side with the broader absorptions of calcium (and
sodium 1). These narrow lines were very slightly displaced
towards the red, and agreed — within the limits of experimental
error — in showing that their source was recedimg from the sun
with a speed of approximately 7 kilometres per second, this
value being steadily maintained, up to the middle of August,-
quite independent of the changes in either the heavy absorptions
or the bright lines.

1 A fact of which he himself appears to be fully conscious. It may be added that he
considers a good many of his plates to have been over-exposed to such an extent as to
unduly broaden the lines. Can this have produced sligrht displacements of the maxima,
which we know were never central 1

2 When the last recorded measurements were made.

TJie Theory of Tem])orary Stars. 7

5. — Bearing of the Second Stage Phenomena on
Theory.

1. If we desire to express these phenomena in terms of the
collision tiieory as usually presented, we must proceed as
follows : —

The sources of the bright and dark bands possessed, before
and during maximum, little or no relative velocity in the line of
sight ; two days later they were moving in the same direction —
towards the sun — but with different speeds ; a fortnight later
they were moving in opposite directions with the enormous
relative velocity of 1800 kilometres per second; and after
another fortnight both came to rest. Meanwhile, another body
concerned in the phenomena was travelling slowly away from the
sun with uniform speed.

I cannot imagine how such a series of performances is possible ;
neither collision nor orbital motion fits the facts. But it does
seem to me that we have here as strongly marked a case of
Pickering's experiinentum criicis as Pickering himself could desire ;
consequently, as far as Nova Fersei is concerned, we must
abandon all such explanations of the spectrum as are based on
the assumption of relative motion of different bodies.^

2. Wilsing's hypothesis fits the facts very well. The
\ariations, both in magnitude and direction, of the linear
displacements are readily explicable as due to pressure changes ;
we need only suppose tliat in the earlier stages the pressure of
the incandescent gases was comparatively low, then rapidly
increased, remained almost stationary for a time, and finally fell
off; while the fact, attested by all the observers, of the multiplicity
of the maxima in both bright and dark bands is readily explained
by the very probable supposition of different pressures in
diflferent parts of the gaseous layer — ^pressures, moreover, which
can in all cases be estimated in numbers of atmospheres by no
means unreasonably great.

1 Had the distance between the bright and dark bands remained constant, the deduc-
tions would have been different.

8 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

6. — Later History of the Star.

On March 19th the nova entered upon the third stage of its
life history, so far as we can ever know it. The decline in its
luminosity, previously very rapid, became extremely slow ; but
the star now assumed the character of an irregularly periodic
variable of rapidly lengthening period, its brightness fluctuating
between the 4th and 6th magnitudes.^ With this variation in
brightness was associated a variation in the spectrum, which
showed two well-marked types ; the first type agreed with the
spectrum already described, save that the metallic lines were
steadily weakening ; the second type differed from the first by
the absence, or at least the great relative weakness, of the
continuous spectrum, the absence of dark bands, and the gradual
emergence of new bright ones. The conditions of change from
one spectrum-type to the other were very carefully studied by
Sidgreaves^, who found that it was associated with the absolute
brightness of the star, and not with the phase of the light-
variation ; whenever the magnitude sank below 4*57 the second
type appeared, whenever it rose above that value the first type
was re-established. Pickering'^ to a certain extent supports this
conclusion, as all the second type photographs secured by him,
■with one exception, were taken at minima ; the exception is
important, as he records that " the magnitude of the star was the
same on 12th and 13th April, but the spectrum was different;"
there appears, however, to be a possibility of error on his part, as
the light-curves of Lockyer and Cliild agree in showing that, on
both dates, the brightness was near to Sidgreave's critical value,
being slightly below it on the 12th and above it on the 13th ;
the same thing is shown by Rambant's observations^, which give
the magnitude on 12th April as 4"67, and on 13th April as 449 ;
on the whole, Sidgreaves seems to be right.

The most noteworthy of the early changes in the spectrum of
the second type are the disappearance of the " enhanced "
metallic lines and the gradual emergence of characteristic nebular

1 Lockyer (M.N., Ixi., App. p. 59) and Child (M.N. Ixi., p. 4S3) ^'ive drawiiiffs of the light
curve for February, March, and April.

2 Loc. cit.

3 Ap. J., xiv., p. 80.

4 M.N., Ixi., p. 467.

The Theory of Temporary Stars. 9

lines together with those of helium^ Among the nebular lines,
/\ 4363 made its appearance on 22nd March'-^, while A5007 was
certainly, and X3869 possibly, observed on 28th March, the two
latter showing themselves as extensions towards the violet of
/\5019 and H^; on this last point all the observers are in
agreement.

By 19th June, owing to the gradual dying out of old lines and
development of new ones, the bright-line spectrum had closely
approximated to the nebular type^ ; the periodic variations had
meanwhile largely died out, though the steady fall in brightness^
still went on.

The apparent transformation of the star into a nebula was
not a surprise, as the same fate had befallen Nova Aiirigae ;
owing, however, to the faintness of that object, the process in its
case could not be watched, and was only ascertained to have
taken place several months afterwards, when the nova, for some
unknown reason, experienced a great revival in its light. Nova
Cygni is also known to have undergone a similar change, but in
its case — though the measurements were not precise enough to
allow any dogmatising on the subject — it seems likely that the
two principal nebular lines were present in the spectrum from
the first, which in the early spectrum of the other two they
certainly were not.' It may be added that, as far as the scanty
observations go. Nova Aquilae^' appears to have had a similar
history to Novae Aicrigae and Fersei, a history which we may,
therefore, regard as typical of novae in general.

By the beginning of August the bright-line spectrum of Nova
Persei had fully assumed the nebular type, so far as the wave-
lengths of the lines were concerned ; moreover, five nebular lines
of unknown origin (among which three, forming a group, of
wavelengths 3869, 3968^ and 4363, are characteristic nebular

1 Lockyer, M.N., Ixi., App., p. 37.

2 Sidgreaves, loe. cit.

3 Pickering, Ap. J., xiv., p. 81.

4 Carefully recorded by Gore, M.N., Ixii., p. l.')6.

5 The spectrum of Nova Cj/ijni afterwards reverted to the stellar type (Harvard Obser-
vatory Annual Report, 1879-80, p. 7) just as those of Xovae Cassiopeiae and Caronae appear
to have done. Lockyer asserts (M.N., Ixi., App., p. 19) that Xova Cygni. is now a nebula.
What his authority for the statement is I do not know.

6 Pickering, Ap. J., xiii., p. 172.

7 The Lick observers show conclusively that these must not be identified, as the}' have
been in the past, with helium and hydrogen lines.

10 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

lines, while A5007 and X4959 are the " chief " nebular lines)
together with the helium line A4713, were the strongest lines in
the spectrum. Omitting A-i959, these appear alone in the repro-
duction^ of one of Sidgreaves' plates, showing that they were
then brighter than the hydrogen lines lying near them.

But a comparison of Sidgreaves' results with those of the Lick
observers shows that in some respects the spectrum differed
widely from that of a typical nebula. In the first place, the
relative intensity of the lines was always altering, and was
never that of a typical nebular spectrum. Throughout August
and September Sidgreaves- and Lockyer^ found that A.3869
was the brightest line in the spectrum, though A5007 is not
merely the brightest line in the spectrum of ordinary nebulae,
but absolutely dwarfs all others. However, by 6th October,
when Sidgi'eaves brought his series to a close, H/? and Hy
were the only surviving hydrogen lines, while A5007 and A4959
had asserted their superiority both over them and over A3869,
though not to anything like the normal extent.

Another pronounced difference between the two spectra was
the great width and difl'useness of the lines, combined with their
complex structure. This showed that the hot gases, though
similar in chemical nature to those of nebulae, were in a
condition of far greater density. This is further borne out by
the fact that, of the helium lines present, every one without
exception^ belongs to Kayser and Runges' "high density" series.

A further difference of a very important character consisted in
the continued existence of a continuous spectrum by no means
faint for a 6th magnitude star,^ crossed by the old series of
narrow dark lines, the displacements of these lines indicating the
same steady but low velocity as they had done early in the year.

The discovery by Ritchey," on 20th September, of a fairly large
nebula surrounding the star, falls within the period covered by
the later spectrographic i-esearches. In itself a most interesting

1 All the lines are stated by Sidgreaves to be visible on the negative, but obviously those
wiped out in the reproduction must be the weakest.

2 Loc. cit.

3 P.R.S., Ixix., p. 137.

4 Shown by a table given by the Lick observers ; loc. cit., p. 290.

5 Sidgreaves, loc. cit., p. 150.

6 Ap. J., xiv., p. 167.

Tlce Theory of Temporary Stars. 11

— and quite unexpected — phenomenon, its interest pales in com-
parison with that of the changes subsequently found to be
apparently going on in it ; for a photograph taken seven weeks
later^ shows that the nebula was, to all appearance, rapidly
expanding in all directions, and that one portion of it, apparently
in contact with the star, had greatly increased in luminosity
during the the interval, while the rest of the nebula had lost
much of its light.'-

7. — The Theopy in the light of the later observations.

In this section there are many points for discussion. I have,
as above, distinguished them by numbers.

1. Variations in brightness per se are readily explicable on the
collision theory by attributing them to successive encounters, as
Lockyer and others have pointed out ; they are equally easy to
explain on the eruption theory, by ascribing them to alternate
expansions and contractions of the gaseous matter, consequent
upon the checking of the outru.sh. Of the two hypotheses, the
second accounts satisfactorily for the quasi-periodicity of the
light-variations, which are pretty much what we should expect if
it were true^ ; while unless we are to assume a quasi-periodicity
in space of the structure of the invaded system, similar to the
quasi-periodicity of the light-curve, it is difficult to see how the
theory of successive collisions can be made to fit the facts ; a
theory which necessitates any such subsidiary hypothesis is, to
my mind, self-condemned.

2. Neither theory can be regarded as satisfactorily accounting
for the change of spectrum from a stellar to a nebular type.*

1 Ap. J., xiv., p. 293.

2 The question obviously suggests itself — Is the nebular spectrum due to the star or to
Ritchey's nebula ? The answer, I take it, must be that it is due to the star, otherwise we
should find on the plates a narrow stellar spectrum crossed by long bright lines, just as in
Huggin's photograph of the combined spectrum of the Orioti nebula and the trapezium
stars ; but nothing of the kind appears to have been observed. Besides, the nebula is too
faint an object to give any spectrum in the time allotted to the exposures by the
spectrographers.

3 The light curve closely resembles the displacement curve of a damped vibrating
system.

< Lockyer's meteoritic h3pothesis might have done so, had the spectrum passed throug-h
some or all of the stages characterised by him as Polarian, Aldebarian, and Antarian
(M.N., Ixi., App., p. 19) before assuming the nebular type ; but this, apparently, it failed
to do.

12 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Sidgreaves' work shows that the change from the first to the
second type — which probably marked the inception of the
nebular type — was pretty sharply associated with a definite
level of temperature ; probably, therefore, the assumption of the
complete nebular type corresponds to a lower temperature level.
Why a nebular spectrum should be associated with relatively
low temperature is quite another question ; possibly the two
rival theories are not concerned in the answer to it, which may
be a matter of chemistry alone. Too much -stress must not be
laid on the coincidence in point of time between the periodic
variation of light and the appearance of the nebular lines, seeing
that in the case of Nova Aurigae the variable period came to an
end long before any nebular lines showed themselves ; moreover,
in the case of -qArgiis the variable period preceded the maximum
epoch, while in that of Nova Cygni there is no evidence for its
existence.

3. The discovery of a nebula surrounding the star lends
plausibility, at first sight, to the hypothesis of successive collis-
ions, and was naturally claimed in support of it ; but it seems
to me that the details of Ritehey's investigation tell in a
difierent direction. The rapid brightening (alluded to in ^56) of
the patch of nebula in contact with the star might of course
have resulted from a new collision, the evidence of which reached
us between 20th September and 11th November; but in that
■case we might reasonably expect to find that a rise in luminosity
of the star occurred somewhere between these epochs. Nothing
of the kind was, as a matter of fact, observed.

4. We must now consider the unique problem oifered by the
observed expansion of the nebula.

Taking Ritehey's measurements of the distances between the
star and the principal nebular condensations, we are led by
simple inspection to conclude that the rate of expansion was the
same all over the nebula, these distances increasing by about
■one-seventh of their total amount in fifty-four days. This is
well shown in Table III., in the first column of which we have
the letters used by R^itchey to designate the principal condensa-
tions, in the second and fourth the angular distances of these
from the star on two dates, expressed in seconds of arc, in the
third the quotients obtained on dividing the numbers in the

Tlie Theory of Temporary Stars.

13-

second column by 7, and in the fifth those obtained on dividing
the numbers in the fourth column by 8.^

Table III.

Conden-
sation.

Sep. 20.

Nos. of previous
column H- bj' 7.

Nov. 13.

Nos. of previous
columns -f- by 8.

a

430"

611

497"

62

b

374"

531

420"

521

c

346"

491

381"

47i

d

350"

50

395"

49i

e

371"

53

427"

53^

f

366"

52

378"

47

The agreement between the third and fifth columns of Table
III. is very striking," and fully warrants us in assuming that the
rate of expansion at all parts is pretty much the same. The
difficulty lies in the interpretation of this fact, not in its estab-
lishment.

Kapteyn^ and Wilson^ have independently arrived at the
conclusion that what we see is not a motion of the nebulous
matter, but the light of the outburst reflected successively from
more and more distant pkrts of a pre-existing nebula ; Wilson
has computed the distance of the Nova on this assumption, and
finds it to be about 250 light-yeai's. The hypothesis accounts
very well for the agreement between the rates of expansion at
diflferent points, and obviates the ascription of enormous
velocities to masses of matter ; nevertheless it appears to me
that there are serious difficulties in the way of its acceptance.

In the first place, the apparent rate of expansion was too slow
to be consistent with it ; the time interval from 23rd Feb. to
13th Nov. is 263 days, that from 23rd Feb. to 20th Sept. is 209

1 Ritchey's method of measuring these distances on enlarged photographs, by means of
a scale, is obviously better suited to the determination of ratios than of differences ; hence
the method of comparison adopted above, which uses the actual measurements, atid
neglects the differences tabulated by liitchey.

- The onlj' discrepancy of any real importance is that furnished by condensation /.

3 Astr. Nach., No. 3756.

4 Nature, 2nd Jan., 1902.

14 Proceedings of tlie Royal Society of Victoria.

days ; had we, however, used 263 and 209 (or 5 and 4) as
divisors in drawing up Table III., instead of 8 and 7, the
discrepancies between the third and fifth columns would have
been serious/ Another difficulty is the brightening up of the
central patch of nebula, already mentioned as an obstacle in the
way of the collision theory ; to explain it on Kapteyn and
Wilson's hypothesis we should certainly have to assume an
increase of the star's luminosity at a late stage of its history,
which, as we have seen, probably did not occur.

If we are prepared to go the length of supposing that the
substances forming the nebula were ejected from the star, we
shall find that this hypothesis accounts, better than the others,
for the facts above-mentioned. We may regard it as practically
certain that the rate of radial expansion of emitted gases would
diminish as the volume increased, hence the objections to
Kapteyn and Wilson's theory, based on Table III., do not apply
to this one, but rather tend to support it. Again, the
brightening of the central patch of nebula furnishes no difficulty
to the ejection hypothesis ; it may well be that the outflow from
the star, though immensely slowed down, is still going on —
possibly is intermittent ; but intermittence in the outflow does
not demand the same variation in luminosity as a new collision
or an actual revival of light, indeed the intermittent outflow
would probably hold the light-variations in check. In suggesting
this alternative hypothesis, I am fully conscious of its extrava-
gance ; this, however, is scarcely as great as it looks, on the
contrary the enormously rapid outgrowth of the tails of bright
comets — which are probably formed under the action of forces
immeasurably weaker than those at work in a Nova — seems to
give it some degree of plausibility.

The question can hardly be settled until the star has been
examined for parallax. If this prove to be measurable, Kapteyn
and Wilson's hypothesis would be at (jnce disproved ; while the
ejection hypothesis would be somewhat strengthened, since the

1 Kapteyn and Wilson both suggest that the discrepancy in the values of the star's
distance furnished by the earlier and later photographs maij be due to the inclination of
the nebula to the line of sight; but this can, I think, hardly hold good in the case of a
body whose greatest angular diameter is only a few minutes of arc. However that may
be, the objection stated above is a grave one.

The Theorif of Temporary >Stoy.s. 15

velocities it demands would then be of the same order of magni-
tude as those concerned in the formation of comets' tails. If,
however, the parallax be too small for measurement — as has been
the case with all JVovae yet investigated — the ejection hypothesis
would be discredited, while the other grave objections to that of
Kapteyn and Wilson would still hold good.

8.— Conclusion. The Origin of Temporapy Stars.

The evidence collected in this paper does, as I think, disprove
the theory which attributes the spectroscopic phenomena to the
relative motion of difterent bodies, and shows them to be well
explained by ascribing them to disturbances in a gaseous mass.
That being .so, we must go further, and admit that the spectro-
scope throws no light on the origin of novae ; since it gives us no
inkling of the cau.se which impelled the star to suddenly rise
enormously in temperature and then clothe itself with fiery
vapours.

The origin of the fiovae must therefore be discussed from
considerations other than spectroscopic. My own view is that
nothing we know of but collision is competent to originate a
fiova ; the only other assignable cause is chemical action within
the star, and I do not see how to reconcile a chemical hypothesis
with the facts, seeing that the star attained a temperature such
as probably no compound could experience without decomposition.
This conviction has been materially strengthened by a conversa-
tion with Professor Lyle, who gives it as his opinion that — even
in the most favourable ca.se — the generation of heat by chemical
action alone could not have been rapid enough to account for the
enormously sudden rise in luminosity.^

The final conclusion is, therefore, the following : —

A collision — the direct evidence of which is not forthcoming —

took place in the heavens, resulting in a great development of

heat in the colliding masses ; this was followed by a tremendous

outpouring, in all dii'ection.s, of incandescent gases. The subse-

1 Williams's photographs of the region in the heavens in which the outbreak occurred
show (M.N. , l.\i., p. 337) that the star was below the 12th magnitude on 20th February;
hence its light must have increased at least 5000 times in less than 28 hours.

16 Proceedings of the Royal Society oj Victoria.

quent history of the ejected gases is disclosed to us by the
variations of the bright and dark line spectra, that of the main
body by the dying down of the continuous spectrum. These
combine to show that the star has throughout retained the
general character of an Orion — or at least of a Sirian — star, while
the mass of gas surrounding it now differs from an ordinary
nebula mainly in its state of aggregation. The exact relation
between the outbreak and the changes going on in Ritchey's
nebula is a problem for the future to solve.

Aht. it. — Further Descriptions of the Tertiary Pol
of Victoria.— Part VIII.

By C. M. MAPLESTONE.

(With Plates I. and II.).
[Bead 3rd April, ]9()2.]

Catenariopsis mopningtoniensis, Map. (PI. I., Fig. 1).

This species I described in Part II. of these papers (P.R.S.V.,
vol. xii., pt. 1, p. 11), from a specimen of a single free zooecium
from Mornington, and I stated tliere was nothing to show the "
character of the zoarial growth but that it was probable it might
originate from a creeping stolon like -iEtea. I have found a
fragment of a univalve shell from the Gellibrand River deposit
with several groups of zooecia upon it, they are adherent like
those of Hippothoa ; the zooecia are in single series ; they do not
grow from the median line, but from one side, near the distal
end. In only one of the zooecia is the thyrostome perfectly
preserved ; it shows, as I supposed, a structure of a similar
character to that of Steganoporella ; the " descending plate "
mentioned in the description divides the zooecial cavity into two
chambers in a somewhat similar manner to the " cryptocyst " of
that genus, leaving an " opesiule " on each side. A figure is
given showing the zooecium with the perfectly preserved thyros-
tome and the proximal part of one growing out from it. The
zooecium is misshapen and unsymmetrical, owing to the presence
of some cells of an encrusting zoarium of an indefinable species
interfei'ino; with it.

Smittia macgillivrayi, nov. nom. S. transversa, McG.

Dr. MacGillivray, in his Monograph of the Tertiary Polyzoa of
Victoria (T.R.S.V., vol. iv., p. 92) describes a species of Smittia
as S. transversa, having apparently overlooked the fact that

2

18 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Busk described a species undei' the same name in the report of
the "Challenger" Polyzoa (p. 152, pi. xviii., fig. 7), which is
quite different ; consequently a new name is required for S.
transversa, McG., and I have much pleasure in giving it the
name of S. macgillivrayi, in honor of Dr. MacGilHvray and in'
recognition of his excellent work in both recent and fossil
Polyzoa.

Micpopopella mapginata, n. sp. (PL I., Fig. 2).

Zoarium cylindrical. Zooecia oblong, with raised margins,
perforated with a marginal row of small pores and also scattered
pores on the surface. Thyrostome arched above, nearly straight
proximally, with a crescentic pore below it.

Locality.— ^^v'mg Creek (T. S. Hall).

A single specimen. The raised margins are uncommon in this
genus.

Smittia centralis, var. laevigata. Waters. (PI. I., Fig. 3).

Mr. Waters, in Q.J.G.S., vol. xxxvii., p. 337, describes S.
centralis, and on the same page describes a variety, "laevigata,"
which differs from the type species in having only a few
elongated pores near the edge instead of a double row, and
he gives a figure of it (pi. xiv., figs. 7 and 8) but none of the
type species.

I have found specimens of var. laevigata in the Mitchell River
deposits (I have not seen the type species) which bear ooecia and
which have the peristomes perfect. The peristome in the type is
said to be " very much raised and projecting with a large pore
(probably avicularian) immediately below the orifice ; peristome
transversely oval ;" that of var. laevigata is said to be " less well
preserved." The specimens found by me are undoubtedly those
of var. laevigata; the peristome is perfect, it is much raised and
projecting, but the lower lip is nearly straight, with a very
narrow spout or sinus, and there is no pore immediately below
the orifice. In some cases the spout or sinus is closed at the
top, and this would lead to the supposition that the " pore "
spoken of by Mr. Waters was really a closed sinus. The ooecia

Tertiary Polyzoa of Victoria. 19

are rounded, but nearly flat in front, partially immersed and
adherent upon the zooecium above. Owing to the primary
orifice or thyrostome being hidden by the peristome no internal
denticles can be seen, and there are no avicularia upon the
zooecia, so I consider it somewhat doubtful if this species should
be placed in Smittia.

I would here wish to observe that owing to the very unsatis-
factory state of the classification of the Lepralioid or Escharine
group of the Cheilostomata it is impossible, until a thorough
revision be made, to correctly and definitely place some of the
species described in this paper, but I have tentatively placed
them in the genera to which I consider they should be assigned.

Popella rhomboidalis, n. sp. (PL I., Fig. 4).

Zoarium encrusting. Zooecia rhomboidal, with very highly
raised margins ; nearly flat, with scattered pores over the surface
except on a smooth area below the thyrostome. Thyrostome
orbicular, with a very wide sinus proximally.

Z^m///)'.— Mornington (T. S. Hall).

The greater portion of the only specimen found is figured. It
is a very distinct form, the very highly raised margins being
very characteristic. The thyrostome is of a very similar form
to Porella dennanti described below, therefore I place it in
Porella although there is no avicularium within the .sinus. Some
of the "pores" do not pass through the cell wall, and show as
slight cavities only.

Popella areolata, n. sp. (PI. I., Fig. 5).

Zoarium encrusting. Zooecia irregularly hexagonal ; margins
narrow ; surface somewhat depressed, with large irregularly
shaped areolae round the margin which extend sometimes to the
centre. Thyrostome orbicular, with a large rounded sinus, within
which is a small avicularium.

Locality. — Spring Creek (T. S. Hall).

The very large and irregular areolae are peculiar to this
species.

2a

20 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Popella otwayensis, n. sp. (PI. I., Fig. 6).

Zooecia small, elongated ; surface covered with pores. Thyros-
tome orbicular, with a small sinus below, in which is a small
avicularium ; margin thickened and raised. Ooecia globular,
subimmersed, with a small circular depressed area in front
minutely punctured.

Locality. — Cape Otway (J. Dennant).

This is a curious little species. The surface is covered with
large pores, the dividing line between the zooecia is scarcely
discernible, the thyrostome is thickened and raised, more
especially in the fertile zooecia and in them with the ooecia form
a pyriform elevation. The ooecia have a round perforated area
and are curiously like those of Shizoporella ambita Waters.

Popella dennanti, n. sp. (PI. I., Fig. 7).

Zoarium encrusting. Zooecia obscurely hexagonal, flat, with a
more or less regular row of large pores round the margin ;
margins slightly raised. Thyrostome orbicular, with a wide
sinus in the lower part, within which is a small avicularium.
Ooecia large, globular and partly immersed.

Locality. — Mitchell River (J. Dennant).

A single specimen, but clearly distinct from any described
species ; the nearest to it is Porella ordinata (Smittia ordinata,.
McG.).

Mucronella ppoboscoides, n. sp. (PI. I., Fig. 8).

Zooecia very large, elongated, quadrate ; surface nearly flat,
covered with small pores. Thyrostome orbicular, with a broad
square denticle (lyrula) in the middle of proximal margin and a
small pointed one (cardella) on each side. An enormous elon-
gated mucro or rostrum immediately below the thyrostome,
projecting at nearly a right angle to the surface.

Z^ra//0'.— Griffins, Moorabool (T. S. Hall).

A single specimen consisting of one zooecium only. In the
front view the enormous rostrum, or mucro, hides the proximal

Tertiary Polyzoa of Victoria. 21

part of the thyrostome, but by tilting it longitudinally at an
angle of 45° it is seen as shown at Fig. Sa. The true character
of the rostrum can only be seen when viewing it from the side,
and Fig. 8;^ shows its appearance in this position ; it is only
magnified about half as much as the other figures. There ai-e
traces of a few spines on the distal margin of the thyrostome.

Mucponeila conica, n. sp. (PI. I., Fig. 9).

Zooecia elongated ; surface convex, covered with rather large
^ores. Thyrostome orbicular, with a pointed median denticle
and two lateral ones. Peristome thickened and developed
proximally into a large thick, obtuse, conical mucro.

Locality.— F\\tev Quarries (T. S. Hall).

This is allied to M. proboscoides, but the zooecia are smaller,
convex and perforated with large pores ; the peristome is
thickened, the conical mucro is much broader in proportion to
its length, the median denticle in the throstome is small and
acute (Fig. 9^), and there are no traces of spines.

Popella angustata, n. sp. (PI. I., Fig. 10).

Zoarium encrusting. Zooecia very small and narrow, smooth,
with raised margins, two pores near the base of the cell.
Thyrostome orbicular, with a small acute mucro on the proximal
margin, and a small aviculai'ium below it on or within the
peristome, which is raised in that part.

Locality. — Mitchell River (J. Dennant).

A single specimen. This is one of those species which are
difficult to place generically ; the mucro would place it in Mucro-
nella, but the small avicularium being within the external
margin of the peristome, I place it in Porella.

MucPonella irregularis, n. sp. (PI. II., Fig. 11).

Zoarium encrusting. Zooecia irregular in shape ; surface rugose,
■with raised ridges in places. Thyrostome transversely elliptical,
with a small pointed mucro in the proximal margin, with a small

22 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

pore below it. One or two small elliptical avicularia on the-
surface, with a denticle on each side.

Locality. — Mitchell River (J. Dennant).

A single specimen not very well preserved (the front wall is
apparently broken away in places) but easily distinguished by the
shape of the thyrostome and avicularia. The ridges on the sur-
face are very irregular, and do not appear to indicate the margins
of the zooecia. The small pore below the proximal margin of the-
thyrostome would seem to place this in Porina, but I do not
think it extends through the cell-wall.

Mucronella airensis, n. sp. (PI. II., Fig. 12).

Zoaria ligulate, with zooecia on both sides. Zooecia irregular
in shape, raised towards the distal end; surface finely granulated.
Thyrostome orbicular, with a raised peristome ; a very small
mucro in the proximal part of the margin. A small, elongated,
avicularium on the side of the raised peristome; also several
small broadly-oval ones scattered over the surface.

Locality. — Aire Coastal Beds (T. S. Hall).

The elevation of the peristome, and the surrounding portion of
the surface is very marked; the small, oval avicularia have half
the area covered.

Mucronella personata, n. sp. (PI. II., Pig. 13).

Zoarium encrusting. Zooecia elongate, quadrate, with a single
or double row of pores round the margin ; margin slightly raised.
Thyrostome suborbicular or unguiform, with a curved flat mucro
in the proximal margin; peristome narrow, raised; a small, oval
avicularium on each side of the thyrostome. Ooecia orbicular,
immersed, smooth, with a rounded, shallow pit in front of each
side of a slightly-raised carina.

Locality. — Aire River (A. E. Kitson),

This is a very well-marked species ; the mucro is a simple
curved extension of the wall of the zooecium, and were it not
so prominent it would probably be, considered to be a Lepralia.
The dorsal surface has a round perforation near the distal end,,
which is visible through the opening of the thyrostome.

Tertiary Polyzoa of Victoria. 23

Tpigonopopa, nov. gen.

Zooecia elongated, quadrate. Thyrostome inversely subtri-
angular, curved distally, with a raucro in the proximal angle.
Sides with a macro at the distal ends, forming a small, circular
channel or opening on each side.

The leading characteristic of this genus is the form of the
thyrostome.

Trigonopopa vermicularis, n. sp. (PI. II., Fig. 14).

Zoarium encrusting. Zooecia quincuncial, elongated, quadrate,
but broader distally. Thyrostome inversely subtriangular, curved
distally, with a small mucro in the proximal angle ; sides with a
mucro on the distal ends, forming a small circular channel or
opening on each side. Surface with vermiform markings, at the
end of some of which are pores.

Locality. — Cape Otway (J. Dennant).

I at first assigned this species to Mucronella on account of the
mucro in the proximal part of the thyrostome, but the character
of the whole thyrostome is so peculiar that I have formed a new
genus for its reception, as it cannot be included in any existing
genus ; the distal part is a simple curve in the median portion,
but at each end the margin goes round in a small circular,
almost closed, curve, and then turns sharply proximally forming
a mucro on each side in so doing, and in the rounded proximal
angle there is a small mucro.

Porina tuberculosa, n. sp. (PI. II., Fig. 15).

Zoaria cylindrical. Zooecia in longitudinal series, large,
elongated, quadrate, separated laterally by distinct, raised
margins. Surface covered with scattered tubercles. Thyrostome
transversely elliptical ; peristome elevated, thin, witli a very
large elliptical opening below it, the upper margin of which is
curved and overlaps the opening. A sessile avicularium on each
side of the thyrostome, and equally elevated with it.

Locality. — Gellibrand River (A. E. Kitson).

This is somewhat similar to Porina cribraria, McG. It differs,

24 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

however, from that species in the zooecia being much longer, and
in having the surface covered with tubercles instead of " rounded
deep pits," and the large peristomial pore is not simply
" rounded," but is transversely elliptical, with a curved over-
arching upper margin or lip ; a side view of it is shown on the
left side of the figure near the bottom of the upper left-hand
zooecium, and it is clearly quite different from that of P.
cribraria.

Lagenipora mopningtoniensis, n. sp. (PI. II., Fig. 16).

Zooecia ventricose, surface granulated, with median or lateral
ribs. Thyrostome suborbicular ; peristome elevated distally, and
laterally forming an irregularly trilabiate orifice ; a round
avicularium at the end of a subtubular process, adherent to the
wall of the zooecium.

Locality. — Moz'nington (T. S. Hall).

The shape of the zooecium and the irregularly elevated
peristome are very similar to L. simplex, McG.

Lagenipora airensis, n. sp. (PI. II., Fig. 17.)

Zooecia ventricose ; a slightly -raised scutiform area below the
thyrostome, radially divided into subtriangular elevations, below
which are sometimes one or two ribs enclosing a subtriangular
area. Thyrostome orbicular or horseshoe shaped with a sinus at
each proximal angle ; peristome elevated distally, and laterally,
forming a trilabiate orifice.

Localities. — Aire Costal Beds (Hall and Pritchard) ; Mitchell
Hiver (J. Dennant).

This is a remarkable form, and in some respects resembles
L. morningtoniensis, but it is much larger ; the peristome rises
round the thyrostome in collar-like elevations, distally and
laterally ; there are one or more ribs on the front of the cell. I
have several specimens, and they show considerable variation
owing, chiefly, to the difference in the zoarial growth. The
specimens from which the figures are taken are from the Aire
Coastal Beds, they are glomerate, and were chosen for illustration

Tertiary Polyzoa of Victoria. 25

'because the form of the thyrostome and peristome are better
preserved than in those which are encrusting ; in the latter the
zooecia are quite distinct from one another, and they have two
ribs diverging from the bottom of the scutiform area to the base
of the zooecia, and the triangular space enclosed by them is
slightly concave. The structure of the scutiform area is very
similar to that of the front wall of Membraniporella or of
some Catenicellidae.

Lekythopopa mooraboolensis, n. sp. (PL II., Fig. 18).

Zoarium glomerate. Zooecia orbicular or subcorneal; surface
granulated. Thyrostome with a long tubular peristome, with a
small tubular avicularian process adherent to it ; aperture of
peristome oval with a small mucro (?) projecting inwards.
Primary orifice too far down the peristomial tube to be visible.

Z^^rt///}'.— Moorabool (T. S. Hall).

A single specimen of three or four zooecia. The granulated
surface of the zooecia is yellowish, owing to iron stain, but the
peristomial tube is white and semitranslucent. The mucro seen
in the aperture of the peristome is probably the projecting side
of the avicularian tube.

Lekythopopa kitsoni, n. sp. (PI. II., Fig. 19).

Zoai'ium ligulate, with zooecia on both faces. Zooecia flask-
:shaped, with a circular depressed area in front. Thyrostome
small, orbicular, with a thickened rim or margin.

Localities. — Waurn Ponds (T. S. Hall) ; Darriman (A. E.
Kitson).

This .species is plentiful in the Waurn Ponds deposit, and I
had assumed it was peculiar to it, but recently I found a few
specimens in the Darriman deposit. All of them present a
granular or subcrystalline appearance under the microscope,
rendering it very difficult to be sure of their structure, but it is
evidently a Lekythopora. Many of the specimens are somewhat
worn, and look something like Adeona clavata in a bad state of
preservation, and probably it has been taken for that species.

26 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Notwithstanding that there may be some doubt as to the
correctness of the diagnosis of this species, owing to its peculiar
state of preservation, I have described it because its presence in
the Waurn Ponds and Darrimau deposits, and in no other,
indicates that these deposits belong to the same horizon.

(?) Porella minutissima, n. sp. (PI. II., Fig. 20).

Zoarium encrusting. Zooecia very small, undefined ; surface
covered with scattered mamillae. Tliyrostome with a highly-
raised subtubular peristome, on the proximal part of which and
adherent to it is a tubular process, probably avicularian.

Locality. — Mitchell River (J. Dennant).

This is a single specimen and evidently grew round a small
cylindrical alga. It is a very small celled species ; the figure is
magnified a little more than double the extent of the others.
Just above the thyrostome on one side (shown in two of the
zooecia figured) there is a small circular opening divided into
sectors by radiating ribs, and most of the mamillae have a small
perforation in the centre. It is a very puzzling species, and its
position is very doubtful, as the primary aperture of the
thyrostome cannot be seen ; indeed, I had given up the idea of
describing it, but I do so now to bring under notice the very
peculiar circular opening near the thyrostome, the like of which
I have never seen in a similar position in any species of polyzoa.

EXPLANATION OF FIGURES.

Plate I.

Fig. 1. Catenariopsis morningtoniensis.

„ 2. Microporella marginata.

,, 3. Smittia centralis, var. laevigata.

,, 4. Porella rhomboidalis.

,, 5. Porella areolata.

„ 6. Porella otwayensis.

,, 7. Porella dennanti.

,, 8. Mucronella proboscoides.

Proc. R.S. Victoria, IQ02. Plate I.

'^^0%

ml**

^h^

t^^

f

Si*^

#1^

4.

6

> .'• •'> , •
7

t>^

?i

>^

^r^

•'f iU

10

Proc. R.S. Victoria, igo2. Plate II.

Tertiary Polyzoa of Victoria. 27

Fic^. 8a. the same, thyrostorae.

8^. the same, side view of zooecium.

9. Mucronella conica.

9^. Mucronella thyrostome.

Plate II.

10. Porella angustata.

„ 11. Mucronella irregularis.

12. Mucronella airensis.

„ 13. Mucronella personata.

14. Trigonopora vermicularis.

„ 15. Poi'ina tuberculata.

16. Lagenipora morningtoniensis.

,, 17. Lagenipora airensis.

18. Lekythopora mooraboolensis.

„ 19. Lekythopora kitsoni.

20. C?) Porella minutissima.

Fias. 1 to 19 magnified about 12 diameters. Fig. 20 about 25,

.Art. III. — On the Occurrence of Glacial Beds at Wynyard,
near Table Cape, Tasmania.

By A. E. KITSON, F.G.S.

(With Plate III.).
[Read 3rcl April, 1902.]

The beds referi-ed to occur on the north-west coast of Tasmania,
at and near the township of "Wynyard, as may be seen from the
accompanying map. This is based on the map of Tasmania,
compiled in the Surveyor-General's Department, Hobart, and
published in 1899. Scale, 8 miles to 1 inch.

The only papers on the geology of the district that I have seen
are those specified hereunder.^

In the locality under review the beds extend along the coast
from a point about midway between Table Cape and the mouth
of the Inglis River at Wynyard, to some little distance past the
mouth of Seabrook Creek, which enters Bass Strait about 3 miles
east of the Inglis River. The whole of the outcrops of the beds
east of the Inglis occur at, or little above, sea level, and for the
greater portion of the distance can be seen only at low tide. The
same remarks apply to the area west of the Inglis; but here the
presence of cliffs along the shore line enables the beds to be seen
in section, though only to the depth of a few feet.

On the western side of the Inglis, near its mouth, bluish-grey
shales with occasional pebbles are observable at low tide. They

1 T. Stephens, M.A. : Remarks on the Geological Structure of Part of the North Coast
of Tasmania, with special reference to the Tertiary Marine Beds near Table Cape— Proc.
Roy. Sec. Tasmania, 1869. R. M. Johnston, F.L.S. : Further Notes on the Tertiary Marine
Beds of Table Cape— Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasmania, 1S7C. R. A. Montgomerj-, M.A. : Report on
the Mineral Fields of the Gawler River, Penguin, Dial Range, Mount Housetop, Table Cape,
Cam River, and portion of the Arthur River Districts -Report of Secretary for Mines,
Tasmania, 1895-6. G. A. Waller: Report on the recent discovery of Cannel Coal in the
Parish of Preolenna, and upon the New Victory Mine, near Arthur River— Report Dept. of
Mines, Tasmania, 1901-2.

Glacial Beds at Wynyard, Tasmania. 29'

have a low dip of 4° to 7° from about south-west to west. These
shales show rather pretty curves in the beds, and can be traced
to the adjacent cliff, where a bed of conglomerate of varying
thickness up to 6 feet overlies them on the eastern side of the
point, which has been called Sandy Cove Bluff by Mr. Johnston.
This bluff, about 180 feet high, consists of a series of fossiliferous
beds of limestone of Eocene age capped by basalt. Mr. Johnston
has illustrated it by section in the paper quoted.

The Eocenes are divided by Mr. Johnston into two convenient
divisions; the lower, the Crassatella bed, a few feet only in
thickness; the upper, the Turritella bed, 78 feet thick. Overlying
this is a mass of volcanic rock (basalt, etc.) over 80 feet in
thickness. The Turritella bed is of special interest as it contains
leaves of dicotyledonous plants as well as marine shells, and in it,
also, has been found the oldest known Australian marsupial,
which Professor Spencer, M.A., F.R.S., has described^ under the
name of Wynyardia bassiana.

Further north-west, on the opposite side of Sandy Cove, the
beds appear in better section, and consist of boulder clay merging
into conglomerate. Overlying this is a conglomerate of Eocene
age derived from the glacial beds. This conglomerate contains
numerous remains of mollusca, corals, etc. It varies up to about
4 feet in thickness, and clearly indicates the littoral nature of the
beds. This Eocene conglomei-ate can also been seen in the cliff
at Sandy Cove Bluff, but there it occurs only in very small
patches.

Nearer Table Cape, in Freestone Cove, the till passes upwards
into a fine-grained, greenish-grey argillaceous sandstone, with few
pebbles; and some distance seawards a patch of this rock forms
an islet, standing several feet above the general level of the
sea floor.

The surface of the glacial beds on which the marine Eocenes
have been laid down is rather uneven, and consequently the
Eocenes come to sea level, and again rise above it before finally
disappearing beneath it about one mile to the north-west of
Sandy Cove, where the basalt of Table Cape forms the cliffs.

1 Professor W. Baldwin Spencer, M.A.: A Description of Wynyardia bassiana, a Fossil
Marsupial from the Tertiary Beds of Table Cape, Tasmania— Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1900,
pp. 776-795.

30 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

The till consists of a matrix of tough uiud, with embedded
pebbles, blocks, and masses of various rocks in greater or less
number.

In general appearance it has a strong resemblance to the
glacial beds near Bacchus Marsh, Victoria, described' in various
publications by Professor David, B.A., F.R.S., and Messrs.
E. J. Dunn, F.G.S., G. Officer, B.Sc, L. Balfour, B.A., E. G.
Hogg, M.A., Geo. Sweet, F.G.S., and C. C. Brittlebank, and to
those recently described^ by Professor E. G. Hogg, M.A., as
occurring at Little Peppermint Bay, south of Hobart, Tasmania.
Both of these occurrences are regarded as of Permo-Carboniferous
age.

The included pebbles in the Wynyard beds are rounded, sub-
angular, and angular in shape. Many of them, especially those
of a softer nature, show distinct striae. They comprise various
rocks, such as indurated and normal sandstones, quartzites,
lydianite, banded and ordinary jaspers, quartz of several colors,
felsites and mica schists of various colors and kinds, spotted mica
schist, quartz schist, indurated fine conglomerates, lode quartz
showing included pieces of slate, fine-grained grey and red
granitoid rocks, argillaceous and siliceous slates and shales,
hornstones, coarse grey aplite, agates, chalcedony, fossiliferous
and non-fossiliferous crystalline limestone, and several varieties
of igneous rocks of dark color and fine and medium texture.

E. J. Dunn, F.G.S. : Notes on the Occurrence of Glaciated Pebbles and Boulders in the
so-called Mesozoic Conglomerate of Victoria — Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, vol. xxiv., pt. i. ;
The Glacial Conglomerates of Victoria — Aus. Ass. Advt. Science, Melbourne, 1890. Graham
Officer, B.Sc, and Lewis Balfour, B.A. : Preliminary Account of the Glacial Deposits of
Bacchus Marsh — Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, vol. v., n.s., 1892; Further Note on the Glacial
Deposits of Bacchus Marsh — Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, vol. vi., n.s., 1893. Geo. Sweet,
F.G.S. , and C. C. Brittlebank : The Glacial Deposits of Bacchus Marsh District— Aus. Ass.
Advt. Science, Adelaide, 1893, vol. v. The Glacial Deposits of Bacchus Marsh, G. Officer,
L. Balfour, and E. G. Hogg, The Glacial Geology of Coimaidai — Aus. Ass. Advt. Science,
Brisbane, 1895, vol. vi. Professor T. W. Edgeworth David, B.A., F.G.S. : Evidences of
Glacial Action in Australia in Permo-Carboniferous Time — Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc, Maj%
1896, vol. lii., part ii. C. C. Brittlebank, Geo. Sweet, F.G.S., and Professor T. W. Edgeworth
David, B.A., F.G.S. : Further Evidence as to the Glacial Action in the Bacchus Marsh
District, Victoria— Aus. Ass. Advt. Science, Sydney, 1898, vol. vii. Craham Officer,
B.Sc, and Evelyn G. Hogg, M.A. : The Geology of Coimaidai, Part i.— Proc. Roy. Soc.
Victoria, vol. x., n.s., pt. i., 1897; The Geology of Coimaidai, Part ii.— Proc. Roy. Soc.
Victoria, vol. x., n.s., pt. ii., 1897.

2 Professor E. G. Hogg, M.A. : The Glacial Beds of Little Peppermint Bay, Tasmania
— Report of Secretary for Mines, Tasmania, 1900-1, and Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasmania, 1902.

Glacial Beds at Wynyard, Tas7)iania. 31

These are like dense basalt, and show clusters of dark-colored
crystals, probably augite.

The included rocks vary in size from mere gravel to blocks of
granite, quartzite, and sandstone, several tons in weight. One of
these granite blocks may be seen embedded in fine sediment in
Freestone Cove, and large blocks of highly-jointed quartzite occur
in the uppermost portion of the bed on the north-eastern point of
Sandy Cove Bluff. Small pieces of these quartzites are observable
in the immediately-overlying Eocene derived conglomerate.
Veins of calcite up to several inches in thickness traverse the
glacial beds in various places.

Fossils have been found in some of the pebbles of the glacial
conglomerate. They have heen described^ by Mr. Robt.
Etheridge, jun., as Silurian types, comprising Pentamerus
tasmaniensis, R. Etheridge, fils; Spirifer, 3spp. ; Strophomena (?);
Tentaculites; Orthis; and Atrypa (?). No fossils, however, of
contemporaneous age have been noticed in the glacial deposits,
as has already been pointed out by Messrs; Stephens and
Montgomery.

Mr. Stephens has described^ these Wynyard conglomerates
as follows: — "The horizontally bedded conglomerates and breccias
of very variable character and uncertain age which occur at
intervals between Port Sorell and Table Cape appear to come
next in geological order, but may belong to the last-named series
of rocks " (the Mersey Coal Measures ot Permo-Carboniferous
age). "... At the mouth of the Inglis .... large angular
blocks of granite and porphyry, the former sometimes weighing-
several tons, together with rolled pebbles of many of the Primary
rocks, are here seen embedded in a fine-grained mudstone, this
being evidently derived from the denudation of some of the softer
slates, and deposited as mud on the margin, or in the bed of some
ancient river or estuary, which occupied a basin with nearly the
same principal boundaries as the modern Inglis. These massive
blocks of granite and other x'ocks, which are not now found
tfi situ within several miles of their present position, I consider to

1 R. Etheridge, jun. : Description of Remains of Trilobites from the Lower Silurian
Rocks of the Mersey River, and Brachiopoda from the Conglomerate of Table Cai)e— Proc.
Roy. Soc. Tasmania, 1882.
2 Loc. cit.

32 Proceedings of the Royal Society oj Victoria.

furnish more conclusive evidence of glacial agency in the
geological history of Tasmania than I have met with elsewhere,
and they strongly corroborate the testimony afforded by the
seemingly erratic boulders which occur at various points in the
basin of the S. Esk."

Mr. Montgomery, in speaking of these conglomerates, says^ : —
" In New South Wales it has been noted that both above
and below the Greta Coal Series, which corresponds with
the Mersey Coal Measures of Tasmania, there occur layers of
erratic boulders, probably deposited by ice during periods of
continued low temperature in the Southern Hemisphere. These
cold periods might supply an explanation of the paucity of fossils
in the Wynyard formation, and ice action would likewise
account for the occurrence of large and heavy boulders in it in a
mudstone matrix, instead of the more usual one of coarse sand
and gravel, which is the ordinary result of the sorting of detrital
material by wave action. During my examination, however, T
did not see any bouldei's exhibiting ice striation, or of such
size as not to be accountable for by the ordinary forces at work
on every sea shore."

Besides the rocks already mentioned by him Mr. Stephens
gays: — "Among the rolled pebbles which line portions of the

beach near Table Cape there have been found from time

to time fragments of a hard compact shale, varying in color from
dark brown to dull black, and so closely resembling the so-called
'kerosene shale' of Hartley, N.S.W., both in appearance and
behaviour under the simple tests to which I have subjected it,

that they may be considered identical and the discovery

at different points of several specimens all identical in character,
force us to the conclusion that it is of Pre-Tertiary age, and that
portions of the series from which it has come, though removed by
denudation near the coast line, will one day be found at no great
distance inland."

Mr. Montgomery, also, referring to these loose fragments of
coal found on the beach near Wynyard, says- that "high up in
it " (the Wynyard formation) " the fossiliferous beds and the coal
seam may yet be found."

1 Loc. eit.

2 Loc. cit.

Glacial Beds at Wynyard, Tasmania. 33

It is interesting to note that these predictions, first by Mr.
Stephens, and later by Mr. Montgomery, have been fully verified,
as the upper beds of the series to which the glacial deposits
belong, and containing seams of cannel coal, as pointed out^
by Mr. Geo. A. Waller, have been discovered some little distance
inland from Wynyard, in the basin of the Inglis River.

At the mouth of the Inglis, east of the breakwater, till may be
seen at low tide, and here appears about horizontal. About
three-quarters of a mile further east shaly mudstones, very much
jointed, show in the beach floor. They dip about N. 70° W. at 11°.
The successively superimposed beds show beautiful serrated edges
at right angles to the shore line, where the ever restless waves
have furrowed them. There is also a pretty, wavy appearance
along the different beds, and they are jointed to a great extent.

Traced further eastwards along the shore hard, tough con-
glomerates, consisting principally of normal and altered sedi-
mentary rocks, are visible on the beach just to the west of
Seabrook Creek, with an overlying bed, seen only in places, of an
exceedingly hard, fine, dense, bluish-grey sandstone, greatly
resembling many sandstones in the Victorian Mesozoic Coal
Measures, even to their characteristic pitted weathering.

To the east of the point of basalt I'unning into the sea on the
eastern side of this creek blocks of similar conglomerate can also
be seen. They contain veins of calcite up to 6 inches in
thickness.

The glacial beds were not observed east of this place, the shore
line as far as Burnie, wherever examined, being occupied by
recent deposits, by basalt, or by highly inclined, folded and
contorted siliceous slates, sandstones, and quartz schists, having a
general strike between N.N.E. and N.E. These are regarded by
Mr. Stephens as possibly forming the base of the Lower Silurian
(Ordovician) series, or even of being still older in age, while Mr.
Montgomery speaks of them as of Cambro-Silurian age.

They contain multitudes of quartz veins and small reefs,
especially near Burnie. A number of anticlines and synclines
can also be observed at low tide, the former especially being
splendid examples, showing beautifully the rounded curves of the
strata.

1 Loc. cit.

34 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

They also show numerous intrusions of igneous rocks of several
kinds, occurring as dykes and lenticular patches, probably plugs.
These can be seen specially between Cooee Creek and Burnie.
The rock in some cases is of fine texture, and has a granitic
appearance; in others it is like basalt, but very much decomposed.
The intruded rocks are considerably altered along the contact,
especially, as might be expected, in the case of the larger
intruding masses, which have entangled among them blocks and
pieces of the sedimentary rocks. Several of these igneous rocks
have been examined by Mr. W. H. Twelvetrees, F.G.S., Govern-
ment Geologist of Tasmania, and Mr. W. F. Petterd, who
describe' them as gabbro.

The relation of these glacial beds of Permo-Carboniferous age
to those of early Palaeozoic (Cambro-Silurian) age was not
noticed by section anywhere along this part of the coast. Near
Seabrook Creek their contact with the folded rocks was obscured
owing to the flat nature of the beach, and its sandy character.
Perhaps it may be visible at low tide.

The only place back from the coast where the glacial beds were
noticed by me is in a small section about half a mile inland, near
the bridge over the Inglis River on the Table Cape road. Here
the rocks are shaly mudstones with pebbles, showing a dip of
about 4° 30' to N. 25° W. The contained pebbles are of rocks
similar to those before mentioned. Mr. Montgomery, however,
states- that the conglomerates, which he calls the "Wynyard
Formation," occupy an extensive area to the south of Wynyard,
between the Inglis and Cam Rivers, and as far back as the
Campbell Range, and the Arthur River. He also says: — "It is
possible that the Wynyard Formation is the base of the Coal
Measures." Mr. Waller holds the same opinion, for he says* : —
"There is now little reason to doubt that the 'Wynyard
Formation' forms the base of the Permo-Carboniferous system."

The occurrence of coal seams in the same series as contains the
glacial deposits is a matter "of interest as tending to show the
close relationship between the glacial deposits of Permo-

1 The Igneous Rocks of Tasmania— Trans. Aus. Inst. Mining Engineers, vol. v., 1898.

2 Loc. cit.
s Loc. cit.

Proo. £.8. Victoria, igo2. Plate III.

, yftw^/ Ca/Mi

*ji-

MAP OF THE MERSEY-WYflYARD DISTRICT, TASMANIA.

,.,r SCAL£- 8 Miles \o One Inch

..•^'

l/

iTaS/e Cape

4r»^ A..;.

1 Ct^C

>y ,j/ji^

f"

/ *

'^^'i^

c r

\

VP/MriJl

f » A\ Alrw

lHK^k\

Y"'iL

Glacial Beds at Wynyard, Tasmania. 35

Carboniferous age of South Africa, New South Wales, Victoria
and Tasmania.

Mr. E. J. Dunn, F.G.S., draws attention^ to the association of
coal seams and glacial beds at Ashford, near the northern
boundary of New South Wales; also to a paper- by Mr. David
Draper on the occurrence of Glossopteris, Gangamopteris, etc.,
associated with coal seams at Boschman's Fontein, Maggie's
Fontein, etc., in the Transvaal. Mr. Dunn is of opinion that
these boulder beds mentioned by Mr. Draper are portions of the
Dwyka conglomerate, to which when first recognised he gave
its specific name, from the site where it is characteristically
.represented. The occurrence in the River Inglis district, south
■of Wynyard, of marine fossils of Permo-Carboniferous age, in the
series containing the glacial beds, and the association of
•characteristic Permo-Carboniferous plants such as Glossopteris,
Gangamopteris, and Noeggerathiopsis, with similar marine fossils
in the Mersey Permo-Carboniferous Coal Measures, some 40 miles
to the east of this locality, furnish evidence for the correlation
of the Mersey series with that south of Wynyard. The wide
distribution of massive conglomerates of Permo-Carboniferous age
in Tasmania leads one to the opinion that in many other localities
than have yet been recognised in that State their glacial origin
-will be fully demonstrated.

The glacial deposits at Wynyard were first noticed by me
in December, 1900, when hurriedly examining the Eocene
fossiliferous beds at Wynyard. A strong opinion was then
formed that they were of glacial origin, but I was not enabled to
examine them carefully at that time.

At the meeting of the Australasian Association for the
Advancement of Science held in Hobart in January of this yeai*,
I mentioned the matter when the Report of the Glacial Committee
was under discussion, and referred to the probable glacial origin
of these beds. A subsequent visit in company with the members
of the geological excursion of the Association to specially examine
the conglomerates fully confirmed this opinion, and the glacial
origin of the beds was quickly recognised by the whole party.

1 E. J. Dunn, F.G.S.: The Northward Extension of the Derrinal Conglomerate (Glacial
-Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, vol. x., n.s., pt. ii., for 1897.

'- Quarterlj' Journal Geol. Soc, vol. liii., pt. iii., No. 211, p. 310 et. seq., Aug., 1897.

3a

Art. IV. — Notes on Some Recent Marine Deposits in the-
Neighbourhood of Williamstown.

By F. E. grant and E. O. THIELE.

[Read 12tli June, 1902.]

On the northern shores of Port Phillip, immediately to the'
west of Williamstown, there is a considerable series of beds of
recent age^ lying principally in depressions in the basalt, which,
is the prevailing rock of the district, but which, as a reference
to the Geological Quarter-Sheet shows, extends in places for
more than a mile inland.

The best section at present exposed for the examination of
these beds occurs at a point on the now disused Railway to
Altona Bay, about 200 yards west of the Kororoit Creek, about
2^^ miles from North Williamstown Railway Station, and about
a quarter of a mile from the sea — lying immediately at the
back of the Williamstown Racecourse. This particular spot has
been referred to by Messrs. Hall and Pritchard^ as a Post
Tertiary marine deposit considerably above sea level. At this-
point the beds appear to be about 8 feet thick, and do not lie in
a hollow in the basalt, but form part of a small rise through,
which a cutting about 5 feet high has been made for the purposes
of the railway. At the north-east end of the cutting the rock;
is entirely basalt, the surface of which is seen to slope sea-
wards, passing at first under a thin layer of shells and travertine
and then disappearing altogether beneath the shell beds, which
show for the entire depth of the cutting at its south-western end.
These beds consist very largely of shells, intei'stratitied with a
a little fine white sand, and are regularly bedded. By careful
collection over SO species of Molluscs, also Echinoids, Polyzoa,
Corals, etc., can be readily obtained from the face of the cutting,
but we have so far been unable to find any which cannot be

1 Proc. Roy. Soc. Vic, vol. ix. n. s., art. xiv.

Marine Deposits near Williainstown. 37

•referred to as living species, nearly all of which can be found
living in the waters of the bay, although several of the forms are
not now common on the neighbouring coast (e.g. Murex umbili-
catus, Solen vaginoides, etc.). The beds are also traversed in
places by seams of hard travertine in which almost all trace of
the shells, from which they have been derived, has disappeared.
This formation is no doubt due to the action of meteoric waters.

The very large number of shells present, and their perfect
state of preservation, point to the beds not being of the nature of
■drifted sands or dunes. Even tlie most fragile of the Gasteropoda
such as Haminea brevis, Eunaticina umbilicata, Amphibola
fragilis, Diala monile, Turbonilla mariae, and Turbonilla spina
are rarely found in a broken state, while a large percentage of
the Lamellibranchs are found as double valves, and appear to be
in situ, showing no signs of being much weathered or of having
^travelled very far. Other similar beds along the coast present
the same features in this respect, and to the west of the mouth
■of the Werribee, shell beds more extensive than those at Altona
•occur. They are there intersected by numerous sewerage
channels, and consequently exhibit many tine sections, but we
have not had an opportunity of investigating them throughly.
The regular bedding of the shells, in every case, is worthy of
notice — those of an estuarine type, such as Ophicardelus,
Amphibola, etc., being frequently found in layers by themselves,
interstratified with others of a more purely marine type —
apparently pointing to alterations from time to time in the
conditions under which the deposits were laid down. All the
beds show a slight dip following the contour of tlie hill which
they form. On sinking through the beds on the floor of the
deepest part of the cutting to a distance of about 3 feet, a
decomposed wackenitic clay was met with, which gave place to
the ordinary basalt of the district at a greater depth.

The top of the beds was ascertained to be 1\ feet above
■ordinary high water, and as the perfect condition of the shells
renders it improbable that they are wind blown, further evidence
would appear to be here present of at least 10 feet rise in the
Jevel of the land bordering this part of the bay during recent
geological time.

38 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

In conclusion, we have to thank Messrs. A. Brown, and H,
Summers, for taking the lieight of the beds above sea leveL

The following is a list of the moUusca found in the deposit : —
La mellibra nchiata .

Barnea australasiae, Gray
Mactrella ovalina, Lamarck

,, cretacea, Angas
Anapella cuneata, Lamarck
Mesodesyma elongata, Deshayes
Soletellina livida, Lamarck
Tellina deltoidalis, Lamarck
,, decussata, Lamarck
Chione strigosa, Lamarck
,, aphrodina, Lamarck
,, striatissima, Sowerby
,, laevigata, Sowerby
Tapes fabagella, Deshayes
Venerupis crenata, Lamarck
Cardium tenuicostatum, Lamarck
Chamostrea albida, Lamarck
Loripes icterica. Reeve
Area trapezina, Lamarck

,, fasciata, Reeve
Mytilus latus, Lamarck
Modiola nebulosa.
Pteria papilionacea, Lamarck
Diplodonta globularis, Lamarck
Solen vaginoides, Lamarck
Saxicava arctica, Linnaeus
Gastropoda.

Murex umbilicatus, T. Woods

,, triformis, Reeve
Lotorium verrucosum, Reeve
Fasciolaria coronata, Lamarck
Trophon paivae, Crosse

,, petterdi, Crosse
Cominella lineolata, Lamarck

,, costata, Quoy and Gaimard

Nassa fasciata, Lamarck

Marine Deposits near Williamstown. 3^

Nassa pauperata, Lamarck
,, labecula, A. Adams
,, rufociiicta, A. Adams
Turricula scalariformis, T. Woods
Colunibella lincolriensis, Reeve
Mangilia anomala, Angas

,, alucinans, Sowerby
Clathurella tincta, Reeve
Conus anemone, Lamarck
Natica plumbea, Lamarck
,, didyma, Chemnitz
,, conica, Lamarck
Eunaticina umbilicata, Quoy and Gaimard
Turbonilla spina, Crosse and Fischer

,, mariae, T. Woods

Obeliscus tasmanicus, T. Woods
Cerithium monachus, Crosse and Fischer
Bittium granarium, Kiener

,, cerithium, Quoy and Gaimard
,, lawleyanum, Crosse
,, minimum, T. Woods
Potamides australis, Quoy and Gaimard
Triforis angasi, Crosse and Fischer
Diala monile, A. Adams
,, lauta, A. Adams
,, pagodula, A. Adams
Risella melanostoma, Gmelin
Pseudoliotia micans, Adams
Phasianella australis, Gmelin
Astralium aureum, Jonas
Clanculus plebeius, Philippi
,, dunkeri, Koch

,, aloysii, T. Woods

Austrocochlea constricta, Lamarck
Diloma odontis. Wood

Phasianotrochus irisodontes, Quoy and Gaimard
Gibbula tiberiana, Crosse
Bulla australis. Gray
Cylichna arachis, Quoy

40 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Haminea brevis, Quoy and Gaimard
Tornatina fusiformis, Adams
Siplionai'ia diemenensis, Quoy and Gaimard
Hipponyx australis, Lamarck
Calyptraea calyptraeformis, Lamarck
Haliotis naevosa, Martyn
Assiminea granum.
Amphibola fragilis, Lamarck

„ quoyana, Potiez

Ophicardelus australis, Quoy and Gaimard
Truncatella scalariana, Cox

Anr. V. — Further Notes on the River Yarra Improve-
ment Sections, at the Botanical Gardens, Melbourne.

By a. E. KITSON, F.G.S.

[Eead 12tli June, 1902.]

A former paper^ on the Geology of this locality was read before
this Society on 13th December, 1900. It was stated therein"
that, at the eastern end of the new cutting on the
northern side of the river, a stratum of " black fissile clay, with
three thin laminae of comminuted shells, and lenticles of pure
sand, 3 feet to 4 feet 6 inches " in thickness, overlay basalt, being
separated from it by a bed of sandy clay. It was, also, mentioned
that a small parcel of the shelly material, collected from this clay
bed, had been mislaid. This collection has, fortunately, come to
hand again, and careful examination of the material has enabled
-a few of the shells to be identified. 1 am indebted to Mr. J. H.
Gatliff, and Mr. J. Dennant, F.G.S. , F.C.S., for kindly determin-
ing them. The shells were so decomposed that even with the
greatest care only a few specimens could be obtained in good
■order. These prove to be chiefly of lamellibranchs.
The list of those obtained is as follows :—

Nassa labecula, A. Adams.

Tatea rufllabris, A. Adams.

Sphaerium ( = Cyclas) McGillivrayi, E. A. Smith.

Corbicula sp.

Mactra sp.
The greater number of the fragments consist apparently of
those of Corbicula. Of the two gastropods, one entire specimen,
and several fragments of Nassa were found ; while the small
Tatea rufilabris occurred rather sparingly.

1 Kitson, A. E.: Geological Notes on the River Yarra Improvement Sections at the
Botanical Gardensand Vicinity, Melbourne— Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, vol. xiii., n.s., pt. ii.,
1900.

2 Loc. cit. p. 247.

42 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

By refei'ence to the list of shells given in the former paper as
occurring in the shelly marl it will be noticed that neither Cor-
bicula nor Tatea was included. These shells did not occur in the
marl as far as observed. The black clay they were found in was
then regarded as being probably the littoral portion of the
estuarine deposits, and tliat opinion has now been confirmed
as far as relates to this locality. The occurrence in this clay of
Tatea and Corbicula, and their association with Nassa and
Mactra prove that this spot was near the margin of the mouth
of the old Yarra, in water greatly affected by the rise and fall
of the tide.

Since the former paper was published, work of an intermittent
character has been done in these Yarra Improvements. The
cuttings have been carried about 165 yards past Punt Road foot-
bridge, and deepened on the western side. The strata on the
western side revealed up to the present time consist of
15 feet of alluvium, the lower portion being a yellowish-grey
loamy clay with pieces of carbonised wood, overlying 6 feet of
dark bluish-grey stiff clay with pieces of wood. No shells of
any kind are observable.

[On the east of the bridge the cutting ends in grey indurated
claystones and massive beds of grey mudstones. On the northern
side these Silurian rocks are covered by 4 feet of alluvium at the
eastern end, but at 50 yai'ds west they disappear beneath about
20 feet of alluvium. On the southern side they show at the
surface for 75 yards from the end. The beds dip 80° at 47°.
The overlying beds consist of grey and brown loam, 12-16 feet^
resting on 8 feet of dark and light coloured loam and clay, the
lower portion of which contains a large number of angular frag-
ments of the Silurian rocks. An interesting dyke occurs in the
Silurian strata in the southern bank. It is from 16 inches to
2 feet wide, bears N.65°W., and runs parallel with the section.
At the western end it shows at the surface, while at the eastern
it is split into two prongs, one 3 inches, the other 8 inches thick.
In the face here numerous thin bands and threads branch oflF and
intersect the strata along the joint planes. About 20 feet west
of this point a prong runs N. from the dyke. The rock is greatly
decomposed, but is evidently of a granitic nature, and, as seen,
consists of clay and large crystals of biotite up to 1 inch in

Yarra Improvement Sections. 43

breadth, and -^^ inch in thickness. No quartz was noticed in the
material examined. This dyke is probably identical with that
from which the micaceous material in the Anderson Street
cutting was obtained, and belongs to the same series of intrusions
as the smaller dyke near the old pumping station mentioned in
the previous paper, and those revealed^ by the sewerage works in
South Yarra.— 7.vi.02].

The evidence furnished by the shell-bearing dark clay by its
occurrence above the basalt, settles the question of the relative
positions of the volcanic and younger sedimentary rocks here.
From the evidence of the deposits of sandy clays, sands and
gravels, beneath the basalt in tlie Richmond and Clifton Hill
quarries the basalt in those places has not flowed immediately
over the marine marls, and it is very doubtful if this arm of the
estuary ever extended up the valley to the latter place.

[Dr. Coates records'-^ the occurrence of marine shells Foraminifera
and Diatomaceae from "the mud of a swamp near the Yarra,
where the iMelbourne and suburban railway crosses that river."
He says, that in some of tlie specimens of the deposit " marine
shells, pieces of cuttle fish bone, and the debris of echini" occur.
Also, that "from inquiries that have been instituted, it is
estimated that the swamp has a depth of not less than 60 feet."
He was, therefore, of the opinion that the waters of Port Phillip,
at a time probably not very remote, covered this locality, and
that after elevation of the land took place a lagoon or saltwater
marsh was formed, and with further elevation a possible
incoming of fresh water destroyed the organisms.

Accepting this record of marine fossils at South Yarra, the
extension of the estuary deposits considerably further up the
valley of the Yarra than Anderson Street bridge is clearly
proved. The question, therefore, of the relation of the basalt to
the shelly marls becomes a still more interesting one. It seems
quite improbable for the latter to overlie the basalt, and the only
alternatives are either that the basalt is of younger or of

1 T. S. Hall, M.A., and G. B. Pritchard : A Contribution to our Knowledge of the
Tertiaries in the Neighbourhood of Melbourne — Footnote p. 226, Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria,,
vol. ix., n.s., 1896.

2 John Coates, M.R.C.S.L. : On a Deposit of Diatomaceae at South Yarra — Trans. Roy.
Soc. Victoria, vol. v., 1860.

•44 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

contemporaneous age. I am inclined to adopt the latter opinion,
and to think that the basalt has flowed north-westward into the
deep estuary, and filled it up almost completely except on the
southern edge. It was probably prevented from occupying the
indentations of the Botanical Gardens lagoon and South Yarra
valley by the jutting points of Silurian rocks which occur at the
•eastern sides of their oulets, as may be seen by reference to the
map with the former paper. These points have doubtless
deflected the flow towards the north. The outlet to Port Phillip
was probably not closed for some time later, and in the meantime
brackish water fauna occupied the locality near the Anderson
Street bridge, as shown by the shells specially mentioned herein.
— 7.vi.02].

Narrow arms of the estuary, similar to this of the Yarra,
formerly existed along the Moonee Ponds Creek and the
^Saltwater River. In the former locality marine shells have been
found, ^ and the estuarine deposits probably extended up to the
vicinity of Flemington Road Railway StatioA. On the Saltwater
River in all probability they reached the foot of and even beyond
the semi-circular ridge in the Flemington Racecourse, occupying
the whole of the "Flat" in this reserve.

At the Botanical Gardens the old estuary appears to have had
fairly steep banks. For most of -the way from its eastern side,
and round its northern end past Kensington and to Footscray,
the margin of the estuary consisted of more or less steep
banks and clifls, while on going to the south-west towards
Williamstown these clifts vanish, and the shore is low, and slopes
gently inland.

In close proximity to the place where the marine shells occur,
along the Moonee Ponds Creek, a portion of the jaw of
Diprotodon australis, Owen, has been found, as recorded" by Mr.
Piitchard, and though the nature of the deposits containing the
shells, and their relation to the sandy clay in which the bone was
found are not stated, yet it appears as if they are contempo-
raneous deposits. Mr. Pritchard has evidently so regai'ded them,
and is of opinion that they are of Pleistocene age.

1 Pritchard, G. B.: On tlie Occurrence of Diprotodon australis, Owen, near ilelbourne
— I'roc. Roy. See. Victoria, vol. xii., n.s., pt. i., 1899.
- L(jc. cit.

Ya7'ra Imjyrovement Sections. 45-

In a recent paper^ by Mr. J. F. Mulder, the basalt of the
plains of the Moorabool River, near the viaduct on the Geelong-
Ballarat Railway, is shown to be resting upon a deposit of sandy
gravel, full of calcareous casts of Newer Pliocene fossil shells, thus
proving the basalt to be not older than Newer Pliocene age. The
upper volcanic rocks of the whole of the Western Plains coming
eastwards to the Melbourne district are regarded as belonging to
the one age. Therefore, the basalt in the Lower Yarra Valley
must be Newer Pliocene or younger.

Evidence is present showing that the whole of the area
bounding the Yarra Estuary was within late geological time
beneath the waters of the Bay, and has since been slowly raised.
Meanwhile the Yarra continued cutting its channel deeper,
and extending its mouth till at the present time this is about
5 miles away in a straight line from its former mouth at the
Botanical Gardens.

The occurrence of indentations in the eastern shores of Port
PhillijD, such as the areas occupied by the Elwood and Carrum
Swamps, and the thin deposits containing recent shells which
cover a large extent of the coast along the western shores of Port
Phillip from Williamstown towards Geelong, also prove that the
area bordering the northern part of Port Phillip is one of
comparatively recent elevation.

Again, along the margin of Western Port, and in the valley of the
Powlett River in South Gippsland, there also occurs what seenis
undoubted evidence of the existence oi a large sheet of water in
comparatively recent times, and of subsequent elevation of the land
surface. In the Powlett Valley the country in some parts has
the appearance of an area originally consisting of low mud banks,
islands and promontories, separated by indentations with fairly
deep channels having the character of those now visible in
Western Port. [Further east, also, such as along the northern
shores of Corner Inlet, evidence of elevation does not seem to be
wanting. It seems, therefore, as if a considerable portion of the
southern coast of Victoria has undergone some elevation during
recent times. I am indebted to Messrs. T. S. Hall, M.A.,

1 J. F. Mulder : Newer Pliocene Strata on the Moorabool Hiver — Proc. Roy. Soo.
Victoria, vol. xiv., part ii., 1901.

46 Proceedings of the Royal Society of VictoHa.

J. Barnard, and F. G. A. Barnard for information respecting the
diatomaceous deposit. I was not familiar with the paper by
Dr. Coates till considerably after this paper was read. I desire
to thank Professor Gregory, D.Sc, F.R.S., for considerately
allowing the new material referred to herein to be microscopically
examined in the Geological Laboratory at the University, and
also Mr. H. J. Grayson for kindly making the examination. Mr.
Grayson has determined the occurrence of diatoms belonging to
the genera Campylodiscus, Actinocyclus, Surirella, Navicula, and
Inclosira in the material from the most easterly cutting, and also
a few spicules of a sponge belonging to the genus Spongilla. Tn
one of the beds here half of the material consists of diatoms,
almost exclusively Actinocyclus with a few Campylodiscus. The
shell-bearing clay above the basalt contains no diatoms except an
occasional frustule of Campylodiscus. Mr. Grayson had himself
collected some diatomaceous earth at a depth of 5 feet from the
surface, close to the spot from which the collection examined by
Dr. Coates was made. He found that the prevailing diatoms
were those belonging to the first four mentioned genera, and that
the material differs in no way from the Punt Road samples. He
also says that diatoms are abundant at Coode Island and West
Melbourne lagoon at a depth of about 5 feet, near the Corpora-
tion Freezing Works in Flinders Street, Melbourne, and in
sewerage works on the southern side of the Yarra River on the
Port Melbourne flat. It will thus be seen that they occur over a
large area of the low land in the metropolis. — 7.vi.02].

Akt. VI. — Description of some Neiv Victorian FresJt-
water Amjphipoda, No. 2.

By O. a. SAYCE.

(With Plates IV., V., VI., VII.).

[Read 12th June, 1902.]

In last year's Proceedings I described four new species of fresh-
-water Victorian Aniphipoda.^ Since then I have received addi-
tional material through the kindness of friendly collectors, and
&xa now able to add four more hitherto undescribed species from
our State. Amongst these one is of especial interest, inasmuch
as, although an inhabitant of surface-waters, it is totally without
eyes, and is comparable in this respect to another of our local
species (Niphargus pulchellus) described by me in these
Proceedings.^

In addition to the descriptions of the new species, I have given
further information concerning some of those described in my
last paper, and have adduced evidence of the migration of the
genus Chiltonia.

Chiltonia austral is, Sayce.

Hyalella australis, Sayce. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., xiii.,
pt. 2, pp. 226-230, pi. xxxvi.

Rev. T. R. R. Stebbing, F.R.S., recently'^ established the
genus Chiltonia for Dr. Chilton's Hyalella mihiwaka, from New
Zealand, and, although the characters of my H. australis are not
quite in agreement with his generic description, notably in the
terminal rudimentary uropods being two, not one-jointed, I think
it bettter to unite it with the New Zealand form.

1 Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, vol. .\iii., pt. ii., pp. 225-242.
■i Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, vol. xii., pt. ii., pp. 152-159.
3 Trans. Linn. Soc. Londoa, vii., pt. 8, p. 408.

48 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

The only marked differences between the several species of
Hyalella and Chiltonia australis are that in the latter the first
maxillae does not possess a minute rudimentary one-jointed palp,
and the second pair of gnathopoda in the male is without a
conspicuous lobe to the wrist; but this latter difierence is only
one of degree, for it has a minute unarmed one, as shown in my
drawing.

In Chiltonia mihiwaka, besides the loss of the maxillary palp, the
terminal uropoda are only one-jointed, and in Dr. Chilton's drawing
the wrist of the second gnathopods is quite without any lobe.

Chiltonia australis therefore forms an interesting connecting
link between the New Zealand and American forms, and affords
good evidence of C mihiwaka having migrated from America to
New Zealand through Victoria, as some other forms of life appear
to have done.

Through the kindness of Professor Baldwin Spencer, from
whom I received some material collected from Lake Hindmarsh,,
I am now able to add another species to this genus.

Chiltonia subtenuis, sp. nov. (PI. IV.).

Male. — Body comparatively slender, first four side-plates of
subequal depth to their respective segments. Epimeral plates of
last two segments of metasome with posterior angles a little
produced acutely backwards, ventral margins evenly convex.
Cephalon large, as long as first two segments of mesosome com-
bined, lateral edges deeply excavated. Eyes large, slightly oval.

Mouth parts large and strong, possessing all the characteristics
of the type. Maxillipedes relatively stouter, but of quite the
same form and armature.

Upper antennae equal in length to cephalon, and first three
segments of mesosome combined, peduncle with second and third
joints of equal length, each shorter than the first ; flagellum a
little longer than peduncle with about nine rather long joints.
Lower antennae a little shorter than the upper, gland cone
prominent, following joint produced below distally to a conical
spur tipped with setae ; flagellum of about six joints.

First gnathopoda with anterior margin of side-plates slightly
produced anteriorly, lower margin evenly convex, carpus with

Neiu Victorian Fresh-ivater A7)iphipoda. 49

evenly rounded lobe bearing about eight stout faintly feathered
setae ; propodus a little longer than carpus, subtrigonal,
widening distally, anterior margin strongly curved, palm nearly
transverse, slightly convex and entire, meeting the posterior
margin in an evenly rounded narrow curve bearing a little spine,
posterior margin a little convex and free from setae. Second
gnathopoda with propodus normally large, almost as broad as
long, posterior margin equalling half the length of the anterior,
both nearly straight, palm transverse, convex and setose, detined
by a small rounded tubercle. Dactylus of equal length to the
palm, inner margin entire, and on the outer margin a plumose
setae.

First two pairs of pereiopoda equal in length and form, the
third also of similar length, fourth longer, fifth of equal length
to the fourth. In each of the last three pairs the basos is
expanded, the last greatly so, being as wide as its length, with the
hind margin strongly convex and deeply and irregularly serrated.

Uropods normal to the genus, terminal pair one-jointed. Telson
subrectangular, lateral angles rounded, distal margin with a
small rounded expansion medianly ; armed distally above, on
each side of the median line, with two spinules.

Female. — Similar in form to the male, except in the second
gnathopoda which are, except for being rather longer, like the
first pair.

Colour. — Spirit specimens uniformly yellowish.

Length. — ? 4 mm. $ rather larger.

Occurrence. — From Lake Hindmarsh, North- Western Victoria
(received from Professor Baldwin Spencer).

Rejnarks. — This species is easily distinguished from the New
Zealand C. mihiwaka, by the much more slender body, and the
larger head and eyes ; and from C. australis, by the shorter
urosome, one-jointed terminal uropoda, shape of the hands, and
much shorter antennae. Amongst about twenty specimens there-
were only two males.

Atyloides fontana, sp. nov. (PI. V.).

In general appearance very like A. gabrieli, but with deeper
side-plates, the antennae not bearing fascicles of long setae, and

50 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

the upper with shorter pedunc4e, also the mandibular palp has
not the penultimate joint so widely expanded.

Body with short setae thinly scattered over the surface. First
four pairs of side-plates considerably deeper than their respective
segments, evenly rounded below and unclothed, the first not in
the least expanded distally ; the fourth slightly deeper than wide.
Last pair of epimeral plates of metasome with posterior angle
minutely angularly produced, margin above entire and a little
convex, ventral margin almost straight and unarmed, anterior
angle narrowly rounded.

Cephalon equalling in length the first two segments of meso-
some combined. Eyes circular, black.

Upper antennae less than half the length of the body, with few
setae ; peduncle short, nob longer than the cephalon and half of
the first joint of mesosome combined, its ultimate joint rather
more than half the length of the penultimate ; flagellum consider-
ably longer than twice the length of peduncle, with 40-50 short
articuli, secondary appendage, normal, one-jointed. Lower
antennae of about equal length to the upper, with few setae ;
peduncle extending to the limit of upper, flagellum more than
twice the length of peduncle with 30-40 joints.

Gnathopoda subequal, the second with the basal joint a little
longer than the first, hands small, not any larger than the first,
and of identical form, carpus equal in length to the propodus,
lobed posteriorly and thickly clothed with long spineforni setae ;
propodus oblong, subquadrate, palm oblique, very slightly con-
cave, fringed with a few spinules, and at the limit a row of four
or five stout spines ; forming with the hind margin a right-angle ;
hind margin broken by two or three transverse ridges of long
spineform setae, the distal one being the most prominent,
anterior margin with four fascicles of setae, and on the outer face
a single bunch near the palm. Dactylus as long as the palm,
inner margin with about four equidistant fine spines, and on the
outer margin a faintly pectinated one a little more proximally
than the middle length.

First two pairs of pereiopoda much longer than the gnatho-
poda, of equal length and form ; last three pairs quite similar
in form to each other, gradually increasing in length distally ;

Neiv Victorian FresJt-water Amphipoda. 51

freely spiuulose ; basos of each well expanded, the hind margin
€venly curved and minutely serrate.

Uropoda with the peduncles of each extending to an even
-distance behind, first two pairs with outer ramus a little shorter
than the inner, upper margins thickly fringed with little spines.
Terminal uropoda extending to the limit of the lower pair, rami
lanceolate, margins fringed with little spines and a few plumose
setae.

Telson of even width to its length, deeply cleft, lateral edges
■almost straight, apex of each piece broadly rounded and bearing
three setae, also a little below, one on each of the inner and
•outer sides.

Colour. — Spirit specimens uniformly yellow. *

Leiigtli. — 10 mm.

Occurrence. — From a rivulet near Wood's Point ; altitude
about 3000 feet (collected by Mr. S. W. Fulton).

Remarks. — This species agrees well in general characters with
Atyloides gabrieli, described in my last paper; it is, however,
more normal to the genus as instituted by Stebbing, notably in
the inner lobe of the first maxillae bearing a lateral fringe of
many plumose setae (not only tipped by three), also by the
mandibular palp i5ot being so widely expanded. The only
notable feature of difierence from the other known species of
that genus appears to be in its possession of a distinctly lobed
wrist in the gnathopods ; in all other respects it is in close
agreement. In the latter respect it agrees with Calliopius, but
that genus has the telson entire, and the upper antennae have no
accessory appendage. From Pontogeneia, with which Atyloides
appears to be closely allied, it differs in possessing a secondary
antennary appendage, as well as by the lobed wrists. In both
Calliopius and Pontogeneia also the antennae, of at least the
male, bear numerous large calceoli on the antennae, which does
not appear to be the case in any of the Atyloides, certainly not in
my two species.

Gammapus austraiis, Sayce.

Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., xiii., n.s., pt. 2, pp. 233-237, pi. xxxix.
Since describing this species, I have received some further
specimens of it, and am now able to define the sexual characters.

4a

52 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Also I find that some of the text in the supplementary description
was left out in the printing ; on page 235 under first maxillae,
the description of the maxillipeds is given, and the first and
second maxillae are omitted, I shall now add these.

J^irst Maxillae. — Inner lobe apically pointed, inner margin
straight, facing obliquely, fringed along its whole length with
many plumose setae. Outer lobe stout, and apically bearing at
least ten denticulated spines which are set in a double row, so
that their number is ditficult to determine, and there may
possibly be one or two more of them. The palp is two-jointed,
that of the right-hand side terminates in six teeth, that of the
left bears ten apical spines, and on the outer face, at the base of
these, three longer ones.

Second Maxillae. — Inner lobe extending almost to the
extremity of the outer one, svimmit rounded and thickly clothed
with fine spinules, inner margin sparsely fringed with spinules,
and also having a submarginal oblique row of plumose setae.
Outer lobe broadly rounded at the extremity and bearing many
spinules, some of which, toward the outer margin, are longer than
the others and faintly pectinated.

Body. — I find on further examination that in the last segment
of the urosome the dorsum bears on each side of the median line
a small spine, which is hidden by many long fine spinules, which
also arm the other segments of the urosome and last two seg-
ments of the metasome.

Gnathopoda. — Dactyli bearing on the inner margin a secondary
claw, and at its base two or three setae ; on the outer margin
near to the articulation a single setae.

Sexual Characters. — In the gnathopoda the first pair has no
apparent difference in the two sexes, but the second has the
propodus and carpus rather longer and more slender in the female
than in the male. The palm also is set more obliquely in the
male, but this is subject to variation.

The termination of the inner ramus of the last uropoda also
shows a slight sexual difference. In the female the apex is.
narrowly rounded and bears about seven spinules, and just below
these on the dorsal surface there are two spinules situated
medianly, and a long stout spine on each side of them. In the
male the corresponding part is rather broader and bears at the

Neiv Victorian Fresh-ivater Amphipoda. 53

inner angle two stout spines, and the margin between then^ and
the outer angle is fringed with long slender spinules ; ali^o on the
dorsal surface there is a row of eight long subapical spinules.

Occurrence. — Besides Dandenong Creek, near Bays water, where
the type specimens came from, I have three specimens found
in association with Atyloides gabrieli, and a blind species
(Gammarus haasei) described below, which Mr. Haase collected
from a little rivulet in a fern gully at Monbulk, at an altitude of
about 800ft.

Gammapus haasei, sp. nov. (PI. VT.).

Body of similar form to G. australis, but rather deeper,
appendages not so densely setose, and not possessing eyes.
Segments of metasome dorsally possessing few, those of urosome
with many long fine spinules, which, in the two last segments,
almost obscure a small stout submarginal spine on each side of
the median line. Cephalon of equal length to the first two
segments of the mesosome combined. Coxal-plates more or less
spinose and setose, fourth as wide as its depth. Last pair of
epimeral plates of metasome with postero-lateral angle acute,
slightly acuminate, margin above with a few minute hairs,
ventral margin with two stout and two minute spines.

Peduncle of upper antennae extending beyond the limit of the
penultimate joint of the lower, flagellum about two-thirds the
length of the body with 40-50 joints, accessory appendage with
3-5 joints. Lower antannae with flagellum of about 19 joints;
in the male with last joint of peduncle and about the first six
joints of flagellum bearing calceoli.

Gnathopoda much more slender in female than in male. In
the female., hands comparatively small, the second with carpus
and propodus considerably longer than in the first pair, but of
sube(|ual form, carpus fully as long as propodus, propodus oblong,
subquadrate, palm almost transverse and straight, fringed with
spinules, and at the posterior angle, which is narrowly rounded,
three conspicuous spines, posterior margins of the two mentioned
joints with many transverse rows of setae, some of which are
faintly feathered, also a few little fascicles of setae along the
anterior margins, and, in the propodus, a few bunches scattered

54 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

over the outer face. Dactyl i at about the middle length bearing-
a secondary claw and three setae near to its base ; on the outer
margin a seta towards the proximal end. In the male the twa
pairs of gnathopoda are much more strongly built, the second
compared with the first rather longer, and propodus a very little
larger ; the second, compared with the female with the basis,
shorter, carpus much shorter, being less than two-thirds the
length of the propodus, and propodus much larger, in other
respects they are subequal.

Pereiopoda with dactyli of each having a stout tine-pointed
spinule on the inner margin at the base of the claw, and near tO'
it on the side a seta, also on the outer margin more proximally
one, and sometimes two plumose setae. Last three pairs of
almost equal length, the penultimate a very little longer than the
other two.

Terminal uropoda of medium length, differing in form in the
two sexes. In the female with the outer ramus twice the length
of the inner, terminating in a rudimentary joint, outer margin
with four, inner with three ridges of spines, and a longitudinal
series of plumose setae. Inner ramus lanceolate, outer margin
with three equidistant spines, inner with about six plumose setae,
apex with four long spinules. In the 7}iale, outer ramus subequal
to the female, inner ramus rather longer and of different shape,
its inner margin being almost straight and fringed with plumose
setae, the outer margin straight for about two-thirds of its length
when it is angularly deflected and runs straight to the narrowly
rounded apex, and is fringed with about six long spinules. The
apex carries a stout spine and a few spinules.

The telson is cleft to the base, each piece is broadly rounded
at the end and furnished with numerous long spinules, also a few
on the upper surface.

Colour. — Spirit specimens white.

Letigth. — Largest 10 mm.

Occ?irre7tce. — Yrow-i a little runnel in a fern gully at Monbulk,
near Lilydale, Victoria. Altitude about 800ft. In association
with Gammarus australis and Atyloides gabrieli (collected by
Mr. J. F. Haase).

Remarks. — This species agrees rather closely with G. australis,
but, although inhabiting surface waters, is peculiarly character-

New Victorian Fresh-water Anvplajpoda. 55

ized in l^eing without the slightest trace of eyes. It is also more
differentiated in the male, the hands of the gnathopoda being
conspicuously stronger and the wrists shorter, also the lower
antennae possess calceoli, which are not to be seen in G.
australis.

I have had the opportunity through the kindness of Mr. G. M.
Thomson, of New Zealand, of examining his Niphargus mortoni,
from Tasmanian fresh-waters, which is certainly congeneric witli
the two species just mentioned, and is in rather close agreement
with G. australis. He provisionally placed it in the genus
Niphargus, and some may think it necessary to institute a fresh
genus to receive these three forms, but the characters are so close
to those of Gammarus, that it does not appear to me to be
necessary. The number of dorsal spines on the urosome are
certainly few, but in respect to the mouth parts and other
featui'es they are quite normal. Thomson's species has normal
eyes like G. australis, and has the coxal-plates shallower than in
that species, the dorsum is not clothed with nearly so many fine
spinules, the inner branch of the terminal uropoda is shorter and
inner ran)us much shorter, the upper antennae have a smaller
secondary appendage and relatively rather longer terminal
peduncular joint, also the body and appendages are not nearly so
setose.

The above new species is named in compliment to Mr. J. F.
Haase, who collected it.

Supplementary description. — In all I received 11 specimens, and
4 of these are males.

Eyes. — There is not the slightest trace of any crystalline lense
or pigment.

Mouth parts. — These agree very closely with those of G.
australis and G. mortoni, and call for no special mention.

Upper Antennae. — The first antennae of the male compared
with the female is rather longer, being about four-fifths the
length of the body, while in the female it is not more tlian
two-thirds, and the flagellum has respectively about 50 and 40
joints. In each sex the flagellum has, be.sides a large number of
ordinary tactile setae, on the inner side of each joint, except
above the fir'st ten and the last three or four, a single "olfactory
cylinder," also the peduncle bears on the first joint about five or

56 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

six and the second and third joints, distally, two or three plumose
sensory setae.

Lower Atitennae.- — The peduncle is a little longer than the
flagellurn, the two last joints subequal and clothed thickly with
bunches of setae, and, at the distal end of each, two or three
plumose sensory setae. There are about 19 joints in the
flagellum, which are also thickly setose, but they are not so long
or as dense as in G. australis. In the male the last joint of the
peduncle, on the inner side, has a row of four calceoli, and one on
each of the first six joints of the peduncle. In G. australis there
are no calceoli, but G. mortoni, which has relatively shorter
antennae, possesses one on each of the first six joints of the
flagellum, but none on the peduncle. The former lias longer and
more numerous setae than the other two local species.

Coxnl-plates. — The first three pairs are fringed with spineform
setae as in G. australis, but they are not so numerous nor as long
as in that species ; each also bears three or four spines on the
posterior margin. The fourth is of even depth to its length, and
its ventral margin bears only a few setae.

Branchial and Incubatory Lamellae. — The former are simple
and pedunculated, and the latter large and fringed with setae.

First and Second Pereiopoda. — The first is a little longer than
the second, the latter compared with the third being about as
long as from the proximal end of the basos to near the limit of
the carpus.

Third, Fourth and Fifth Pereiopoda. — The third and fifth
are of equal length and the fourth is a little longer. In G.
australis it is relatively longer. The bases of each are ex-
panded, that of the third being rather wider than the others,
being in the proportion of three-quarters as wide as its length.
In lateral outline it is oblong, subquadrate ; the foui'th has the
posterior. margin narrowing rather irregularly to the succeeding
joint ; the fifth also only differs in the hind margin which is
concave, it is irregularly serrate, and besides a fritige of setules
bears a rather stout spine at the distal extremity.

Pleopoda and Uropoda. — These are normal and call for no
special mention, the terminal pair and the telson have already
been described.

New Victorian Fresh-tvater Amphipoda. 57

Neoniphargus fultoni, sp. nov. (PI. VIL).

Similar in general features to N. spenceri, coxal-plates scarcely
so deep, with only a few marginal setae and no spines, the first
pair relatively shorter and distally narrower ; legs rather longer
and not so spinulose, eyes smaller and subspherical.

Last two segments of urosome dorsally bearing a spine on each
side of the median line, and one or two little spinules on each of
the four preceding segments. Last pair of epimeral plates of
metasome with posterolateral angles acute, but not produced,
margins above with but one or two setae, ventral margins
nearly straight and anteriorly bearing a conspicuous submarginal
spine, anterior angles rather narrowly rounded. Cephalon
scarcely as long as the two succeeding segments combined,
lateral corners broadly rounded.

Upper antennae rather more than half the length of the body,
peduncle with its last joint subequal in length to the preceding
one, flagellum nearly twice the length of peduncle, of about 18
articuli ; secondary appendage normal (two-jointed). Lower
antennae with last joint of peduncle a little shorter than the
preceding one, flagellum a little shorter than the two last joints
of peduncle combined, of about nine articuli. In the male with
upper and lower antennae bearing numerous calceoli.

Gnathopoda similar in form and armature to G. australis, but
with hands relatively a little longer ;md the coxal-plates of first
pair distinctly shorter than the second, also narrower at the apex.

Pereiopoda with last joint of each having a stout spine on the
Inner margin. Three last pairs long and slender, coxal-lobes
not bearing any stout marginal spines, penultimate considerably
longer than the other two, which are equal to each other ; basal
plates widely expanded, the last being two-thirds as wide as its
length.

Terminal uropoda of similar length, but no so spinulose as in
N. spenceri, the outer ramus with the terminal, rudimentary
joint longer, and the minute scale-like inner ramus tipped with
one plumose setae, also on the inner margin another one.

Telson long, deeply cleft, each piece narrow at the end, with
two subapical spines, and on the upper surface a few little
spinules.

58 rroceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Colour. Spirit specimens uniformly dark yellow.

Length. — 6.5 m.m.

Occurrence. — From a spring at Collin's coach stage, near to-
Wood's Point. Altitude about 3000 feet. (Collected by Mr.
S. W. Fulton.)

Eemarks. — This species is easily distinguished from N. spenceri
by its narrower side-plates (that of the first pair being distally
much narrower and somewhat shorter than the succeeding one),
by the penultimate segment of the metasome having its ventral
margin not so curved, and furnished with a stout spine, by longer
legs, and the dactyli only possessing one spine on the inner
margin, not three, by the almost circular eyes, and by a much
narrower telson. From N. thomsoni by the deeper side-plates,
the much longer terminal uropods and antennae, which in the
upper ones bear a longer terminal peduncular joint, by the
character of the eyes and telson, as well as by several other
features.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate IV.

Chiltonia subtenuis, n. sp.

Plate V.
Atyloides fontana, n. sp.

Plate VI.

Gammarus haasei, n. sp.

Plate VII.
Neoniphargus fultoni, n. sp.

The following lettering is used to designate the corresponding
parts: — C. cephalon ; Ms., mesosome; Mts., metasome; Ur.,
urosome; A^, superior antennae; A'., inferior antennae; L^,
anterior lip; L'^., posterior lip; M., mandibles; m\, first maxillae;
m'^., second maxillae; mp., maxillipedes; Gn^ and Gn-.,
guatliopoda, first and second pairs; Pr\-Pr\, pereiopoda,
first to fifth pairs; U^-U^, uropoda, first to third pairs;
T., telson.

Proc. R.S. Victoria, ig02. Plate IV.

Chiltonia subtenuis, sp. n.

Proc. R.S. Victoria, ig02. Plate V.

Atyloides fontana, sp. n.

Proc. U.S. Victoria, igo2. Plate VI.

Gammarus haasei, &i^. n.

Proc U.S. Victoria, igo2. Plate VII.

Neoniphargus fuitoni, sp. n.

Art. YII. — Some little hnoivn Victorian Decapod Crus-
tacea with Descriptions of New Species, No. II.

By S. W. FULTON and F. E. GRANT.

(With Plates VIIL, IX.. X.)
[Eead lOtli July, 1902.]

The paper which we have now the honour to submit is the
second of a series of papers which we hope to continue dealing
with our Victorian decapods.^ Four of the species dealt with are
new to science, whilst the remaining one is of considerable
interest, and is new to the Victorian record. It is a fresh-water
form found by us occurring in Lake Colac, and so. near to kindred
forms that at pi'esent we are not prepared to separate it from
specimens with a similar habitat, which we have received from
New Zealand and Norfolk Lsland through the kindness of
Dr. Chilton, of Christchurch, and a further series from Mr. Wni.
Lang, of Norfolk Island.

Of the new species three are shrimps living pn a sandy l)ottom
in Port Phillip and Western Port, the Australian analogues of
the well-known English "Crangon," the common edible shrimp of
Europe. The remaining new species is a form of crab dredged by
the late J. Bracebridge WiLson, and which we found amongst the
Royal Society's collection in the Biological Laboratory of the
University.

Tribe — Catametopa.
Family — Hyineiioso/nidae.

Hymenosoma lacustris. Chilton. (PL VIIL)

Elamena (?) lacustris. Cliilton. Trans. N.Z. Inst., vol.
xiv., p. 172, pi. 8, 1882.

1 In our previous paper (Proc. Roy. See. Victoria, vol. .\iv.)on p. 62, line 7, for Jirst
joint read fourth joint. Also on p. 64 the figures were reduced in the process of re-
production, and consequently the magnifications given are not correct.

60 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Hymenosoma lacustris. Chilton. Trans. N.Z. Inst., vol.
XV., p. 69, 1883.

We have found this crab to be plentiful in the fresh waters of
Lake Colac, Victoria, and a single specimen collected by Mr. T.
S. Hall some years ago in the Moorabool River is undoubtedly
a young female of this species. The species was described by
Dr. Chilton in 1882 from specimens taken in Lake Pupuke — a
fresh-water lake near Auckland, N.Z. The author has kindly
furnished us with examples from the type locality and also with a
small series from Norfolk Island. As to these we observe that
those from the different localities differ slightly in the following
characteristics : — ■

From Netv Zeala?id. — In addition to the points set out in the
original description the following may be noted :

The carapace has two obsolescent teeth on the anterior lateral
margins.

The chelipedes of the male have the hand with the lower
posterior mai-gin faintly tuberculate, the wrist with only a very
small tubercle on its lower margin, and the arm with a small
tubercle on its distal outer margin.

The specimens we have received from New Zealand are smaller
than those from Lake Colac, and about the same size as those
from Norfolk Island.

From Lake Colac, Victoria. — The carapace has one obsolescent
tooth on the anterior lateral margins.

The chelipedes of the male have the hand with the lower
posterior margin armed with 5-7 small rounded teeth and a
rounded tubercle in the median line near its articulation with the
wrist, the wrist with a prominent bifid tubercle on its lower
margin (in some cases cut into two distinct teeth) and the arm
without a tubercle on the distal outer margin. The specimens
are as a rule more hairy than those from New Zealand.

The pleon of the male has a prominent tubercle on the outer
margin of the first somite, and less prominent ones on the second
and third.

The outer maxillipedes are more cordate than in the New
Zealand form.

From Norfolk Island. — The carapace is more nearly circular,
and is without marginal teeth. It is also generally more hairy
than either of the above.

Victorian Decapod Crustacea. 61

The chelipeds of the male have the hand with the teeth more
prominent, and with the median tubercle well defined; the wrist
with the tubercle prominent and bifid, the arm with the outer
tubercle well defined. The hairs are stouter, shorter and straight.

On the pleon of the male the tubercles are absent on the first
and second somites, the succeeding ones have a depression in the
median line which is filled with hair.

The outer maxillipedes are similar to those from New Zealand.

In the examination of a number of specimens these features are
not found to be constant, and a large series of adult males from
each locality must be observed before we are prepared to divide
them into distinct species. In the Norfolk Island examples the
various points in which the species difi"ers from others of the same
genus are more clearly defined, and the hairs clothing the carapace
are stronger, straighter and slightly more numerous than in
those from the other localities — this may be due to its tropical
habitat.

It is worthy of note that Lake Pupuke in New Zealand,
although near the sea is cut ofi" from it by sheets of recent basalt,
while Lake Colac is also surrounded by tertiary basaltic fiows,
but is situate some 35 miles from the nearest sea, which is
separated from it by a high range of hills.

We have refigured the species from Victorian examples.

Tribe — Dromiidea.

Family — Dromiidae.

Cryptodromia wilsoni, sp. nov. (PI. IX.).

All parts, except the tips of the fingers and dactyli, thickly
covered with a dense spongy tomentum, which on the dorsal
surface of the carapace is markedly ridged and pitted, the ridges
defining the regions.

Carapace much broader than long and deeply convex — on
removal of the tomentum the surface is smooth, with the regions
not so clearly defined.

Front cut into three teeth — the centi'e one, which is on a
lower plane than the two upper ones, is small and acute, the two
upper ones are larger and obtuse.

62 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

A flat obtuse tooth occurs near the middle of the upper border
of the orbit — but there is no outer orbital spine. The suborbital
lobe is well defined and dentiform.

The antero-lateral borders of the carapace are cut into four
prominent acute teeth. The flrst, which is the smallest, is situate
on the hepatic region, on the same level as the suborbital angle.
The others are on the true lateral margin, the distance between
the second and third being only about two-thirds of that between
the third and fourth. The fourth is slightly nearer the median
line of the carapace than the third. There is a small tooth or
tubercle between the tirst of the above mentioned teeth and the
endostome.

The hand is somewhat long and longitudinally ridged on its
-outer surface, but it is not nodular. There are two strong
tubercles on the wrist.

The first two pairs of ambulatory legs bear strong nodulations
on their carpus and propodos, the last two pairs are short and
flattened, and only obscurely nodular, and alternating in length
on either side. The dactyli are short and curved.

Dimensions of Type.

Breadth of carapace - - 30 mm. 21 mm.

Length of carapace - - - 22 ,, 16 ,,

Length of chelipede - - 42 ,, 22 ,,

Length of 1st ambulatory limb 33 ,, 21 „

Locality. — Dredged ofi" Port Phillip Heads (J. Bracebridge
Wilson).

Type presented by the Royal Society to the National Museum.
Co-types in the Biological Museum.

Tribe — Car idea.
Family — Crangonidae. Bates.
Genus Pontophilus. Leach.

This genus closely approximates to the well-known Genus
Crangon, plentiful in European waters, and of which the edible

Victorian Decapod Crustacea. 63

shrimp of the English markets "Crangon crangon," Linn., forms
so well known a type.

It may be readily distinguished from that genus by tlie
possession of seven gills on each side (as against five in Crangon),
and by the exceedingly short chelate second periopoda; the third
periopoda also, although of greater length, are filiform as
compared with the two remaining pairs, which are more robust.

So far the only species from Australasian waters which have
been described are P. australis,^ Thomson, from New Zealand ;
and P. intermedius,- Bates, from St. Vincent's Gulf; and P.
challengeri,^ Ortmann.

The three forms now described bring the Australian represen-
tatives of the genus up to six.

Pontophilus obliquus, sp. nov. (PI. X., Fig. 1).

T/ie cephalothorax^ which is about one-third the total length of
the body is subquadrate when viewed from above, and is
furnished with a broad, flattened, and somewhat concave
rostrum, obscurely trifid at its extremity. The posterior angle
is well defined, and the antero-lateral margins are prominently
extended as spines, but there are no further spines on the borders
anterior to this.

Two long pointed spines occur on the median line ; these are
pointed forward, and give to the cephalothorax the aspect of
having a median carina. On each side of the foremost of the.se
there are two long pointed spines turned obliquely inwards, from
which the species takes its name.

The regions of the carapace are well defined and are delineated
by distinct rugae.

The abdomen is short and broad, narrowing somewhat abruptly
from the third to the fifth segment. It is geniculate at about
right angles at the third segment, the segments from the first to
the fourth are smooth, whilst the fifth and sixth are strongly
carinate. The first segment slightly overlaps the cephalothorax

1 Thomson : Trans, and Proc. New Zealand Institute XI., 1878, pi. 10, fig. Al.

2 Bates : Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1863, p. 503, pi. 41, fig. 6.

3 Ortmann: Decapod. Schizopod. Plankton Exped., 1893, and Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.
Philad., p. 185, 1895.

64 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

at the margins, whilst in the centre there is a long oval space, in
which the integument is not calcified. A similar, but smaller,
space occurs between it and the following segment.

The second segment is narrow in the centre and expanded at
each side into two rounded lobes, which overlap the preceding
and succeeding segments.

The third segment the longest and is sinuate posteriorly.

T\i.e fourth is short and smooth.

The fijth is narrow, and bears a strong median ridge.

The sixth is somewhat long and exceedingly narrow, and is
hollowed on each side, thus throwing the centre up into a strong
ridge, which bifurcates at its posterior end.

The telsoti is of the same length as the sixth segment, is
strongly ridged, and is fringed at the end with stiff hairs.

The uropods are narrow and slightly longer than the telson,
and are fringed with strong hairs.

The first antennae are robust and furnished with two flagella,
which reach only slightly beyond the squames of the second pair.
The basal joints are short, reaching little beyond the margin of
the carapace.

The second atttennae are long, and furnished with short, broad
basal squames.

The chelipedes are robust, and reach to the level of the distal
end of the antennal squamae ; they are furnished with a long,
curved dactylos, between the base of which and the short mobile
finger there is a short fringe of hair. The mobile finger is
situate about midway between the base of the dactylos and the
next joint.

The secoftd pereiopod reach only to the carpus of the first pair,
and are clothed with hair.

The third pair are of normal length and filiform.

The fourth and fijth pairs are more robust, and with the third
pair terminate in a simple styliform dactylos.

Dimensions of Type. $.
Length (entire) - - - 23 mm.

Length of carapace - - 8 „

Length of abdomen - - 12 „
Length of telson - - - 5 „

Length of 1st pereiopod - - 9 „

Victorian Decapod Crustacea. 65

Habitat. — Dredged off Shoreham, Western Port, in about five
fathoms on a sandy bottom.

Observations. — This species is readily distinguished from the
next two hereunder described principally by its broader form, by
the disposition of the dorsal spines on the cephalothorax and by
the form of the abdomen.

It does not appear to have close affinity to any member of the
genus as set out by Ortmann in his revision of the Family
Crangonidae.^

The type has been deposited with the National Museum.

Pontophilus victopiensis, sp. nov. (PI. X., Fig. 2.)

The cephalothorax is nearly one-quarter the total length
measured from the base of the rostrum to the tip of the telson.
The anterior margin is furnished with an obtuse concave rostrum
scarcely as long as the eye stalks. A prominent tooth occurs at
the outer angle of the orbit, and another forms the apex of the
antero-lateral angle, behind which there are two other teeth on.
each lateral margin.

There is a marked depression at the base of the rostrum and
behind the eyes. In the median line immediately behind the base
of the rostrum there are three strong teeth projecting forward,
which make the carapace appear strongly carinate when viewed
from above. Behind each of the external orbital teeth there are
five more spines in a longitudal line reaching about three-fourths
the length of the carapace, and half way between the third of
these spines and the lateral margin there is another single
prominent spine on either side.

The abdomen is about three times the length of the cephalo-
thorax and tapers gradually and regularly to the telson.

The first segment is the shortest and slightly overlaps the
cephalothorax on its lateral margin. It is bordered in the centre
both anteriorly and posteriorly by a small uncalcified area, and is

without any carina on its surface.

The second segment is about twice the length of the first, and
carries a prominent median carina for two-thirds of its posterior
length, which is continuous through the next two segments.

1 Ortmann : Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1895, pp. 173-197.

66 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

The third segment is three times the length of the first, and
slightly sinuous at its posterior margin, where the abdomen
becomes steeply geniculate.

The fourth segment about equals the second in length.

On the fifth segment which is short the median carina bifur-
cates and terminates in its posterior margin.

The sixth segment equals the third in length, and its posterior
lateral angles at its articulation with the telson are dentiform.

The telson is as long as the two anterior segments, and
slightly longer than the uropods and terminates in a small tooth,
which is supported on either side by two long tine spines, and is
somewhat longitudinally ridged and distally fringed with stiff
hairs.

The nropods are narrow and fringed with hairs.

The first antennae are biflagellate and longer than the squamae
of the second pair.

The second antennae are long and fine, and furnished with the
characteristic broad basal squames.

The chelipedes have the propodos somewhat long and slender,
the immobile finger is situate at about one-third the distance
between the base of the daotylos and the next joint. The carpos
is somewhat globular in outline, and is furnished with a prominent
tooth on its inner margin.

The second pereiopod are short and chelate, reaching only to the
carpos of the first pair, and are not clothed with hairs.

The remaining three pairs have the normal characters of the
genus.

Dimensions of Type.

Length (entire)
Length of carapace
Length of abdomen

24 mm.
6 „
13 „

Length of telson

5 ,.

Length of 1st pereiopod -

8 „

-Altona Bav and Beaumaris, .

Port Phillip.

Dredged

in about five fathoms on a sandy bottom.

Observations. — This species has some affinity with P. australis,
Thomson. By the kindness of the author we have been furnished

Victorian Decapod Crustacea. 67

with specimens of liis species, from which ours may he dis-
tinguished hy the presence of three dorsal median spines, and by
its more slender form.

The type has been deposited with the National Museum.

Pontophilus flinders!, sp. nov. (PI. X., Fig. 3.)

Thiii species somewhat resembles P. victoriensis (described
above) in its general form and proportions.

The cephalothorax is bounded anteriorly by a rounded concave
rostrum of equal length to the eye stalks. The post-orbital
angles are well defined, and the lateral marginal angles form
distinct teeth, behind which the margins are cut into three large
forwardly directed spines.

The upper surface forms a raised platform terminated anteriorly
by a curved ridge, which is continuous with the anterior half of
the orbital margins and the margin of the rostrum. This ridge
•extends backward on the dorsal surface parallel with the lateral
margins, behind the eyes it is cut into four small fine teeth. In
the median line, at its anterior fourth, there is a strong forwardly
-directed tooth or spine, slightly behind which on each side
between the ridge above mentioned and the lateral margin there
is another prominent spine.

The abdomen is smooth and without distinctive features, except
that the last two segments are laterally compressed, giving them
-a somewhat carinate appearance.

The telson is dorsally ridged and terminates in a brush of stiff
hairs. It only slightly exceeds in length the uropods, which are
also fringed.

The first antennae have the basal joints considerably
lengthened, reaching to half the length of the squamae of the
second pair, beyond the end of which the two flagella scarcely
pass.

The second antennae are furnished with very long and
fine flagella.

The pereiopods in all their characters closely resemble those of
P. victoriensis.

5a

68 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Dimensions of Type.

Length (entire) - - - 22 mm.
Length of carapace - - 6.5 „

Length of abdomen - - 11 ,,

Length of telson - - - 3.5 ,,

Length of 1st pereiopod - - 8 >,

Habitat. — Dredged on a sandy bottom in about four fathoms
off Shoreham, Western Port.

Observations. — This species appears to have its closest affinities-
with P. intermedius, Bates. We have not seen specimens of this
species, but judging from the figure given^ there can be no ques-
tion as to validity of our species.

The type has been deposited with the National Museum.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES.

Plate VIII.

Hymenosoma lacustris, Chilton.

a$ . Dorsal view of male.

bS^ . Pleon of male.

c% . Pleon of female.

d ? . Dorsal view of posterior portion of carapace of female.

e. Front.

f. Second maxillipede.

g. Mandible.

h. First maxillipede.

/. Chela.

k. Last two joints of ambulatory legs.

Plate IX.
Dromia wilsoni.

Plate X.

Fig. 1. — Pontophilus obliquus.
„ 2. „ victoriensis.

„ 3. ,, flindersi.

1 Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1863, p. 503, pi. 41, fig. 6.

Proc. R.S. Victoria, igo3. Plate VIII.

J

!->$

^

Tt

^

troc. U.S. Victoria, igo2. Plate IX.

Proc. R.S. Victoria, igo2. Plate X.

Art. VIII. — Six Months Daily Examination of
Melbourne Tap Water.

By THOMAS CHERRY, M.D., M.S.,

Lecturer in Bacteriology, The University of Melbourne, Bacteriologist
to the Department of Agriculture.

[Eead 8th May, 1902.]

Before giving the results of the examinations of the Melbourne
Water Supply, a short description of the sources of the water and
of the reticulation is necessary in order to explain the results
obtained.

Melbourne is probably unique among the large cities of the world
in being supplied with water which comes from uninhabited catch-
ment areas. The water supply consists of two systems — the Yan
Yean and the Maroondah. The Yan Yean system collects the water
from the northern slopes of the Dividing Range in the neighbour-
hood of Mount Disappointment, about 30 miles north of the city.
This catchment comprises 26,500 acres. The most distant source
is the Silver Creek, the water of which is conveyed in an open
aqueduct, 8 miles long, to the Wallaby Creek Weir. From
this point the combined waters of the Wallaby and Silver Creeks
are conveyed by a similar aqueduct for 5 miles to the southern
crest of the Dividing Range, at a height of 1700 feet above sea
level. The water is then dropped by a series of cascades into the
bed of Jack's Creek, one of the branches of the Plenty River.
Jack's Creek leads to Toorourong Reservoir, with a storage
capacity of 60 million gallons, whence a clear water channel
nearly 5 miles long leads to the Yan Yean Reservoir. The
average flow from Silver Creek is five, and from Wallaby Creek
seven million gallons a day.

The Yan Yean Reservoir is 600 feet above sea level. It
covers an area of 1360 acres, with an available depth of 18 feet,
and a storage capacity of 6400 million gallons. The face of the
embankment and a considera.ble extent of the shores of the
reservoir have been pitched in order to prevent discolouring of

70 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

the water with the action of the waves upon the banks. From
the Yan Yean Reservoir to the pipe head dam at Morang the
water is conveyed in an open aqueduct, 7 miles long, and
capable of delivering 33 million gallons a day. From this point
the water is conveyed by pipes to the local distributing and
storage reservoirs. The chief of these is at Pteston, 7 niile&
from Morang.

The Maroondah system is supplied by the Watts River and its
tributaries at a point 45 miles to the N.K of Melbourne, and
3 miles beyond Healesville Railway Station. An aqueduct^
41 miles long, capable (as at present completed) of delivering
25 million gallons a day, conveys the water to Preston Reservoir.
As will be seen from the results of our examinations, the bacterial
content of this water is practically identical with that from the
Yan Yean catchment, but it reaches the consumer direct, while
that from the Yan Yean system has the advantage of sedimenta-
tion during its storage in the large reservoir.

All the aqueducts ai-e built of stone set in cement, or of
concrete, and elaborate precautions are taken to prevent the
washing away of the banks or the entry of storm water into the
channels. The catchment areas are uninhabited except by the
caretakers, all the settlers having been bought out prior to 1887.
There is very little animal life of any kind in the forests, and
steps ai'e taken to restrict the ingress of tourists. No public road
enters the Yan Yean catchment, but the Maroondah catchment
is traversed for 6 miles by the road from Healesville to
Marysville. At the point where this road crosses the Watt&
River the village of Fernshaw formerly stood, but all the houses-
have been removed, and the gardens and orchards allowed to
return to a state of nature. The neighbourhood of this bridge is
the only place where contamination of the water is likely to
occur, and, as a matter of fact, the water below the bridge nearly
always shows a few more organisms per cubic centimetre than,
that taken from the river above the former site of the houses.
Whether this is to be accounted for by the drainage from the
road or from the old cultivated grounds is a point on which I am
not at present prepared to express an opinion. The whole of both
catchments is covered with dense forest and undergrowth, and
the annual rainfall varies at different points from 40 to-
60 inches.

Examination of Melbourne Tap Water.

71

METHODS.

All the samples of water were taken from one of the laboratory-
taps which is in constant use. The nearest large pipe is a 30 inch
main which runs from the Preston Reserv'oir along the Sydney
Road. From this about half-a-mile of 6 inch and 4 inch pipes
along Grattan and Madeline Streets lead to the branch which
supplies the laboratory.

The water was obtained as nearly as possible at 4 p.m., except
on Saturdays and Sundays, when it was taken at noon. 5 c.c.
were mixed in a flat glass dish, 7 inches in diameter, with 50 c.c.
of nutrient gelatine. The plates were kept at 18°-20° C, and
examined after 48 and 72 hours. As far as possible the results
of the last count of the colonies were taken, but in some cases the
plates became liquefied in less than 48 hours. The average
number of bacteria per c.c. was found by dividing the total
number of colonies on the plate by 5. The observations extended
from 4th July, 1901, to 29th January, 1902.

RESULTS.

Table I.
Average of Each Month.

Total number of observations
Average of organisms per c.c.

No. of

Total Number

Average per c.c.

Examinations.

of Colonies.

July - - - -

25

7975

319

August

30

8887

296

September -

30

2294

76

October

31

2586

83

November -

29

1757

60

December -

31

2219

71

January -

23

4841

210

199
154

72 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Table II.
Number op Bacteria per Cubic Centimetre op Tap Water.

Day.

July.

August.

September.

October.

November.

December.

January.

1

316

53

35

24

56

60

2

200

24

12

40

82

86

3

6000

87

8

24

94

44

4

90

21

80

120

3

77

40

5

138

480

96

131

6

88

24

6

40

64

7

20

20

168

—

7

93

190

37

90

32

116

10

8

72

117

30

82

40

39

48

9

144

140

106

94

31

72

41

10

190

50

87

95

10

72

55

11

160

12

57

98

56

124

6

12

190

144

186

82

96

94

54

13

128

112

193

128

25

75

50

14

31

78

78

150

95

160

60

15

4800

88

16

101

48

3

141

16

76

55

99

156

78

3

124

17

147

44

48

128

57

64

11

18

90

43

150

121

73

86

—

19

72

76

57

41

72

21

20

84

89

67

150

80

60

116

21

30

94

38

73

76

40

112

22

108

44

30

52

80

51

—

23

600

86

100

100

74

80

—

24

124

101

288

112

—

62

23

25

124

28

46

68

179

41

3600

26

33

69

52

96

32

—

27

36

54

43

80

84

43

28

6

—

31

56

61

50

72

29

200

125

22

52

50

62

—

30

120

56

39

50

152

49

—

31

200

80

—

70

—

43

—

REMARKS.

It will be observed that on three occasions the average number
of organisms rose to 4800, 6000 and 3600 per c.c. respectively.
If these three are omitted the average for the 196 observations
falls to 83 per c.c. Taking its average at 154 per c.c. the results

Exar)iination of Melbourne Tap Water. 73

are undoubtedly good for an unfiltered water supply ; at 83 per
c.c. they approach the best average results obtained by sand
filtration. It will be seen that two of the three abnormal results
occurred in the winter months, and the rainfall in the last half of
July was unusually heavy. The consequence is that more
sediment is washed down the creeks, and the average number of
organisms is I'aised. T am inclined to attribute the three large
numbers to a little particle of mud being taken up with the
sample, but on the other hand the third case happened in
January, when the rainfall and amount of sediment are both at
the minimum. So far as we could ascertain there was no inter-
ference with the mains or reticulation pipes on these occasions.
Leaving out of account the three anomalous results it will be seen
that the number of organisms steadily fell from July to January
thus: —

July - - - 132

August - - - 99 .

September - - 76

October- - - 83

November - - 60

December - - 71

January - - 54

As will be seen from the following tables the tap water
contains a smaller number of organisms than the mountain
creeks. It is considerably higher than the average of the outlet
of the Yan Yean Reservoir, or of the Surrey Hills and Caulfield
local reservoirs, which are supplied direct from the Yan Yean.
As previously explained nearly half the water supplied to
Melbourne does not pass through the Yan Yean Reservoir, and
therefore loses the advantage of sedimentation. Moreover, the
Maroondah water is supplied chiefly in the winter, so as to allow
of the large reservoir to be filled ready for summer consumption.
This probably accounts for the average improvement as the
summer approaches, the results of the examinations of t"lie creeks
showing little variation in summer and winter, unless the water
was actually discoloured by recent heavy rain. For the same
reason the number of micro-organisms bears no direct relation to
the temperature of the water. For purposes of comparison
the results of the examination of London water are appended.

74 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Table TIL

Results op Examinations of Creeks in Catchment Area
DURING 1901.

March.

April.

June.

December.

Yan Yean Catchment —

Silver - - - .

200

112

—

200

Wallaby - - - -
Jack's - - - .

40
160

196
190

256
205

Maroondah Catchment —

Watt's, above Fernshaw -

191

126

Watt's, below Fernshaw -

—

—

187

141

Graceburn

—

—

195

160

Donelly's - - - .
Intake at Maroondah Weir

—

—

220

120
175

Table IY.
Results of Examinations of Reservoirs during 1901.

Yan Yean outlet
Surrey Hills Local Reservoir
Caulfiekl ,, ,,

Essendon ,, ,,

March.

April.

June.

Oct'ber.

49

28

80

—

52

90

25

—

75

41

54

—

100

20

Dec'ber.

14
31
42
40

Examination of Melbourne Tap Water. 75

Table V.

London Water. — Average Monthly Uacterial Content
IN 1901.

From the Official Reports on the Conditio7i of the Metropolitan
Water Supply during the month of December^ 1901.

Month.

Thames,
unfiltered.

Thames
derived.
Comp-
anies'
filtered.

New

River,

unfiltered.

New
River,
filtered.

River

Lee,

unfiltered.

River

Lee,

filtered.

January

4069

49

671

28

450

16

February

5310

26

800

5

172

18

March

2303

27

593

10

315

43

April

2076

15

176

6

177

15

May

852

9

106

6

209

13

June

1371

26

204

8

488

56

July

5560

35

383

13

837

40

August

1646

22

284

13

223

16

September -

873

19

215

7

266

17

October

865

13

173

4

155

12

November -

1909

55

280

10

202

13

December

4065

31

387

18

446

14

Average

2575

24

356

10

328

22

[Note. — The above are the results of 6893 examinations. The
samples of the filtered water were taken from the clear-water wells of
the various Companies. — T.C.]

Art. IX. — Descriptions of some New Lizards from
Western Australia.

By a. H. S. LUCAS, M.A., B.Sc, and C. FROST, F.L.S.

[Read 10th July, 1902.]

The Lizards described in the following pages formed part of a
collection of reptiles sent to the National Museum, Melbourne,
for identification by Bernard H. Woodward, Esq., from the Perth
Museum, Western Australia.

Besides the specimens here described, the collection contained
38 species, all of which have been previously recorded for
Western or Central Australia.

Dipopophora amphibolupoides, sp. n.

Description. — Habit moderate; head oval, elongate; snout
anterior to nostril as long as diameter of orbit, with angular
can thus rostralis; nostril moderate, directed backwards, midway
between the orbit and the tip of the snout; tympanum measuring
nearly half the diameter of the orbit. Upper head scales obtusely
keeled ; all the head scales larger than the dorsal ; a short series of
spinose scales above the tympanum, more marked immediately
behind it on a well-marked dorso-lateral fold; a distinct nuchal
crest of about a dozen compressed spines ; scales on side of neck,
and gular scales small, .smooth, tessellated; a distinct gular fold.
Body moderately depressed ; a very low dorsal ridge, especially in
the anterior half; dorsal scales slightly keeled, as large as the
ventral; an irregular longitudinal series of enlarged scales on each
side of the vertebral ridge; a regular series of enlarged keeled
scales above the dorso-lateral fold; ventral scales smooth, scales on
sides smaller, slightly keeled. Limbs short; adpressed hind limb
does not reach the axilla. Two praeanal pores on each side; no
femoral pores. Tail rounded^ somewhat depressed at the base,
gradually tapering, but never filiform, nearly one and a-half times
.as long as the head and body; all scales keeled.

Neiv Lizards from Western Australia. IT

Colour (spirit specimen). — Brown above, lighter on the head,
which has three pairs of short black longitudinal streaks, one
from the nostril to the orbit, one from the orbit to the tympanum,
and one behind the supraorbital eminences. Apparently others
on the body and tail, under surfaces, throat and thorax light
brown, abdomen much darker, all lighter than the corresponding
dorsal surfaces.

Dimensions.

Total length - - - 247 mm.

Head . . . . 29 ,,

Width of head - - - 17.5 „

Body 68 „

Fore-limb - - - - 34 „

Hind-limb - - - - 50 ,,

Tail ----- 150 „

Habitat. — Western Australia. Type in the National Museum.

This species agrees with the generic definition of Diporophora
in the arrangement of its pores, but differs totally in habit. It
has the head almost of Fhysignathus, but in general habit
more closely resembles Amphibolurus. It is perhaps best at
present to avoid establishing a new genus, especially as we
have but a single specimen, but it may become necessaiy to do
so in the future.

Hemiergis woodwardi, sp. n.

Description. — Body much elongate; limbs very weak, with four
fingers, three toes; the distance between the tip of the snout and
fore-limb is contained twice in the distance between axilla and
groin; snout short, obtuse; lower eyelid with an undivided
transparent disc; nostril pierced in the nasal; no supranasals ;.
frontonasal broader than long, forming a suture with the I'ostral,.
and a broader one with the frontal; praefrontals small; frontal
not larger than the interparietal, nor broader than the supra-
ocular region, in contact with first and second supraoculars; four
large supraoculars, the second largest; seven or eight supraciliaries;
frontoparietals distinct, as long as the interparietal ; parietals
larger, forming a suture behind the interparietal; two or three

'78 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoina.

pairs of enlarged nuchals ; fifth upper labial below the centre of
the eye, separated by a series of suboculars; sixth and seventh
upper labials largest. Ear covered with scales, indicated by a
depression. Twenty smooth scales round the middle of the body,
subequal; a pair of enlarged praeanals; the length of the hind-
limb equals the distance between the centre of the eye and the
fore-limb. Two middle fingers much the longest, equal ; third toe
longest, three tin\es as long as first.

Colour (spirit specimen). — Pale brown above, with four
longitudinal series of black dots on the back; a black dorso-lateral
line ; sides and lower surfaces darker ; each scale on the under
surfaces with a broad yellowish margin.

Dimensions.

Total length

1 45 mm

Head -----

9 „

Width of head -

6.5 „

Body

43 „

Fore-limb - - - -

8 „

Hind-limb - - - -

12 „

Tail -----

93 „

Habitat. — Western Australia. Type in the National Museum.

Rhodona planiventralis, sp. n.

Description. — -Snout cuneiform, with projecting labial edge.
Eye small ; lower eyelid with an undivided transparent disk.
Nostril pierced in a large nasal. Rostral large, nearly as long as
the frontonasal ; frontonasal broader than long, forming a
moderate suture with the rostral and a broader one with the
frontal ; praefrontals moderate ; frontal a little broader than the
supraocular region, as long as its distance from the end of the
snout, in contact with the first and second supraoculars ; three
supraoculars ; six supraciliaries ; frontoparietals small, a little
smaller than the interparietal ; parietals forming a suture behind
the interparietal. Two pairs of enlarged nuchals ; fourth upper
labial below the orbit. Ear hidden, indicated by a depression.
Twenty-two smooth scales round the middle of the body, smallest

Neiv Lizards from Western Australia.

79

on the sides. A pair of enlarged praeanals. Ventral surfaces
flat, with keeled ventro-lateral margins. Fore-limb didactyle, as
long as the distance from the end of the snout to the posterior
margin of the eye; hind-limb tridactyle, three times as long as
the fore-limb ; third toe very long, thrice the length of the first.
Colour. — Greyish-brown above, with four faint, narrow, dark
brown lines, a dark brown dorso-lateral line from the eye to the
base of the tail. Tail brownish-yellow, with faint, less continu-
ous, brownish lines. Undersurfaces and sides uniform pale
brownish-yellow.

Dimensions.

Total length
Head

Width of head
Body -
Fore-limb -
Hind-limb -
Tail -

121 mm.

7

5
53

5.
15
61

Habitat. — Western Australia. Locality not known. Type in
National Museum.

Art. X. — Neiu or little known Fossils from the
Tertiaries of Victoria.

By T. S. hall, M.A.

(With Plate XI.)

[Eead 10th July, 1902.]

In the present communication I figure and remark upon some
fossils which have come into my hands from time to time from
the Victorian Tertiaries. The presence of some of the genera has
already been indicated in various lists which have been published,
but the evidence of their correct identification afforded by descrip-
tions and illustrations has not been given. In only two instances
have I ventured to attach specific names, as I am unable in the
case of the remainder to point to differences from other forms. It
so happens that all the forms referred to have modern analogues,
but it must be borne in mind that they are associated with others
whose facies is far older, a fact to be bore in mind when attempts
to correlate our formations with those elsewhere are made by
those unfamiliar with the fauna as a whole.
The following fossils are treated : —

Melitodes (?) sp.

Pentagonaster, sp.

cf. Sigsbeia, sp.

Chirodota, sp.

Salmacina (?) tereta, n. sp.

Lepas pritchardi, n. sp.

Alcyonapia.

Goro^onidae.

Melitodes (?) sp. (PI. XL, Figs. 1, 2, 3).

Several specimens of the calcified segments of an Alcyonian
stem from " Forsyth's " appears identical with those of a speci-
men of Melitodes in the Museum of the Biological department

Fossils from the Tertiaries of Victoria. 81

from an unknown locality. The generic identification of the
Gorgonidae rests more on the characters of the spicules than of
the stem segments, but in the case of our fossils we have not this
important aid at our command. Still the resemblance of the
specimens to the recent species is so great that, provided any
reliability can be placed on the characters afforded by stem
joints, there seems no reason why they should not be referred to
this genus.

Associated with these forms at " Forsyth's " is a number of
joints of quite different characters, but in the absence of recent
material as a guide I shall not attempt to place them. Stem
segments from our beds have been referred by Duncan to Isis,
but for no very apparent reason. Microscopic spicules apparently
of Alcyonaria are abundant in some of our Older Tertiary
clays.

Locality and Age.—Gva.n^e Burn ("Forsyth's"). Kalimnan
(? Miocene).

Astepoidea.

Pentagonaster, sp. (PI. XI., Figs. 4, 5.)

Marginal plates of Phanerozonic Starfish are not uncommon in
our Older Tertiary beds, but as they are not very striking in
appearance, are apt to be passed over as worn fragments. I had
collected a good many, and from their calcific cleavage had
recognised that they belonged to Echinodermata, but got no
further till I showed them to Prof. J. W. Gregory, and he
pointed out their nature. Similar plates are figured in Eastman's
translation of Zittel's Handbook of Palaeontology. Compared
with plates from the recent Pentagonaster australis of our
coasts, we find the fossils are for the most part more compressed
laterally, or are more elongate in the dorsiventral line. In shape
they are, roughly speaking, quadrants of a thick disc. The
greatest diameter of an average specimen is about 5 mm. The
largest I have seen is 13 mm., and the smallest about 2 mm. in
diameter. It seems hardly worth while attempting to fix a name
to such fragments, as their distinguishing characters are so few
and perhaps more than one species is represented.

82 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Localities and Age. — Muddy Creek (upper and lower beds),
Spring Creek, Waurn Ponds and Batesford (Jan Jukian,
Balcombian and Kalimnan). Prof. Tate has recorded
Astrogonium^ from our Older Tertiary beds, and possibly my
specimens are similar to those he collected.

Ophiupoidea.

cf. SiGSBEiA. (PL XL, Figs. 6, 7.)

A single vertebral ossicle is all I have found to show the
pi-esence of the order in our tertiaries. Its articular faces some-
what resemble those of Sigsbeia, as figured by Lyinan,^ but there
is a rather closer approach to the hour-glass shaped articulations
of the Cladophiurae than is shown by Sigsbeia, besides which, it
differs from the latter genus in being wider above than below.
The podial canals open on the distal face. Greatest width,
1.5 mm. The only specimen is somewhat corroded.

Locality and Age. — Grange Burn ("Forsyth's"), near Hamilton.
Kalimnan (? Miocene).

Holothupoidea.

Chirodota, sp. (PI. XI., Fig. 8).

The spicules of holothures are not as a rule reliable guides to
generic position, but wheels with six rays are in recent forms
confined to the genus Chirodota,^ so I have referred the fossil to
that genus.

The wheel figured measures 0.27 n)m. in diameter, and was
obtained by Mr. C. M. Maplestone in some material supplied to
him by myself from the beds at Spring Creek. I believe that
this is the first record of fossil holothurians from Australia. The
genus is world wide in recent seas, and on this account we should
be justified in assuming its backward range in time.

1 Jour. Roy. Soe. New South Wales, v. 22 (1889), p. 252.

- Challenger Rep., v. 5, pi. 43, figs. 5, 6.

3 Theel, H.: Report on the Holothuroidea dredged by H.M.S. Challenger, pt. ii.;
Challenger Reports, Zoology, vol. 14, p. ,33. Ludwig, Dr. H.: In Bronn's Klassen und
Ordnungen des Thierreichs, Bd. 2, Abth. 3, p. 39.

Possils from the Tertlaries of Victoria. 83

Locality and Age. — Spring Creek (Bird Rock Zone). Jan
Jukian (? Eocene).

Chaetopoda.

Serpiilidae.
SaLMACINA (?) TEHETA, n. .sp. (PI. XT., Fig. 9).

Numerous examples of almost straight intertwining calcareous
tuljes occur in the Kalimnan beds at "Forsyth's," on the Grange
Burn, near Hamilton. They closely resemble in size and habit
the tubes of Salmacina australis, Haswell, which is common in
Port Phillip and Port Jackson. The tubes have an external
diameter of 0.4 mm., and are marked by rounded lines of growth
and an occasional funnel-shaped expansion where the mouth of
tube formerly lay. In the recent species there is occasional
dichotomous division of the tube, as shown in Fig. 10. I have not
seen any trace of this in the fossil specimens, but the latter occur
as small fragments, and are usually somewhat rolled. It is, of
course, impossible to refer tubes of this nature to any particular
genus with absolute certainty, nor indeed cylindical tubes to any
particular part of the animal kingdom. Very similar objects have
Ijeen referred to Serpula, but with Salmacina actually living on
our coasts, we may perhaps have some slight justification in
regarding our fossil as belonging to the same genus. I have to
thank Mr. R. Etheridge, jun., for a specimen of S. australis, from
Port Jackson, which enabled me to determine our Port Phillip
examples as belonging to the same genus if not indeed to the
same species.

Locality attd Age. — Fairly common, but much broken, in the
beds at "Forsyth's," on the Urange Burn, Hamilton. Kalimnan
(1 Miocene).

Crustacea.

Lepas pritchardi, n. sp. (PI. XI., Figs. 11, 12, 13.)

The only two specimens I have seen are right scuta, which
difler only in size. Viewed from the side, the occludent margin
is slightly concave. The basal margin is almost straight, but has

6a

84 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

a slight convexity. The tergolateral margin is boldly curved, so
that the part near the basal margin is almost at right angles to
that near the occludent one. The basal margin bears a slightly
thickened ridge within, and there is no umbonal tooth. Seen
from the peduncular side, the basal margin is moderately curved.
The lines of growth show that a slight addition was made to the
basal margin throughout life. Radial 'markings are absent.
Length of occludent margin of type, 30 mm. ; greatest width of
valve at right angles to this line, 27 mm. A specimen from
Spring Creek, collected by Mr. G. B. Pritchard, measures 38 mm.
in its greatest breath.

Locality and Age. — Waurn Ponds, quarry below the school
(type). Spring Creek (G. B. Pritchard). Jan Jukian (? Eocene).

I think there can be no doubt of the correctness of the generic
position to which I have referred this fossil, though in shape it
differs somewhat from the corresponding valve in all the recent
species. The absence of an umbonal tooth may be due to
corrosion, which is a fault many of our fossils from the
polyzoal rocks exhibit. Still, if originally present, the tooth
must have been small, and it is of course absent in some recent
species.

Another peculiarity is the bending of the growth lines along
the basal margin, a feature which Darwin says is not shown by
any of the species known to him, for no addition by growth is
made in this position by recent forms.

As regards the age of the specimens, no one apparently
would suggest that the Waurn Ponds beds are younger than
Miocene, while some Australian authors call them Eocene. Even
if we take the youngest estimate, namely Miocene, the fossil is
the oldest member of the genus yet discovered.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XI.

Figs. 1, 2, 3. — Melitodes (?). Stem-joints. Grange Burn.
„ 4, 5. — Pentagonaster, sp. Marginal plates seen from

from two directions. Waurn Ponds.

Fossils from the Tertiaries of Victoria. 85

Figs. 6, 7. — cf. Sigsbeia, sp. Vertebral ossicle, distal and

proximal faces. Grange Burn.
„ 8. — Chirodota, sp. Wheel spicule. Spring Creek.

„ 9. — Salmacina (?) tereta, n. sp. Grange Burn.

„ 10. — Salmacina australis, Haswell. Recent. Port

Jackson.
„ 11. — Lepas pritchardi, n. sp. Waurn Ponds. Side

view.
„ 12. — Tiie same, seen from peduncular side.

„ 13, — The same. Umbonal angle, seen from within,

showing thickening of basal margin.

FRINTBU UY

I'UKU AND SON, CAUiyroN,

MELBOURNE.

Proc. R.S. Victoria, igo2. Plate XL

J.S.^.

PROCEEDINGS

HodhI ^mtti) of §idonH

VOL. XV. (New Series).

PART II.

Edited under the Authoritv of the Council.
ISSUED FEBRUARY, 1003.

(^Cuntiii iii nt; Papers read before the Society ditrim; the tnonths of
September, October, November , a)id December, igo2).

THE AUTHORS OK THK SEVERAL PAPERS ARE 8BVERALLT RESPONSIBLE KOK THK

SOUNDNESS OK THE OPINIONS OIVEN AND FOR THE ACCURACY OK THK

STATEMENTS MADE THEREIN.

MELBOUKNE :
FORD & SON, PRINTERS, DRUMMOND STREET, CARLTON.

AGENT:S TO THE SOCIETY :
WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14 HENRIETTA STREET, COVENT GARDEN, LONDON.

To whom all coiuniunications for transmission to the Royal Society of Victoria,
from all parts of Europe, should be sent.

1903.

CONTENTS OF VOLUME XV, Pt. II.

I'AOK

Art. XI. — Contributions to the Palaeontology of the Older
Tertiary of Victoria. Laniellibranchs. — Part III.
By G. B. Pritchabd. (Plates XII., XIII., XIV.
and XV.). ... ... .. ... ■ 87

XII. — New or Little-known Victorian Fossils in the National
Museum, Melbourne. Part I. — Some Palaeozoic
Species. By Frederick Chapman, A.L.S., &c.
(Plates XVI., XVII. and XVIII.). ... . 104

XIII. — The At^e of the Metamorphie Rocks of North-Eastern
Victoria. By J. W. Gregory, D.Sc, F.E.S.
(Plates XIX., XX., and XXI.). ... . 123

XIV. — On some Eocks from the fairway of Port Phillip Heads.

By F. E. Grant and E. O. Thiele. .. .. 132

XV. — Coorongite, a South Australian Elaterite. By Alex. C.

ClTMMING. ... ... ... ■•■ ■•• 134

XVI. — A New Annnonite from the Cretaceous Rocks of
Queensland. By Professor .J. W. Gregory and
F. Voss Smith. (Plate XXII.). ... . 141

XVII. — Description of two new Australian Lizards, Varanus
spenceriand Diplodactylus bilineatus. By A. H. S.
Lucas. M.A., B.Sc, and C. Frost, F.L.S. 145

XVIII —The Heathcotian— a Pre-Ordovician Series— and its
Distribution in Victoria. By J. W. Gregory,
F.R.S. (Plates XXIII.-XX VI.). ... 148

XIX.— Catalogue of the Marine Shells of Victoria.— Part VI.

By G. B. Pbitchard and J. H. Gatliff. 176

XX. — The Phyllopoda of Australia, including descriptions of
some new Genera and Species. By O. A. Sayce.
(Plates XXVII.-XXXVI.). .. ... 224

.u..

AiiT. XI. — Gontrlhiitions to the Palaeovtology of tli.e
Older Tertiary oj Victoria.

Lamellibranchs. — Part III.

By G. B. PRITCHARD,

Lecturer on Geolog-y, etc., Workincr Men's College, Melbourne.

(With Plates XII., XIII., XIV. and XV).
[Read 11th September, 1902].

The present paper includes a number of species that it has
been found necessary to diagnose, as the n:iajority are undoubtedly
new, but some have been included under described species which
I shall endeavour to sliow are quite distinct from them.
The following are the species included: —

Lithophagus latecaudatus, sp. nov.
Mytilus mooraboolensis, sp. nov.
Glycimeris halli, sp. nov.

var. intermedius, var. nov.
var. paucicostatus, var. nov.
Trigonia semiundulata, Jenkins.
var. granosa, var. nov.
var. lutosa, var. nov.
Crassatellites maudensis, sp. nov.
Crassatellites kingicoloides, sp. nov.
Crassatellites camurus, sp. nov.
Mytilicardia kalimnae, sp. nov.
Cardita excrescens, sp. nov.
Lucina gunyoungensis, sp. nov.
Ohione etheridgei, sp. nov.
Chione cognata, sp. nov.
Many of the species are particulai'ly interesting, as their occur-
rences tend materially to strengthen the views held by Mr. T. S.
Hall and myself on the stratigraphical relationships of some of
our Tertiary beds.

1

88 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Lithophagus latecaudatus, sp. nov. (PI. XIV., Fig. 4).

Description. — Shell suiootli, thin and fragile, digitiforni, narrow
and tumid at the anterior end, but leinarkably broad and
depressed at the posterioi* end, the posterior being more than
twice as broad as the anterior. Umbo incurved anteiiorly and
depressed dorsally. Anterior end very short, but strongly
■convexly i-ounded, ventral margin sloping downwards to the
posterior; dorsum immediately behind the umbo slightly concave,
thence ascending to the posterior, posterior margin broadly
convex. Surface smooth and shining, showing faint irregular
undulations or ridges conforming to the lines of growth, and very
faint finer parallel stiiations, very close radial striatioiis may also
be detected, particularly on the upturn towards the post-dorsal
margin forming a microscopic reticulation. The nacreous interior
shows where the shells are decorticated or worn, especially on
the umbonal region.

Dimensions. — Antero-posterior diameter, 42 mm.; width at
umbo, 11 mm.; median width, 17 mm.; greatest posterior width,
22 mm.; thickness through one valve, about 6 mm.

Locality. — Lower beds of the Spring Creek series, or Bird Rock
Bluff, near Geelong. Jan Jukian, — Eocene.

Observations. — The genus Lithodomus has pieviously been
recorded from "casts and crypts" in a coral from the Miocene
beds of Hallett's Cove, by Professor R. Tate' in 1885, but the
species was not described till 1886,- under the name of L. brevis.
The present species is evidently distinct from the above-mentioned
representative as judged by the dimensions and the few brief
particulars given.

Mytilus mooraboolensis, sp. nov. (Plate XIV., Fig. 1).

Description. — Shell small, elongately triangular, undjo some-
Avhat twisted, incurved, and terminal, strongly keeled fi-om the
umbo to the posterior margin, posterior area much expanded and
depressed, sculpture on the anterior portion of the shell strongly
marked off", and distinct from that on the posterior.

1 Trans. Roy. Soc. South Australia, 1S8C, vol. viii., Lam., i>t. i., p. 124.

2 Op. cit., 1887, vol. ix., Lam., pt. ii., p. 186 (4.t in author'.s reprint).

Older Tertiary of Victoria. 89

Veiiti'al side flattened, and nearly straight, making an abrupt
ascent to the unibonal keel. Umbo to posterior convex, becom-
ing flattened towards the posterior margin, the depression being
so marked towards the dorsal margin as to appear slightly
concave. Dorsal margin straight, and making an angle of about
100 degrees with the slightly concave posterior, thence angled
again, and nearly straight to join the ventral margin. Surface
posterior to the umbonal keel sculptured by strong broad
dichotomising ribs, numbering about eight at the umbo, and
increasing to twelve or fourteen at the margin ; on the flattened
area below the keel the ribbing is of a much tiner and more
regular character, there being about twelve flat ribs, with much
narrower interspaces on the hinder half of this area, while the
forward half is still flner in its ribbing, and the ribs are more
arched towards the umbo, instead of running up briefly to the
keel. The shell also shows strong irregular concentric growth
stoppages, which are inclined to frill the ribs at their intersection,
finer concentric lines of growth are also present. Left valve
furnished with a relatively strong tooth just below the beak, and
a strong pad within for the anterior adductor.

Dimensions. — Type, length 19 mm.; extreme breadth, 12 mm.;
breadth at posterior end, 7 mm.; others have a length of 14 mm.
by a breadth of 7 mm., and some have length 12 mm. by breadth
7 nnu.

Localities. — Lower beds of the Spring Creek series, or Bird
Rock Bluff", near Geelong. Lower limestone beds of the Maude
section, Moorabool Valley. Jan Jukian, — Eocene.

Observations. — This species at once recalls our living species
M. menkeanus, Philippi, but is a much smaller and less solid
species, with a more marked keel, and characteristic post-dorsal
depression, different outline, and a more twisted umbo. It is
equally distinct from the Miocene species, M. submenkeanus,
Tate, from Hallett's Cove.

Glycimepis halli, sp. nov. (PI. XIA"., Figs. 10, 11, 12;
PI. XV., Figs. 1, 2, 8, 9).

Description. — Shell orbicular, tumid, thick and strong,
vequilateral, with a prominent convex umbo, and closely radially

lA

90 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria..

ribbed surface. Umbo incurved and overhanging the ligamental
area, which is a well-defined isosceles triangular space, the base
of which is just about half the width of the hinge. Hinge
furnished with from 22 to 26 oblique and angular teeth, most
usually 12 on each side, with a tendency for the medial ones to
become obsolete in the extreme adult. Surface closely covered
with broad radial ribs, ranging from about 30 to 35 in small
specimens, up to about 50 in the adult, ribs slightly convex, with
very narrow, almost lineal, interspaces in young shells, but in the
adult the ribs are decidedly flattened; the ribs are closely, finely,
and regularly radially striate, each rib bearing near the ventral
margin ten striae, anteriorly and posterioi'ly the ribs become
obsolete, but the radial striae are present, and m'ucli stronger
than on the ribs. The radial sculpture is crossed by fiine concen-
tric lines of growth. Interior of valves strongly denticulate along
the ventral margin, bearing about 25 strong denticles, running^
about 8 to 10 in 10 mm., thence both anteriorly and posteriorly
diminishing in size, but extending right up to the hinge.

Variety, intePmedius, var. nov. (PI. XIV., Figs^ 10, 11).

A variation of tlie above shows a less orbicular outline with
sloping shoulders and consequently an apparently more promi-
nent umbonal region, and with coaser radial ribbing, 25 to 28-
being about the average number.

Variety, paucicostatus, var. nov. (Pi. XIV., Fig. 12,
and PI. XV., Fig. 9.

Another form wliich appears but a variation of the above
species, is intermediate in shape between it and the foregoing
variety, l)ut rather closer related to the latter, being distin-
guished most readily by the still coarser radial ribbing, as it
bears only about 20 strong, convex ribs, neglecting the obscure
and ill-defined ones on the anterior and posterior slopes.

Dimensions. — Type, antero-posterior diameter, 42 mm.; umbo-
ventral diameter, 44 mm.; thickness through one valve, 18 mm.
Others range from 24 by 22, 21 by 20, 18 by 17, 17 by 16, 12 by
11, to 9 Ijy 9 and 8 by 8, and smaller. Var. iiifeenuiedius, antero-
posterior diameter, 21 nnn., uml>o- ventral <lH;imeter, 20 mm.,.

Older Tertiary of Victoria. 91

and 19 by 19. Var. paucicostatus, antero-postei'ior diameter,
22 mm.; umbo-ventral diameter, 21 mm.; others range about 18
by 17, and 15 by 14-5.

Localities. — Grange Burn, between Forsyth's and Henty's, from
the days and sandy beds of the upper series ; Muddy Creek, from
the upper beds below the State School ; sandy clays of Jimmy's
Point, Gippsland, variety paucicostata seems fairly common at
this locality. Kalimnan, — Miocene.

Observations. — -This species has usually been confused with
Pectunculus cainozoicus, T. Woods, but Mr. T. S. Hall was the
first to draw my attention to the fact that it was distinct. The
type locality for P. cainozoicus is Table Cape, and compared with
specimens from that locality, our present forms are much thicker
and stronger, more convex, with coarser radial ribbing, but much
finer radial striations. Hei'e again, as regards the genus, it
appears we must lose another old friend in Pectunculus, for,
according to Professor Tate and others, Axinaea should replace
it, but, according to Dall, Glycimeris appears to have the best
claims.

Trigonia semiundulata, Jenkins. (Plate XV., Figs. 3-7).

This species is a well known and characteristic form, described
by McCoy as from Bird Rock BlufF, and the specimens described
and figured by Mr. Jenkins are indicated by McCoy as having
been forwarded by him to an exhibition in London, and therefore
presumably from the same locality. This Bird Rock Bluff or
Spring Creek form is very consistent in shape and in the closeness
of the undulating anterior ridges. McCoy describes the undulat-
ing ridges as being "crossed, except on the anterior portion, by
rather faint impressed sulci radiating from the beak to the
ventral margin, nearly the same distance apart as the ridges of
the posterior slope." This faint impression of the sulci is not a
constant feature ; in some few specimens it is so extremely faint
as to be scarcely visible for a greater distance than half the
umbo-ventral diameter of the shell, and then only close to the
posterior radiation, whilst in others the impression is so deep as
to break up the undulating ridges into triangular nodes for about
a third of the antero posterior diameter. From the latter form it

92 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

seems to me that we can proceed to an extreme form, for which
it seems advisable to propose at least a vainetal name.

Variety, gpanosa, var. nov. (PI. XV., Fig, 5).

In shape similar to T. semiundulata, but proportionately a little
shorter in its antero-posterior diameter, with eight distinct radial
ribs on the posterior slope and three fainter spinose beginnings
post-doi'sally, anteriorly the undulating ridges are completely
broken up into triangular nodes right up to the anterior n)argin,
and so deeply impressed are the sulci that the shell has rather
the appearance of being radially nodosely ribbed here also, there
being 18 radiations on this portion, while looking at it from the
point of view of undulations the number is about 25, and further
apart than in the usual type, hence the granules or nodes are
rather coai'ser than those usually developed.

Dimensions. — Antero-posterior diameter, 25 mm.; unilx)-
ventral diameter, 23 mm.; thickness through one valve, 7 mm.

Locality. — Lower beds of the Spring Creek series or Bird Rock
Bluff, near Geelong. Jan Jukian, — Eocene.

A^ariety, lutosa, var. nov. (PI. XV., Figs. 6, 7).

The next form for considei-ation is that commonly occurring at
Muddy Ci'eek, which is a veiy distinct variation from the typical
form of the species. The .shell is more oblong owing to a greater
posterior attenuation, and is much narrower at the posterior end,
the posterior area is more depressed, and the anterior area is
rather more tumid and more regularly convex ; the anterior
undulations are coarser, less numerous, more regular, and do not
ascend so rapidly; while the radial sulci are usually very faint,
sometimes almost absent, or showing somewhat as a fimbriation
of the ventral aspect of the concentric undulations, occasionally
distinct on the upper half of the shell, and then very closely
packed, considerably closer than in T. undulata, and then also
apparently restricted to portion of the ventral slope and the
interspace between the undulations.

Dimensions. — Antero-posterior diameter, 40 mm. ; uml)o-
ventral diameter, 33 ram.; length of posterior, 22 mm. Otlier
specimens range about 38 by 31-5 by 20; 36 by 30 by 18; 35 by

Older Tertiary of Victoria. 93

30 by 17,; U by 30 by 18; 33 by 28 by 18, for the above
ineiisurenients respectively.

Locality. — Lower beds of Muckly Creek, Western Victoria.
Balcoml)ian, — Eocene.

Observations. — -Mr. R. Etheridge, jun.,^ in his paper on a
representative of this species from a depth of about six hundred
and forty-seven feet from the Arumpo bore, east of the Darling,
in the County of Wentworth, New South Wales, draws attention
to some important points in some Muddy Creek examples of this
species which he examined, and remarks on some discrepancies
with McCoy's description. It must be borne in mind, however,
that McCoy figured and described his specimens from the Spring
Creek section. McCoy speaks of "faint impressed sulci radiating
from the beak to the ventral margin," and it would be difficult to
otherwise describe the Spring Creek forms. Etheridge, however,
states, " but in the specimens examined by me, these are not
sulci, nor are they continuous, but rather a timbriation of the
lower margin of each concentric ruga, and these being placed
directly under and above one another in line, give rise to the
appearance of sulci, until closely examined." This offers rather
good independent confirmation of my treatment of the above, and
so strengthens the case that the Muddy Creek examples might
almost be regarded as a distinct species, but for the pi'esent a.
varietal distinction appears to me to meet requirements. The
Arumpo bore specimen, judging from Mr. Etheridge's particulars,
would appear to represent the Spring Creek form.

The Table Cape specimens represent the typical Spring Creek
form.

From Wilkinson's No. 4 locality. Aire Costal sections, the
specimens are of the Spring Creek type.

From Lake Bullen Merri, near Camperdown, the specimens are
of the JNIuddy Creek type, var. lutosa.

Crassate Mites maudensis, sp. nov. (PI. XIV., Figs. 2, 3).

Description. — Shell elongate, oblong ovate, somewhat depressed,
and bearing a strong angulation from the umbo to the post-
ventral margin, the posterior area thus marked off being much

1 Records Geo. Surv. N.S.W., vol. iii., pt. iv., p. 117, 1893.

94 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

flattened, and being devoid of the strong corrugations charac-
teristic of the remainder of the shell.

Anterior margin convexly rounded, ventral margin slightly
convex to almost straight, posterior truncation strongly marked,
and post-dorsal margin usually very straight, sometimes slightly
concave. Umbos strong and very acute and well incurved.
Lunule long, narrow, and somewhat impressed. Surface closely
set with very fine concentric lines of growth, most distinct on
the posterior slope and towards the anterior of the shell, the
median portion being occupied by strong concentric corrugations.
Umbo very closely and regularly corrugate, in 3 mm. from the
beak there are 14 corrugations, the corrugations here extending
also on to the posterior slope; from the umbonal region towards
the ventral margin the corrugations become broader, with shallow
interspaces, flattening and thinning out towards both the anterior
and posterior. Hinge teeth large and strong for the size of the
shell, with a large deep cartilage or resilium pit, inner margin of
the valves smooth.

Dimensions. — Type, antero-posterior diameter, 56 mm.; umbo-
ventral diameter, 36 mm.; an example of the paired valves
measuring 55 by 33 gave a thickness through both valves of 25
mm. Other examples range 60 by 36, 58 by 36, 59 by 35, 52 by
32, 47 by 30, and 39 by 25.

Localities. — Lower and Middle beds of the Spring Creek
series, or Bird Rock Bluff, near Geelong ; Lower beds at Maude,
Moorabool Valley. Jan Jukian, — Eocene.

Observations. — -This is a well-marked and distinctive species
which shows some relationship to C. dennanti, Tate. Its char-
acters are usually fairly constant, but some specimens are so
straight along the ventral margin as to intensify the posterior
angulation to a marked degree, and in some again the concentric
corrugations are more persistent towards and up to the anterior
end.

Crassatellites kingicoloides, sp. nov. (PL XIII.,

Figs. 1, 2, 3).

Description. — Shell large, strong and solid, broadly ovate, with
prominent and large umbos, and rather a strongly marked and

Older Tertiary of Victoria. 95

rapid attenuation posteriorly, rather inflated in the neiglibour-
hood of the umbos but becoming depressed ventrally and
posteriorly.

Umbo-post-ventral keel not always well defined, but when
present, concavely curved to the posterior margin, sometimes
an intermediate faint keel shows between the posterior
depression for the ligament and the undjo-ventral keel. Post-
dorsal margin deeply concave to a short straight posterior
truncation, thence regularly convex to the anterior and thence
somewhat straight to the umbo. Umbos strong and very tumid,
to flat and depressed at the crest, incurved anteriorly, and
strongly but not very closely corrugated, the flrst 4 millimetres
•of the beak bearing from 9 to 11 corrugations. Lunule very
large, deep and broad, being in length nearly one-half the umbo-
ventral diameter; posterior to the beaks deeply and broadly
■excavated.

Surface covered with fine, close, but irregular concentric lines
of growth very closely packed anteriorly and posteriorly, about
one-third of tlie shell from the umbo regularly concentrically
corrugated with narrow ridges, and broader and shallow inter-
spaces ; the remainder of the shell is usually devoid of regular
corrugations, but frequently shows irregular concentric undula-
tions. Hinge very thick and solid, and with teeth strongly
■developed. Inner margin of the valves smooth and bevelled off
to a sharp edge. Internally the shell is relatively shallow and
■of small capacity.

Dimensions. — Type specimen, antero-posterior diameter, 69
mm.; umbo-ventral diameter, 54 mm.; thickness through both
valves, 36 mm.; the slight variation from this may be indicated
by the following specimens — 67 mm. by 53 mm., and 66 mm. by
53 mm.

Locality. — Jimmy's Point, Kalimna, Gippsland Lakes. Kalim-
nan, — Miocene.

Oltservations. — This is a fairly common and well-preserved
species from the above locality, and at once recalls the living C.
kingicola, Lamarck ; it may, however, be distinguished by its
greater inflation, its marked posterior attenuation, its shorter
.anterior, its umbos much nearer the anterior, and the closer and
more numerous umbonal corrugations. Compared with C.

96 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victo7'ia.

oblonga, T. Woods, from the Eocene beds of Table Cape^
Tasmania, it may be noted that T. Woods' species is propor-
tionately longer and of much more uniform breadth, is a more
depressed shell witii a more incurved umbo, and still finer and
closer umbonal corrugations, numbering (15) fifteen in the first 4
millimetres of the beak. With the recent species there is also
another analogy of some interest, in that a species of Myochama.
is not infrequently found adherent to the shell, the present fossil
species has Myochama plana, Tate, adherent to it.

Crassatellites camupus, sp. nov. (Plate XIV., Figs. 5-9).

Description. — Shell ovate, thick and solid, of medium size,,
with a very short anterior, and a somewhat attenuate posterior;,
strong, broad, and prominent umbos medially depressed. Slightly
concave anterior to the beaks, slightly to deeply concave posterior
to the beaks, ventral margin very slightly convex, medial portion
usually straight. Umbos strongly incurved and rather coarsely
corrugated, the first 4 millimetres of the beak bearing from 8 ta
10 corrugations, the umbonal region rapidly broadens and
becomes depressed. Umbo-post-ventral keel only moderately
developed and convexly rounded.

The surface shows fine but irregular concentric lines of growth,
with occasional irregular undulations, from a little less than
half the umbo-ventral diameter of the shell to about one-third
of the same the more regular corrugations make their appear-
ance, and here they are about a millimetre apart, with broad
shallow interspaces. Internal edge of shell smooth and bevelled
off sharp. Young examples of this species are rather more
wedge-shaped posteriorly tlian in the adult.

Dimensions. — Type specimens, left valve, antero-posterior
diameter, 54 mm.; umbo-ventral diameter, 41 mm.; depth
through the one valve, 14 mm.: right valve, antero-posterior
diameter, 55 mm.; umbo-ventral diameter, 37 mm.; depth, 12
ram. The following antero-posterior and umbo-ventral diameters-
will .serve to indicate the usual range and average variations : —
64 by 42 ; 61 by 43 ; 60 by 40 ; 54 by 37 ; 52 by 36 ; 31 by 21 ;
25 by 18; 21 by 16; 13 by 10.

Localiiies. — GY?Lnf^e Burn, between Forsyth's and Henty's, and

Older Tertiary of Victoria. 97'

Muddy Ci-eek, near tlie 8tate School, Western Victoria.
Kalimnan, — Miocene.

Observatio7is. — As I have previously indicated/ this species was-
regarded by Professor Tate as C. oblonga, T. Woods, but that
conclusion I could not agree with when dealing with a collection
of Table Cape fossils. Since then I have been able to examine
the type of T. Woods' species in the Hobart Museum, and to
collect a large .series of specimens from the type locality, and I
think there can be very little doubt about the utility of regarding
our Victorian form as a distinct species. C. camurus may be
distinguished from C oblonga by its different outline, more
striking umbo, by not being so generally depressed, and not so
flattened at the crest of the incurvature of the beak, being more
attenuate posteriorly, and by possessing a more coarsely corrug-
ated beak ; there are 8 to 10 corrugations in the first 4 millimetres
in tlie former, as against at least 15 in the latter.

Mytilicardia kalimnae, sp. nov. (Plate XII., Fig. 4).

Description. — Shell thin, almost elliptical in outline, and rather
depressed, so that from the internal aspect it appears shallow,,
externally strongly radiately ribbed, the ribs bearing erect scales.
Faintly concave anterior to the beak, showing an extremely
narrow but elongated lunule, anterior end convexly rounded and
well-developed, post-dorsal margin ascends only a little, thence to-
the extreme posterior, convexly curved rather than truncated,
and from the extreme posterior to the ventral margin more
sharply curved, the greater part of the margin undulatory on
account of the protrusion of the radial ribs.

Surface bearing 19 radiate ribs, with deep interspaces of about
the same Avidth; the ribs on the posterior slope are furnished
with distant (that is from 1.5 to 2 mm. apart) erect hollow scales
or spines, while on the anterior of the shell the scales are packed
much more closely, and appear rather as a granulation or irregular
oblong beading; ribs also radiately striate, and both interspaces
and ribs transversely crossed by lines of growth. Internally
.strongly denticulate, and owing to the thinness of the shell it is
internally grooved, corresponding to the external ribbing.

1 P.R.S. Vic, vol. viii., ii.s., p. 131.

'98 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Dimensions. — Antero-posterior diameter, 19 mm.; greatest
"■breadth, 12'5 mm.; umbo-veiitral diameter, 11 luui. ; thickness
'through one valve, about 4 mm.

Locality. — Jimmy's Point, Kalimna, Gippsland Lakes.
Kalimnan, — Miocene.

Capdita excrescens, sp. nov. (PI. XII., Figs. 2, 3).

Description. — Shell large, thick and strong, rotund, with a
'remarkably prominent umbonal region, and bearing coarse radial
■ costae, which are granulosely ornate.

Anterior side extremely short, slightly concave anterior to the
umbo, with a i-elatively small lunule; post dorsal slope long and
.faintly convex, remainder of the margin regularly I'ounded.
Umbo strong and incurved anteriorly, and rising high so as to
give a strong hump to the shell.

Surface sculptured by 19 strong radial ribs, with broader
interspaces, except at the ventral margin; both ribs and inter-
: spaces increasing in breadth towards the ventral margin; at the
medial portion of the ventral margin the distance from centre to

• centre of two adjoining ribs being (2^ two millimetres; the ribs
bear a rather strong beading, the beads are irregularly sized,
but run about eight in 5 millimetres, becoming more crowded
anteriorly, towards the ventral margin for about the last 5
millimetres the beads are replaced by closer imbricating frills.

•Concentric lamellae show in the interspaces corresponding to the
lines of growth, most prominently seen towards the anterior and

(posterior portions of the shell. Inner margin undulatory and

• coarsely denticulate, the teeth corresponding to the interspaces.

Dimensions. — Antero-posterior diameter, 21 mm.; umbo-
ventral diameter, 22 mm.; thickness through one valve, about
9 mm.

Locality. — Shores of Lake Bullen Merri, near Camperdown.
Balcombian, — Eocene.

Lucina gunyoungensis, sp. nov. (PI. XIV., Fig. 13).

Description.— 'Ji\\^\\ small, thin, orbicular to quadrately
•orbiculai', somewhat depressed, with a prominent pointed beak,
-greatest convexity of shell in the umbonal half, thence venti-ally
trather flattened.

Older Tertiary of Victoria. 99>

Umbo acute, incurved a little to the front of the medial line,
with a very small, deep, but relatively broad, cordate lunule, and
further down two faint curved o;rooves radiating from the umbo to-
the anterior margin ; shell much depressed anterior to the lunule
and inclined to shouldering or angulation at the downward curve of
the anterior margin ; dorsal margin straight, downwardly inclined,
and somewhat angulate with the posterior margia ; a change in
the convex curvature of the ventral margin can be noted from
that of the anterior and posterior margins, and this, together
with the shouldering, gives rise to the quadrate appearance of
the shell.

Surface sculptured by fine close concentric ridges which tend
to become lamellose anteriorly and posteriorly, numbering about
20 in 5 millimetres from the ventral margin in average sized'
specimens, but running closer and finer towards the umbo. No-
radial sculpture present externally, but internally there is a faint
radial striation terminating at the margin in faint crenulations.

Diinensio7is. — Type specimen, antero-posterior diameter, 13
mm.; umbo-ventral diameter, 12 mm.; others range from 12
mm. by 11 mm., 12-.5 mm. by 12 mm. to 14-5 mm. by 14-5 mm.;,
thickness through both valves of specimen 12-.5 by 12 is 6 mm.

Localities. — Cxrey clays of Grice's Creek or Gunyoung Creek,.
Mornington. Balcomlnan, — ^Eocene. I>ower beds of the Spring,
Creek series or Bird Rock Blufi', near Geelong. Jan Jukian, —
Eocene.

Observations. — Tliis species is apparently most closely related
to L. leucomomorpha, Tate, but is more depressed, with the-
umbos more anterior, more deeply excavated anterior to the-
umbos, and differently sculptured.

Chione etheridgei, sp. nov. (Plate XXL, Fig. 1).

Description. — Shell large, transversely oval, tiiick, and only
moderately convex; greatest convexity near- the umbo, and with
a marked flattening towards the ventral margin; deeply concavely
excavated antei'ior to the umbo.

Umlio very prominent, incurved anteriorly, and .situated about
one-third the length of tlie shell from the anterior margin.
Lunule distinct, elongate cordate, and slightly raised to a medial)
ridge along the junction of the valves. Dor.sally immediately

100 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

posterior to the umbo the ligamental groove is long and narrow,
and is margined by a much more elongate but relatively broad,
.smooth, flattened, or sliglitly concave area, which is well defined
from the remainder of the shell by an angulation running from
the umbo to the posterior margin. The post-dorsal margin is
slightly arched, and joins the posterior margin somewhat suddenly;
ithe junction is usually convexly rounded, but occasionally a
distinct angulation is noticeable giving rise to a posterior
truncation.

Ventral margin regularly and gently convexly rounded to the
more strongly convex anterior margin. The surface of the valves
is strongly marked by closely packed radial ridges, which
are broader than the interspaces umbonally, but the latter
become as broad at the ventral margin; the radial ridges show
.a tendency to subdivision by a minor i-adial groove, and this is
more especially noticeable on the anterior half of the shell ;
concentric lines of growth are also present and in conformity with
.some of these, are thin erect frills which are corrugated on their
A'entral aspect, the ridge on the frill corresponding in position to
the interspaces between the radial ridges. The frills become
more crowded towards the ventral margin. Inner margin
^lenticulated, anterior denticles at first very fine, gradually in-
-creasing in size to the anterior portion of the ventral margin,
then along the median portion finer and fairly regular, thence to
the posterior a few very strong ones, then gradually fading
away.

Di/ne/isions.-—Ty^& shell, antero-posterior diameter, 60 mm.;
aimbo-ventral diameter, 51 nnn. ; greatest thickness through one
valve about 18 mm. Other specimens range 65 mm. by 52 ram.;
63 by 49, 56 by 46, 53 by 42, 52 by 45, and a smaller specimen
with both valves in contact gives 44 by 35 and a thickness
through both valves of 24 mm.

Locality. — Lower beds of the Spring Creek series or Bird Rock
Bluff, near Geelong. Jan Jukian, — Eocene.

Observations. — Two species of this genus of a very similar
type of shell have already been described by Professor Tate,
namely — C. hormophora, and C. dimorphophylla. The former,
iiowever, is of different shape, is strongly inflated, and shows
many distinctive featunis in the surface sculpture ; the description

Older Tei'tlaiy of Victoria. 101

of the latter is of tlie most meagre order, ami but for possessing
well authenticated examples of the species, it would be difficult
to be certain on many points, but by actual comparison the
following points )nay be noted : — C. dimorphophylla is more
regularly tumid and not depressed as in the ])resent new species,
and shows a marked posterior truncation, and a shorter anterior
end, the umbos being much further forward, and the radial
ribbing is of a much closer and finer character.

This type of shell is also represented amongst living Australian
juollusca., and the species that appears most closely related is
C laqueata, Sowerby, which can be obtained living from the
Paramatta River, New South Wales, right up along the Queens-
land coast. This living species is, however, a strongly infiated
;itid rather coarsely ornate form, as compared with our fossil
species.

Chione cognata, sp. nov. (PI. XII., Fig. 5).

Description. — Shell large, thick, and solid, broad I3' ovate,
regularly convex but not strikingly tumid, with a shallow but
broad lunule, and not deeply concave anterior to the umbo.

Umbo broad and strong, incurved anteriorly, and situated
al)Out one-fourth the length of the shell from the anterior margin.
Anterior margin for the length of the lunule straight, thence to
and along the ventral margin regularly convex to the posterior,
where the shell shows an evident truncation from the post-dorsal
region, dorsal margin gently arched to the posterior truncation.
The ligamental groove is deep and very long, being about one-
half the length of the shell, and is margined by a broad, but
concave dorsal area which only shows lines of growth.

The surface of the valves is crowded with very close and fine
radial riblets, which are broader than tlie interspaces, the riblets
thicken somewhat towards the ventral margin but still remain
broader than the interspaces ; the radial sculpture is crossed by
very fine lines of growth, and by strong regular concentric frills,
the frills at first are thin and delicate and usually the bases only
are pre.served, but towards the ventral margin they become very
thick and strong I'idges medially, tapering to thinner crenulated
frills towards the anterior and posterior of the shell, the
concentric frills taking up the character of the radial sculpture

102 Proceedings of tlie Royal Society of Victoria.

are distinctly corrugated on both their dorsal and ventral aspects,,
ridges corresponding in position to the radial riblets, and where
the frills have become broad strong ridges, they show a corruga-
tion on their upper flat surface as well.

Inner margin tinely denticulated, in some well-preserved
examples the denticles commence under the umbo and extend ta
the top of the posterior angulation.

Di/nensions. — Antero-posterior diameter, 68 mm. ; umbo-ventral
diameter, 53 mm.

Locality. — Grange Burn, below Foi'syth's, Western Victoria
(T. S. Hall and G. B. P.). Kalimnan,— Miocene.

Observatio7is. — This species is another of similar type to the
foregoing but may be distinguished by its greater inflation,
relative dimensions, and detailed characters of surface ornament..

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Platic XII.

Fig. 1. — Chione etheridgei, sp. nov.

,, 2. — Cardita excresceiis, sp. nov., internal aspect.

,, 3. — Cardita excrescens, sp. nov., external aspect.

,, 4. — Mytilicardia kalimnae, sp. nov., slightly reduced.

,, 5. — Chione cognata, sp. nov.

Plate XIII.

Fig. 1. — ^Crassatellites kingicoloides, sp. nov., external aspect..
,, '2. — Crassatellites kingicoloides, sp. nov., anterior aspect,
,, 3. — Crassatellites kingicoloides, sp. nov., dorsal aspect.

Plate XIV.

Fig. 1. — Mytilus mooraboolensis, sp. nov.
2. — Crassatellites maudensis, sp. nov.
3. — Crassatellites maudensi-s, sp. nov.
4. — Lithophagus latecaudatus, sp. nov.
5. — Crassatellites camurus, sp. nov., left valve, adult.
6. — Crassatellites camurus, sp. nov., right valve, adult.
7. — Crassatellites camurus, sp. nov., left valve, young,
showing umbonal characters.

Proc. R.S. Victoria. 1902. PUte XII.

D. W. P.3terson, Photo.

D. W. Paterson, Photo.

Proc. R.S. Victoria, 1902. PUte XIIL

Proc. R.S. Victoria. 1902. Plate XIV.

D. W. Paterson, Photo.

Proc. R.S. Victoria, 1902. PUte XV.

D. W. Paterson, Photo.

Older Tertiary of Victoria. 103

Fig. 8.— Crassatellites camurus, sp. nov., right valve, young.
,, 9. — Crassatellites camurus, sp. nov., right valve, young.
,, 10. — Glycimeris halli, var. intennedius, var. nov.
,, 11. — Glycimeris halli, var. internietlius, var. nov.
,, 12. — Glycimeris halli, var. paucicostatus, var. nov.
,, 13. — Lucina gunyoungensis, sp. nov., enlarged twice natural
size.

Plate XV.

-Glycimeris halli, sp. nov., internal aspect, adult.
-Glycimeris halli, sp. nov., external aspect, adult.
-Trigonia semiundulata, Jenkins, from Spring Creek

series.
-Trigonia semiundulata, Jenkins, from Spring Creek

series.
-Trigonia semiundulata, var. granosa, var. nov., right

valve, from Lower Spring Creek series.
-Trigonia semiundulata, var. lutosa, var. nov., left valve^

from Muddy Creek lower beds.
-Trigonia semiundulata, var. lutosa, var. nov., left valve,

from Muddy Creek lower beds.
„ 8. — Glycimeris halli, sp. nov., young.
,, 9. — Glycimeris halli, var. paucicostatus, var. nov.

Fig.

1.

))

2.

)!

3.

?)

4.

) J

5,

)>

6.

^

J)

Art. XII. — Neiu or Little-known Victorian Fossils in
the National Museum, Melbourne.

Part I. — Some Paleozoic Species.

By FREDERICK CHAPMAN, A.L.S., &c.,
National Museiim.

(With Plates XVI., XVII. and XVIIL).

[Read 11th September, 1902].

?PLANT.^.

Genus Bythotrephis, J. Hall, 18-48.
Bythotrephis tenuis, J. Hall. (PI. XVL, Fig. 1).

B. gracilis, J. Hall, 1848, Palaeontology of New York, vol. i,
p. 62, pi. 21, fig. 1. [The specific name for this form was after-
wards altered by Hall to tenuis, in 1852, on account of its
non-agreement with the type specimens of B. gracilis from the
Clinton group. See Pal. New York, vol. ii., p. 187].

'■Fucoides,^ Blandowski, 1858, Trans. Phil. Inst. Victoria, vol.
ii., pt. 2, pp. 144-5, 2 pis.

Observations. — In the year 1858 W. Blandowski contributed a
note to the Philosophical Institute of Victoria, on some fueoid
remains which he had found in micaceous and flaggy sandstones
in a quarry near the gates of the Botanical Gardens, Melbourne.
These specimens were deposited by Blandowski in the Melbourne
Museum, the collection in which being afterwards incorporated
in the National Museum. The figured specimens, which have
not yet come to light, were labelled 2980 and 2981. The
specimen nosv described bears the number 2979 [246]^ and this is
now figured.

The absence of any vestige of structure in the so-called fossil
fucoids renders their exact determination a matter of some
uncertainty. Some forms of hydrozoa, for instance, simulate
them in their dendroid habit of growth. The tracks of polychsete

1 This and all succeeding numbers in sqiuire brackets refer to registered specimens in
the National Museum.

Little-known Victorian Fossils. 105

worms, likewise, often resemble the form or outline of a seaweed
impression. On the other hand the evidence of a vegetable origin
for these remains is strengthened where we have a distinct
•carbonaceous stain on th« rock matrix ; or as in these Victorian
specimens, a bleached impression, resulting from the leaching of
the limonite out of tlie sandy foundation immediately under the
impression, by the decomposition of the vegetable substance, and
the formation of an organic acid. And further, the nodose form
of parts of the outline in our fossils, as well as their irregular
branching habit, is strongly indicative of their plant origin.

This species was recorded by James Hall from the Trenton
Limestone of Herkimer County, New York.

Description!. — The main stem in this species of Bythotrephis
throws off branches and branchlets slightly decreasing in width.
Towards their extremities the branchlets have a crispate tendency
of growth. Here and there nodosities occur, usually under the
branches at the axils, but also along their general surface.

A somewhat analagous species in regard to the angle which
the branches make with the main stem, is Brongniart's Fucoides
targionii', but the more flexuous and slender habit of growth of
the Victorian specimens renders the two forms distinct.

Occurrence. — The present examples occur in a fine-grained
ferruginous sandstone containing some mica and argillaceous
inaterial ; the rock resembling in structure an excessively fine
arkose, and probably having originated from the finer portion of a
granitic detritus. The fossil impressions are pale in colour, or
almost white, in contrast to the ochre-coloured matrix, and
appear to have been bleached in the manner suggested above.

Locality and Horizon. — Botanical Gardens, South Yarra.
Silurian.

ANIMALIA.

Class ACTINOZOA.

Genus Pleurodictymn, Goldfuss, 1829.

Pleupodictyum megastomum, Dun. (PI. XVI, Figs. 2-5).

Pleurodictymnl sp. ind. R. Etheridge, jun., 1896, descr. Tas-
manian Sil. Foss., Secretary of Mines Rep., p. 31, pi. 1, fig. 1.

1 Histoire des V^g^taux fossil es, 18'2S-36, p. 56, pi. iv., fig. 2.

106 Froceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria,

P. megasio/imt)i, McCoy MS., W. S. Dun, 1898, Proc. R. Soa
Vict, Vol. X., New Series, pt. II., p. 83, pi. III., fig. 1.

Observations. — By comparing the specimens of Pleurodictyumi
in the collections at the National Museum, to which Sir Frederick
McCoy had attached a MS. name, I am able to verify Mr. Dun's>
supposition, that the specimens he figures from Mr. Sweet's-
collection are identical with those previously mentioned by
McCoy.^ Since, however, this form was neither figured or
described prior to Dun's paper the reference remains as above.

Some of the specimens in the Museum are of large dimensions,
a tabula in one [340] measuring 13 mm. in width, and the
corallum 55 mm.

From the very complete examples available, the following
diagnosis can be given.

Description. — Corallum roughly circular, or slightly elongatedi
in one direction ; base gently convex, often showing across the-
centre a deep impression of the crinoid stem to which it was in
the habit of affixing itself. Epithecal layer of base concentrically
rugose, marked by thin wavy ridges. On this basal surface the
areas of the corallites are bounded by irregular ridges arranged
radially from the centre of the corallum. In this latter feature,
and also in its more complanate form, P. megastomum differs
specifically from P. stylophorum, Eaton. Area of corallum;
consisting of from 8 to 14 polygonal corallites united by large-
mural pores, numbering about 8 or more in the length of the
radial walls in one plane, and rather irregularly disposed.
Surfaces of tabulaj pustulose, excepting near the periphery of
the outer corallites where the surfaces tend to become radially
ridged. Width of corallum in an average specimen, 45 mm.;,
height, 10 mm.

Occurrence. — P. megastomum usually occurs as a cast in the
blue or brown Silurian argillaceous limestones ; the rock often,
weathering to a bright yellow in parts, especially in the neigh-
bourhood of the fossils. One of the specimens alone, from
locality B. 23 [341], shows the original form and the epithecal
layer, but the crinoid stem to which it was attached has been
dissolved away.

1 Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., series 3, vol. xx., 1867, p. 201, footnote. Also, Smyth's.
1st Proj^ress Report, Melbourne, 1874, p. 34.

Little-hnoivn Victorian Fossils. 107

Localities and Horizon. — Junction of Woori-Yallock and Yarra
Kivers, collected by Geol. Surv. Vict. B. 23 [340-5], and gully
near porphyritic dyke west of Mount Disappointment, south of
Kilmore, collected by Geol. Surv. Vict. B. 16 [346-8]; specimens
in National Museum. Also Kilmore and Manslield district (Sweet
•collection, recorded by Dun, loc. sup7-a cit.). Probably from Yass^
.(by W. S. Dun); and Yass district, — Bowning series, — New South
Wales (by R. Mitchell)^; Zeehan, Tasmania (R. Etheridge, jun.).
■Silurian.

Class CRINOIDEA.

Family % Platycriiiidae^ Roemer.

Helicocriiuis., gen. nov.

Generic characters. — The arrangement of the plates in the
dorsal cup is monocyclic. Basals, 3; radials, 5; priraibrachs ?
(only one preserved in specimen). Tegmen fairly high, vaulted
over with numerous polygonal (usually pentagonal) plates. Arms,
5, forked once, ? on thix'd brachial plate; pinnules numerous.
Stem pentagonal, with alternate columnals transversely ridged,
and crenelate. Evidence of small cirri at intervals down the
stem. Proximal end of stem coiled (this last-named character is
by no means confined to this genus, but it is so conspicuous in
our specimen that it is incorporated in the new generic term
merely as a distinction).

Observatiotis. — This type approaches Hapalocrinus, Jaekel,'^ in
many respects, but in the latter genus the tegmen is lower, and
the stem is round, with longer columnals.

Helicocrinus differs from the typical platycrinids in the larger
number of plates which make up the summit or oral region of the
test, and also in the pentagonal form of the stem.'' Its otherwise
close relationship with Jaekel's group of the Hapalocrinidae,
■equivalent as Bather has shown^ to Wachsmuth and Springer's
interpretation of the Platycrinidae, compels one for the present at
least, to leave it in this group.

1 Proc. R. Soc. Vict., new series, vol. x., pt. ii., 1898, pp. 84, 85.

2 Proc. Lin. Soc. New South Wales, series 2, vol. ii., 1887, pp. 412, 413.

» Palaeontologische Abhandl, Jena, vol. vii. (new series, vol. iii.), 1896-7, p. 9.5.
* Waclismuth and Springer, Revision of tiie Palaeocrinoidea, pt. iii., Proc. Acad. Nat.
Sci. Philad., 1885, p. 314.

5 Geol. Mag., Dee. iv., vol. iv., Is07, p. 344.

108 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victorict.

Helicocpinus plumosus, sp. nov. (PI. XVII. and XVIIL,

Figs. 1-5).

Specific characters. — Dorsal cup small^ measuring 6 mm. in
greatest width. Tegmen lofty, 13 mm. in lieight, covered by
numerous pentagonal plates. With five arms, each branchings
once; length of longest arm, 43 mm. Pinnules long and slender,
alternating from each side of arm, one to each secundibrach; the
latter are slightly longer than broad, and the articulating surfaces
are oblique, set on in a zigzag manner. Width of secundibrachs
at their base 1 mm. Column pentagonal, with alternating ridges-
and depressions. The ridges are very pronounced at and just
above the proximal coiled end of the stem ; usually crenelate, with
the intermediate area of the columnals finely and transversely
striate. Length of column, not including the coiled portion,,
88 mm. Greatest width of columnals, 1.5 mm. Proximal end
of column coiled in two turns.

In the arrangement of the pinnules this form resembles
Hapalocrinus victoriae, which was described by Dr. Bather, in
1897, from the Silurian of Melbourne.^ A crinoid with a
similarly coiled column is seen in Jaekel's Acanthocrinus rex.^

Occurretice. — This beautiful and singularly perfect specimen
occurs in a fine sandy matrix, which seems to have been well
adapted for preserving such a delicate specimen. The upper
part of the crown of the fossil is represented in relief, but of
the stem and the larger part of the calyx only a hollow cast
remains. [384-5].

■Locality and Horizon. — From a quarry at West Brunswick,,
between Albert and Victoria Streets. Silurian.

Family Decadocrinidae, Bather.

Genus Botryocrinus, Angelin.

Botpyocpinus longibrachiatus, sp. nov. (PI. XVIII.,

Figs. 6-8).

Specific characters. — Cup dicyclic, subtrigonal. Inf rabasals, 5,
pentagonal; basals, 5, hexagonal; radials 5, shield shape.

1 Geol. Mag., vol. iv., p. 337, pi. xv.
- Op. supra oil., p. 16, pi. i.

Little-kno'wn Victo7'ian Fossils. 109'

Tegnieii fairly higli, covered by small hexagonal plates, a few of
which are seen in the impression from the fossil. Arm ossicles
smooth, usually having the deep ventral groove exposed.
Primibrachs, height equal to width. Secundibrachs slightly
elongated. Arms, three of which only are visible, branching oni
4th primibrach, giving rise to two slender armlets, which
subsequently branch again at unknown intervals (this last
structure was seen in detached fragments). Stem pentagonal,
with sulcate sides. Stem ossicles short, consisting of large pro-
jecting joints, and smaller non-salient ones. Stem canal,
pentagonal.

Measurements. — Dorsal cup, 7.5 mm. high ; width above, 10
mm.; width below, 3.5 mm. Length of arms visible to 40 mm.
Width of stem at 5 mm. below cup, 2.75 mm.

Observatio7is. — This species resembles B. quinquelobus, Bather^
(from the Silurian of Dudley) in the form of the cup ; the arms,
however, are slender and more closely adpressed at the axils in
our species.

Occurrence. — Found in a bluish micaceous sandstone, which
also contains remains of Homalonotus harrisoni. The crinoidal
remains occur chiefly in casts, of which, however, good impressions
may be taken, as the rock is tenacious.

Locality and Horizon. — Royal Park, Brunswick (probably near
the Model Farm). Collected many years since by Mr. T. Harrison,
and presented by him to the National Museum. [390-2],
Silurian.

Order OSTRACODA.
Genus Beyrichia, McCoy, 1846.
Beypichia kloedeni, McCoy.

McCoy, 184G, Synopsis Sil. Foss. Ireland, p. 58 (woodcuts).
Id., 1851, Brit. Pal. Foss. pt. 2, fasc. 1, p. 135, pi. IE., fig. 2.
Jones, 1855, Ann Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 2, vol. xvi., p. 165, ph
vi., tigs. 7 and 9.

Jones and Holl, 1886, it>id., ser. 5, vol. xvii., p. 349.

This rather variable form appears to be one of the commonest
Victorian species, so far as we can tell from the limited collections

1 Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., series 6, vol. ix. 1892, p. 189, pi. xi., figs. 1, 2.

110 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

already made. Possibly several described varieties are present,
including var. torosa, Jones.^ Many of the specimens from the
Silurian of Victoria are represented by hollow moulds of the
valves, from which it is possible to obtain a very faithful
impression in wax. In others, again, we have a cast of the
interior of the valve in relief, the shell having been dissolved
completely away.

Locality a?id Horizon. — Junction of Woori-Yallock and Yarra
Rivers. Collected by Geol. Surv. Vict. B. 23. [431-6]
Silurian.

Beyrichia kloedeni, McCoy, var. granulatn, Jones.
(PI. XVI., Fig. 8).

Jones, 1855, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 2, vol. xvi., p. 166, pi.
vi., fig. 9. Jones and Holl, 1886, ibid., ser. 5, vol. xvii., p. 350,
pi. xii., fig. 2.

Several examples of the above variety were found amongst a
collection of specimens labelled Beyrichia in the National
Museum, one of which (the specimen now figured) shows the
anterior lobe in the hypertrophied condition. [-I-IO]. The surface
of the valve shows a certain amount of granulation like the
variety figured by Prof. Rupert Jones. Our specimen seems
to have been slightly crushed between the posterior and middle
lobes.

Locality and Horizon. — Junction of Woori-Yallock and Yarra
Rivers, east of Melbourne. Collected by Geol. Surv. Vict. B.
23. [437-40]. Silurian.

Beyrichia wooriyailockensis, sp. nov. (PI. XVI., Fig. 6).

Description. — Valves sub-obloug, with three unequal lobes; the
middle lobe is short, extending only halfway to the ventral edge
of the valve, freely coalescing with the ventral ends of the
anterior and posterior lobes ; anterior lobe full, but not much
longer than the mid<lle lobe ; the hind lobe broader and flatter at
the dorsal edge of the valve than the other two, and modified by
a vertical sulcus to nearly one-half its length ; ends of lobes

1 Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., series 2, vol. xvi., p. 167, pi. vi., figs. 10, 11, ? 12.

Little-known Victorian Fossils. Ill

slightly salient on the dorsal edge of the valve. The curved
Tjorder has a raised marginal rim.

Measnrenmits. — Length, 2.08 mm.; height, 1.08 mm. Pro-
portions, 25 : 13.

Observations. — The above species shows some relationship to
the well-known B. kloedeni, which we have now recorded from
Victoria, and more especially to the variety described and figured
by Jones and Holl as var. intermedia of that species,^ the chief
difference being the larger development of the gigot lobe with its
vertical sulcus in B. wooriyallockensis. The valve in the latter
form is also much longer in proportion to its breadth, and the
lobes are distinctly coalescent. Another form to wliicli our
specimen at first sight shows affinity is B. admixta, Jones and
Holl,''' especially with regard to the prominence of the free ends
of the lobes ; the hind lobe in the Victorian species, however, is
of t]uite a different form, and is not adpressed to the hinder
curved border of the valve.

Locality and Horizon. — Found at the junction of the Woori-
Yallock and Yarra Rivers, east of Melbourne. Collected by
Geol. Surv. Vict. B. 23. [446]. Silurian.

Beyrichia maccoyiana, Jones, var. australice, nov.
(PI. XVI., Fig. 7).

Description. — This variety is distinguished from the type species
'by the narrower form of the antei'ior and middle lobes. In the
present variety the hind or gigot lobe is divided by a vertical
sulcus ; also the area in proximity to the curved border is less
■encroached upon by the front lobe, and the frill on the ventral
■ edge is consequently more conspicuous.

Observations. — A species of Beyrichia described by Krause
from the Lower Silurian (Ordovician) Clays of the Baltic area,
•namely, B. marchica^ bears a slight affinity to our form, but the
difference in the position of the lobes is very marked.

Locality and Horizon. — Junction of the Woori-Yallock and

1 Ann. Matf. Nat. Hist., series 5, vol. xvii., 1886, p. 352, pi. xii., %8. 3, 4.
•2 Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., series 5, vol. .wii., 1886, p. 359, pi. xii., fig. 5.
3 Zeitschr. dcutsch. Gesellsch., 1889, p. 19, pi. ii., figs. 10, 11.

112 Proceedings of the Royal Society oj Yictoria.

Yari-a Rivers. Collected by Geol. Surv. Vict. B. 23. [441-3].
Silurian.

Beyrichia kilmoriensis, sp. nov. (PL XVI., Fig. 9).

Description.— Y-aXwe?, sub-oblong, general area flat. Dorsal line
straight, except where broken by the salient lateral lobes.
Ventral border well-rounded, especially in front. The two fore
most lobes narrow, long, and curved towards the anterior end ;.
the hind-lobe nearly obsolete, most conspicuous at the dorsal
edge on the posterior angle. Curved border with an upturned rim.
Surface of valves smooth.

Measurements. — Length, 2.45 mm.; height, 1.36 mm.

Obse?-vatiofis. — This species and the next one to be described-
belong to the jugose type of Beyrichise, and in the narrowness of
the lobes resemble B. complicata, Salter,^ which, by the way, is a
characteristic Ordovician fossil. The tapering character and
evanescence of the two foremost lobes in the region of the ventral
border in our species, however, is strikingly distinct.

Locality and Horizon. — Found at Broadhurst's Creek, east of:
Kilmore, Victoria. Collected by Geol. Surv. Vict. Bb 18.
[445]. Silurian.

Beyrichia ligatura, sp. nov. (PI. I., Fig. 10).

Description. — Valves sub-oblong, rather narrow in lateral aspect,
surfaces somewhat convex, with the three lobes well-marked.
The anterior lobe pear-shaped, salient, and strongly curved
towards the antero-dorsal angle; middle lobe narrow pear-shape,,
and very prominent or even ridgelike, with a slight forward,
curvature, and salient on the dorsal edge of the valve ; posterior
lobe smaller than the anterior, pear-shaped and resting against
the upturned rim of the ventral border. The other lobes do not
quite reach the sulcate area inside the ventral rim of the valve.

Measurements. — Length, 1.6 mm.; height, 1 mm.

Locality and Horizon. — Junction of the Woori-Yallock and the-

1 Mem. Soc. Geol. Surv., 1S48, vol. ii., pt. i., p. 352, pi. viii., fif,'. 16; also M'Coy,.
Brit. Pal. Foss., 1851, pt. ii, fasc. 1, p. 136, pi. i. K., fi^'- 3.
Salter, ibid., 1852, fasc. 2, .\ppendix .-V, p. ii.
Compare Jones, 1855, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. 2, vol. xvi., pi. vi., fig. 4.

LlUle-knoivn Victorian Fossils. 113-

Yarra Rivers. Collected by the Geo). Surv. Vict. B. 23f.
[444]. Silurian.

Order PHYLLOC ARIDA, Packard.

Sub-Order Ceratiocarina.

Family Caryocaridce, nov.

Genus Caryocarh, Salter, 1863.

Caryocarls angusta, sp. nov. (PL XVIir., Fig. 10).

Description. — Carapace bivalved, narrow, oblong, widest at the-
postero-ventral region; dorsal border straight, ventral gently
convex, and well-rounded posteriorly^: usually three and a-half
times as long as high, but variable in its proportionate length;,
smooth, with a faint creasing or folding parallel with the ventral
margin. Length of figured specimen, 25 mm.; height, 7 mm.

Observation. — C. angusta approaches some varieties of 0.
wrightii, Salter,"- from the Skiddaw Slates, especially those with
narrow valves, but it difi'ers from them in the less sharply trun-
cate extremities. C. oblongus, Gurley,'^ from the calciferous
shales of Canada, also closely approaches the Victorian speci-
mens, but is not quite so long in proportion to its height. The
above form was referred by Gurley to the graptolities.

Localities and Horizon. — Collected by the Geological Survey of
Victoria, Ba 90 [193-4] and Ba 92 [195] near Guildford; also
from the Parish of Coole Bai'ghurk, W.L.S.2. From Castlemaine,.
associated with Didymograptus caduceiis (T. S. Hall collection).
Lower Ordovician.

Genus Saccocaris, Salter, 1868.
Saccocaris tetragona, sp. nov. (PI. XVIIl., Fig. 11).
Description. — Valves sub-rectangular, oblong,. Length, a little

1 Bj' the evidence of the position of the caudal appendages derived from the type of
the genus lihinnjjferocaris presently to be described, it seems necessary to reverse the
relative position of the valves from that in which it was regarded by Salter, Jones, and
Woodward for this particular group, and to take the narrow end as the anterior. By this
reading also the valves correspond in position with Hi/inciiocaris, which was, however, not
so distinctly bivalved.

2 C. iwigTirir, Salter, Jones, and Woodward, 1892, Mon. Brit. Pal. Phyllopoda (Pal.
Soc), p. 89, pi. xiv., figs. 11-15.

3 Journal of Geology, vol. iv., No. 1, 1896, p. 87, pi. iv., fig. 2.

114 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

■more than two and a-half times the height. Upper and lower
edges straight or slightly undulate, and divergent towai'ds the
posterior extremity. Ends gently rounded ; lower edge of valve
apparently notched or fimbriate in some specimens. Length of
figured example, 12 ram.; height, 4.5 mm.

Observations. — The valves of S. tetragona as they occur in the
Victorian rock-specimen (a pale crumpled shale), are somewhat
-distorted, but the general outline can be distinctly made out in
one or two better preserved examples. Its nearest ally seems
to be S. minor, ^ from the Lower Oi'dovician of Arenig and
Portmadoc.

Localitv and Horizon. — Collected by the Geological Survey of
Victoria B. 26. [196.] Lower Ordovician.

Genus Rhinopterocaris, gen. nov.

Generic characters. — Carapace bivalved, long ovate, shaped
somewliat like the wing of a dipterous insect. Dorsal border
gently convex, ventral more strongly curved ; well-rounded
posteriorly, tapering more acutely towards the anterior extremity,
the anterior portion of the carapace sometimes exhibiting traces
of tht)racic or rostral structures. The caudal extremity having
a short, sharply pointed telson, with vestiges of a sharp stylet.

•Carapace smooth, hut having a few strong lateral folds on the
ventral margin, and one on the dorsal margin. Masticatory
apparatus like that of Dithyrocaris, but having the highest cusps
in the middle of the ridge. An elongate pyriform pit is seen in
the area immediately below the dorsal border at the anterior end,
which seems to be comparable with the stalk-eye socket of the

■recent Nebalia, to which the palfeozoic phyllocarids appear to be

tmost nearly allied.

Rhinoptepocapis maccoyi, Etlieridge, HI, sp.
(PI. XVIIL, Figs. 9, ? 16, 17).

Lingulocaris maccoyi., R. Etlieridge, fil., 1892, Records Geol.
Surv. IST. S. "VVale-s, vol. iii., pt. 1, pp. 5-8, pl. iv.

1 Jones and Woodward, 1891, Rep. Brit. Assoc, p. 424, figs. 1-17 ; Ibidem, 189-2, Men.
Brit. Pal. Phyllopoda Pal. Soc), p. 86, pl. xiv., fi<;s. 7-9.

Little- kno'wn Victorian Fossils. 115-

Caryocaris curvilatus, Gurley, Journal of Geology, vol. iv.,.
No. 1, 1896, p. 87, pi. iv., fig. 3; pi. v., fig. 3.

Specific characters. — Carapace thin, or even filmy, winglike in.
appearance, sub-elliptical, well-rounded ventrally, dorsal and
ventral margins with deep fokls, excepting on the extren)e edge.
A few oblique wrinkles crossing the ventral folds both ways in
the posterior ventral region, which possibly mean a strong
original inflation of that part of the carapace. Vestiges of
cliitinous thoracic or cephalic appendages sometimes preserved at
the anterior extremity of the carapace ; this end is distinctly
blunt in general form in well-preserved specimens, thus differing
from that of Lingulocaris. Occasionally the two valves are found
united (see Fig. 17). Posterior extremity of carapace occasionally
showing a rninute tuberculation near the hinge line. Telson
short, sharply pointed, and with a laterally attached and oblique
stylet. Masticatory apparatus consisting of a maxillary ridge or
base, with about eight sharp cusps, the highest being in the
middle.

Measure/nenis. — Extreme length of longest specimen figured, 40
mm. Greatest lieiglit of same specimen, 11 mm. Average
length of carapace without appendage.s, 30 mm.

Observations. — In the lower Ordovician slates and shales of
Victoria certain Phyllocarida occur, often in great abundance.
The largest and commonest of these forms was referred by Sir F. .
McCoy to the genus Hymenocaris, and he gave the provisional
or MS. name of H. salteri to the species in 1861.' Since that
time, although often referred to by the above-mentioned name, it
had not been systematically described until 1892, when Mr.
Etheridge, jun. {(>p. supra cit.), gave a very complete account of
the form, so far as specimens were available, with full references
to past records; and figures were also given of some of these
Victorian fossils. Etheridge then referred the form to the genus
Lingulocaris on account of its general shape ; the affinity to
Caryocari-s, in which genus Salter had previously suggested it
should be included,^ being considered slight, since it difi'ered in
its general outline. The specific name maccoyi was then substi-

1 The ancient and recent Natural History of Victoria. Vict. Intercol. Exhib. Essays, .
p. 162.

2 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc, vol. xix., 1863, p. 139, note.

116 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

•tuted by Etlieridge, for Salter's name had already been attached
"to a species of Lingulocaris — L. salteriana.

R. R. Gurley has found certain fossil remains in the calciferous
series of Summit, Nevada, and Point Levis, Canada, which may
be referred to the above genus. They are associated in the
North American strata, as in the Victorian, with graptolites
of the Lower Ordovician types, and Gurley interprets their
•structure as representing the polypaiy of a graptolite, with "the
proximal portion possibly thecaphorous." There appears to be no
■direct evidence, however, which points to that conclusion, and,
moreover, the characters of Caryocaris, to which genus Gurley
crefers them, have been well defined by Messrs. Salter, Jones, and
Woodward as a genus of bivalved Crustacea of the phyllocarid
group.

During my examination of an extensive series of phyllocarid
■remains in the collection of the National Museum, and in private
collections, I was struck with the different appearances shown by
the carapaces of these fossils when preserved in a crumpled rock,
;and when found in a fine-textured shale. For the better preser-
vation of the carapace we naturally turn to specimens preserved
in a fine-grained rock, or one which has been subjected to a
minimum of deformation. In the fine-textured shales from the
north of Lancefield the carapaces are found to be practically
smooth in the central area, excepting where roughened second-
arily by chemical action between the folia of the rock. The
dorsal and ventral borders of the valves are deeply sulcate or
folded and traversed obliquely by shorter folds, or sometimes by
fine, long, hair-like grooves. In those examples which are found
in the crumpled slates or phyllites the valve has been corres-
pondingly crumpled and distorted, often, however, in a most
.regular manner, and at first suggestive of a primary wrinkling in
the carapace itself.

The generic differences which separate this form from other
previously described genera of the Phyllocarida is made apparent
by the discovery of the exceptionally perfect specimen now
figured, and which was collected by the Geological Survey of
Victoria at the camp north of Lancefield Ba 27 [174]. This
specimen, which is in the collection at the National Museum, shows
that the animal possessed a short stylet, like that suggested by Salter

Llffle-kmnvn Victorian Fossils. Ii7

for Caryocaris.' The outline of our specimen is essentially
different from both Lingulocaris aiidCaryocaris; and the peculiarly
formed rostral processes seen in our specimen seem to be quite
lunknown in the above-mentioned genera, to which this form
might otherwise be somewhat related. The masticatory apparatus
has not been recorded from any of its immediate allies, the nearest
laeing the well-known dental ridges of Dithyrocaris, which, how-
•ever, differ in having the longest cusps at the anterior end instead
of the median, as in Rhinopterocaris.

Localities and Horizon. — Rhinopterocaris maccoyi occurs at
several of the lowermost horizons in the Lower Ordovician of
Victoria, which are characterized by different assemblages of
Graptolites. The specimens obtained by the Geological Survey
•of Victoria, and now in the National Museum, are as follows: —
Camp north of Lancefield, Bb 27 [174-7] associated with Tetra-
graptus f ruticosus, T. serra and Phyllograptus typus, in a pale grey
slate. Bb 31 [172-3] in chiastolite slate. Bb 39 [167-71]
associated with Tetragraptus serra, in dark grey slate. Bb 40
[182-5] in phyllite. Bb 41 [188] in pinkish decomposed shale
(caudal appendages). Bb 44, [186-7] in black shale. West
■of Gisborne, Ba 70 [244] in greenish-grey slate. (?) Barker's
^Street, Castlemaine, Ba 78 [245] associated with Didymograptus
•caduceus, Tetragraptus decipens, and Loganograptus logani, in
greenish-yellow slate. E. of Guildford, Ba 83 [189] in decom-
posed shale. Near Guildford, Ba 91 [190-1] associated with
Didymograptus sp. and Trigonograptus wilkinsoni, in decomposed
shale. From Parish of Coole Barghurk, W.L.S.2 and W.L.8.3
[180-1] in black slate.

Also from Burn's Reef, Chewton, Bendigo, Castlemaine
<T. S. Hall collection).

From Castlemaine, an exceptionally large cai'apace measuring
50 mm. in length, and 20 mm. in greatest height (G. B.
Pritchard collection).

Mr. Etheridge's specimens came from Bendigo, and from
Baynton's, Campaspe River, Central Victoria.

My best thanks are due to Mr. T. S. Hall, M.A., and Mr.
G. B. Pritchard, for their kind loan of specimens which enabled
me to work out the details of this and the foregoing species.

1 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc, vol. xix., 1863, p. 137 (fig. 15) and p. 139.

118 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Class BRACHIOPODA.

Genus Sip]ionotreta., de Verneuil, 1845.

Siphonotreta maccoyi, sp. nov. (PI. XVIIL, Figs. 12-14)..

Description. — Valves sub-circular, front margin broadly
rounded, sides irregularly rounded; surface of valves slightly
convex and acuminate towards the foramen. Dorsal valve
smaller and broader than the peduncle valve. Foramen small.
Surface of valves ornamented with a series of fine, numerous and^
equidistant concentric striations, which are slightly imbricate,
and bearing vestiges of blunt spines at distant intervals. Lengtb
generally equal to the breadth. The specimens vary considerably
in size, and examples of intermediate dimensions occur; those
from the Lower Ordoviciau are usually smaller than those of
the Upper Ordovician. Limits of length measurement of specimens
in the National Museum, 4 to 10 mm.

This species is easily separable from S. micula,^ to which it
bears most resemblance, by having a much larger number of
concentric strige, which are also finer; the latter form usually
exhibit three or four concentric lineations, which are very
strong and distinct.

In S. maccoyi the foramen is small and generally obscure, but
can be traced by the position of the median fissure, seen in the
more or less crushed examples, resulting from the fracture of the
thin shell over the pedicle tube. Many of the valves have been
distorted by pressure, laterally, longitudinally, or obliquely.

Observations. — In 1867 Prof. M'Coy noted the occurrence of
Siphonotreta in Victoria, and referred to the fossils in the
following words'- : —

"As a general rule, the Graptolite slates in every part of the
world contain no other fossils. I, many years ago, discovered in
Wales, near Builth, the only shell I ever heard of in Graptolite
slates (the Siphonotreta viicula., M'Coy), and I was greatly
surprised to recognise it also in Victoria in the Deep Creek
section."

Since the above date this fossil has often been quoted as S.

1 Brit. Pal. Fosa., 1852, p. 188, pi. IH., fi<j.3. Also Davidson, Mon. Brit. Sil. Brach.
(Pal. Soc), 1866, p. 76, pi. viii., figs. 2-6.

2 Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 3, vol. xx., 1867, p. 201.

Little-hiiown Victorian Fossils. 119

niicula in lists of Australian fossils. A careful examination of
a large number of valves from the Deep Creek section and
elsewhere has convinced me that they differ in essential
characters from the well-known British species, and the form will
I think most appropriately be designated by associating with it
the name of its first discoverer.

Localities and Horizons.— CoWected. by the Geological Survey
of Victoria, Bb 29 [198 — 9] Newham ; associated with Didy-
mograptus extensus, Tetragraptus quadribrachiatus, Clonograptus
rigidus var. tenellus, Diplograptus sp., Lasiograptus sp., and
Phyllograptus typus. Lower Ordovician.

Geological Survey of Victoria, Ba 62 [232-5J and 64 [219
-31], Deep Creek, Saltwater River, north-west of Bulla; asso-
ciated with Stephanograptus gracilis, Dicranograptus ramosus,
Dicellograptus furcatus, Diplograptus sp., and Climacograptus
bicornis. Upper Ordovician.

Order PTEROPODA.

Genus Hyolithes, Eichwald, 1840.

Hyolithes leptus, sp. nov. (PI. XVIIL, Fig. 15).

Descriptio7i. — Shell straight, conical, and attenuate, tapering
very gradually. (Apex missing.) Aperture opening obliquely
towards the extended margin of the dorsal side. Surface of shell
convex, but somewhat crushed in the present specimen ; marked
transversely with convex lines near the apex, but becoming
sinuous nearer the apertural end. Sides of shell with a narrow-
sunken border possibly indicating a lateral angulation. Length
when complete, about 50 mm.; length of specimen, 41 mm. ; width
at aperture, 7.5 mm. ; width at broken proximal end, 3 mm.

Observatio7ts. — This species shows some affinity with certain
forms of Hyolithes described by Billings and Walcott from the
Lower Cambrian (Olenellus zone) of Newfoundland, Canada, and
the United States, and especially with H. communis, Billings, var.
emmonsi, Ford.^ Our specimen, however, is more attenuate, and
the surface strise are not so fine, the area between them often
forming superficial ridges. The specimen figured by Tate from

1 Bull. U.S. Geol. Survey, No. 30, 1886, p. 137 ; Walcott, U.S. Geol. Surv. Tenth Ann.
Rep. (1888-9) 1890, p. 621, PI. Ixxvii. fig. 4, 4a, 6.

3

120 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

the Cambrian of Curramulka, South Australia, under the name
of H. communis, Billings, is not far removed from our specimen
in general appearance, but the strise are finer and the shell is
proportionately shorter.'^

Locality and Horizon. — Collected by the Geological Survey of
Victoria, W.L.S.2 [197], Parish of Coole Barghurk. Lower
Ordovician.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES XVL, XVIL AND XVIIL
Plate XVI.

Pig. 1. — Bythotrephis ienui<;, J. Hall. Natural size. [246].

Pig. 2. — Pleurodictytim megastonmm, Dun. A cast of the
corallum of a very large specimen. Natural size.
[340].

Pig. 3. — P. viegastoimiin. Base of a well-preserved specimen,
showing the epithecal surface, and an impression
of a crinoid stem-fragment to which the coral was
originally attached. Natural size. [341].

Pig. 4. — P. megastomum. Taken from a wax squeeze, showing
the under surface of a tabula, with radial ridges
and tubercles. Natural size. [340].

Pig. 5. — P. megastomum. Two radial ridges of the above
more highly magnified, to show the quasi-linear
arrangement of the tubercles. x 3. [340].

Fig. 6. — Beyrichia wooriyallockensis^ sp. nov. Right valve ;
taken from a wax squeeze. X 12. [446].

Fig. 7. — Beyrichia tnaccoyiana, Jones, var. australice, nov.
Left valve, x 10. [441].

Pig. 8. — Beyrichia klxdeni, M'Coy, var. grafiuiata, Jones.
Kight valve; a specimen showing the hypertrophied
anterior lobe. Prom a wax squeeze, x 7. [440].

Pig. 9. — Beyrichia kihnoriensis, sp. nov. Left A^alve. x 11.
[445].

Fig. 10. — Beyrichia iigatura, sp. nov. Right valve. x 15.
[444].

2 Trans. R. Soc. S. Axiatralia, vol. xv. (1891-2), p. 186, pi. ii., fig. 2.

Little-knoivn Victorian Fossils. 121

Plate XVI I.

Helicocrinns pluniosus^ sp. nov. From the Upper Silurian of
Brunswick, near Melbourne. Slightly under
natural size. [384J.

Plate XVIII.

Pig. 1. — Helicocrifius piiuiiosus, sp. nov. Calyx showing the
arrangement of the plates in the dorsal cup and
tegmen. Pinnules not shown, x 2. From a wax
squeeze.

Fig. 2. — H. pli/tnosiis, sp. nov. Part of stem near distal end,
with live columnals. x 4. From a wax squeeze.

Fig. 3. — H. plumosus, sp. nov. Transverse section of stem.
X 4.

Fig. 4. — H. plufiiosjis, sp. nov. Coiled proximal, end of stem,
nearly cylindrical, and with prominent ridges.
Taken from a wax squeeze. x 2. [385. J

Fig. 5. — II. plumosus, sp. nov. Anterior extremity of a
branch, showing the mode of attachment of the
pinnules to the .secundibrachs. x 2. [384.]

Fig. 6. — Botryocri)ms longibrachiatits^ sp. nov. The stem,
dorsal cup, traces of the tegmen, and ventral
aspect of brachials. From a wax squeeze. X 2.
[390.]

Fig. 7. — B. longibrachiatus, sp. nov. Section of stem, with
pentagonal canal. X 4. [392.]

Fig. 8. — B. longihrachiatus., sp. nov. Two slender armlets, one
exposing the furrow for the axial cord. From a
wax squeeze. X 3. [391.]

Fig. ^.—Rhinopterocaris titaaoyi, ¥A\\., iil., sp. An exception-
ally perfect specimen, showing the masticatory
apparatus. Left valve. X 2. [174.]

Fig. 10. — Caryocaris angusta, sp. nov. Left valve. Natural
size. [195.]

Fig. 11. — Saccocaris ietragona, sp. nov. Right valve. X 2.
[196.]

3a

122 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Fig. 12. — Siphonotreta 7?inccoyi\ sp. iiov. Peduncle valve of a

large specimen. x 2. [229.]
Fig. 13. — S. fnaccoyi, sp. nov. Dorsal valve of a smaller

specimen, broadened by crushing. x 4. [199.]
Fig. 14. — S. maccoyi, sp. nov. Interior of a dorsal valve,

distorted by pressure. x 4. [198.]
Fig. 15. — Hyolithes leptus, sp. nov. Natural size. [197.]
Fig. 16. — 7 Rhitiopterocaris ?/iaccoyi, Etheridge, fil., sp. Two

valves overlapping, and laterally displaced, the

dorsal edges being outside. Natural size. [245.]
Fig. 17. — R. maccoyi, Eth., til., sp. Two united valves. x 2.

[184.]

I'rur. U.S. Vidoria, 1902. Flat,; XVI.

Z O ! C r'C- .£ 5^ I i~S ^''' ■'' '^l"' ^' ' ^' ''" ^ ''~^ < A

Pruc. U.S. Virhrria, 1<)()2.^^ Plate XVII.

I'ruc. R.!S. Victoria, I<JO:J. VLalc XVIll.

■ wr

■^^J

R

^ r ^4 lii

r' ■^•i if' -.

PAL/LO 7, O IC FO S S ; 1- S FX O M V ' C i O l>? < A

Art. XIII. — The Age of the Metamorpluc Rocks of North-
Eastern Victoria.

By J. W. GREGORY, D.Sc, F.R.S.

[With Plates XIX.-XXI.].
(Eead 11th September, 1902).

I. — Introduction.

The geological history of Victoria is generally represented as
beginning in the ordovician (lower silurian) period.' This
view is based upon the belief that the broad areas of schists
and metamorphic rocks in the extreme west, and in the
north-east of Victoria have been formed by the metamor-
phism of silurian and ordovician rocks in post-silurian times.
This view is repeatedly expressed in the geological literatui'e of
Victoria. Dr. Selwyn attributes such an origin not only to
the schists, but even to the granites. He stated'-* that the
" granites are in no sense intrusive or irruptive masses, but only
the completely-transmuted ends of the silurian rocks that have
either been lowered in early geological times to within the in-
fluence of central heat, or by some means been subjected to other
powerful transmuting agencies."^

The same theory is taught in Mr. R. A. F. Murray's "Physical
Geography and Geology of Victoria" (pp. 37, 38); and Mr.
A. W. Howitt lent the weight of his authority to this view by
maintaining the existence of a passage from silurian sediments to
metamorphic rocks in various parts of the Victorian Alps. In
Mr. Howitt's later papers this view was re-considered in so far
that the felspathic metamorphic rocks were regarded as altered
plutonic rocks, and only the iion-felspathic schists as altered

i_Exclusive of a small band near Heathcote, that has been described as Cambrian.

2 Spec. Rep. Geol. Surv. Vict, 1892.

3 A. R. C. Selwyn : Notes on the Physical Geography, Geology and Mineralogy o(
Victoria. Internat. Exhib. Essays, 1866-1867, p. 155, Official Record, Melbourne, 1866.

124 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

sedimentary deposits. The most weighty expression of this view-
is given in Mr. Howitt's memoir, " Notes on the Contact of the
Metamorphic and Sedimentary Formation at the Upper Darga
River, "^ which is based upon careful study of a series of micros-
copic examinations of the rocks in question. Mr. Howitt there
pointed out that the metamorphic rocks are of two distinct
origins. The first set includes a series of schists containing
felspar; Mr. Howitt no doubt quite correctly regards them as
metamorphosed examples of igneous rocks. In regard to the
second group, he concludes- that "when the crystalline schists are
simply mica schists, without traces of felspar, and are connected
by gradations with the sedimentary formations, they are clearly
metamorphosed representatives of the latter."

Mr. Howitt explained that "the sediments are metamorphosed
into mica schists, the plutonic rocks into mica schists and gneisses,
and there is thus created an appearance of gradual transition
from the normal sediments to the normal massive plutonic rocks."*

This view was a great advance on the theory of the origin of
gneisses and granite bv the alteration of lower Palaeozoic slates
and sandstones; but it still accepted the view of the Ordovician
and Silurian age of the materials in the metamorphic series.

Dr. Selwyn's theory is expressed in the Geological Survey map'
of Victoria, the preparation of which was concluded last year, and
which has recently been issued. The explanation of the map
describes the metamorphic rocks as containing "metamorphosed
lower Silurian rocks east of Beechworth and at Stawell, silky
micaceous schists, mica schists, and gneiss of many varieties,
passing from unaltered Silurian into metamorphic granite."

Anxious to get a definite base for the geological history of
Victoria, T had taken the first opportunity for a visit to the
north-eastern district to examine the relations of the metamorphic
and the normal palaeozoic rocks. The weather was unfavourable,,
and, though I found the two sets of rocks in close juxtaposition
on the Cobungra Creek, a heavy snow fall covered them before I
found the line of junction. I saw sufficient, however, to make me
doubt the asserted passage from the silurian to the metamorphic

1 Spec. Rep. Geol. Surv., Vict., 1892.

2 Op. cit., p. 8.

3 Ibid., p. 9.

i

Age of Metamorpkic Rocks, Victoria. 125

rocks. A second search iie;ii- Onieo was rendered futile by the
fact that the boundary between the schists and sediments was
not where it was marked on the then current edition (1880) of
the Geological Survey map, on the scale of 8 inches to the mile.
I accordingly failed to find the junction until too late to use it.
That mattered the less, as Mr. A. W. Howitt had already deter-
mined that the schists in that case were not altered palaeozoic
sediments, but altered plutonic rocks.

In my second vacation I returned to the north-east to renew
this search on the boundary of the metamorphic rocks in Bogong.
Snow and fog again hid the junction on the main divide, so I
turned northwards to Yackandandah, hoping to find satisfactory
exposures at a lower altitude.

II. — The Metamorphic and Ordovician Hocks at
Yackandandah.

The Geological Survey map of Victoria shows the ordovician
and metamorphic rocks at Yackandandah in close contact along
Commissioner's Creek and crossing the ridge which separates that
valley from Indigo Creek. The saddle between the heads of the
two creeks looked a hopeful place at which to tind exposures of
the two series of rocks showing their mutual relations.

Yackandandah is situated on some flats beside the Yackan-
dandah Creek, near its junction with Commissioner's Creek and
Nine Mile Creek (PL XIX.). To the east is a low track of biotite-
plagioclase-granite and granodiorite. To the north-west the rocks
are all metamorphic, and they end westward along a line running
from south-east to north-west against the ordovician rocks with
granitic intrusions. Commissioner's Creek is shown on the map
as flowing from the north-west, along the junction between the
metamorphic and ordovician serie.s. Nine Mile Creek flows from
the south-west, apparently at right angles to the strike of the
ordovicians.

The only literature upon this precise locality to which reference
need be made is a paper by Mr. A. W. Howitt, "Notes on the
Geology of the Ovens District, with Remarks on the Deep
Leads." This paper includes' a brief account of Twist Creek, and

1 Prog. Rep. Geol. Surv., Victoria, II., p. 78, 1874.

126 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

an admirable illustration of the contorted character of the gneiss
and schist of Commissioner's Creek.

My first excursion from Yackandandah was along Commis-
sioner's (Jreek in order to get a general idea of the creek and the
rocks on both sides. The schists are exposed in the first cutting
on the road along Commissioner's Creek. They strike to the
north, and stand nearly vertical. They are traversed by euritic
dykes, of which the largest is two feet in width. The next road
cutting shows weathered mica schists, with small quartz veins.
After crossing a small brook, and just before reaching another
road cutting, a track leads to the left, by a watercourse passing
near an old roofless wooden house. The tx'ack leads to a quarry,
at the foot of the steep ridge. The rocks here are as metamorphic
as those on the eastern side of the valley. The strike is from
N.N.W. to S.S.E., and the main rock is a fine grained black
gneiss, cut through by some dykes. Search for the junction with
the ordovician series had, therefore, to be made further to the
south-west. The ridge which is marked on the map as rising to
867 feet, is composed mainly of a medium grained gneiss and
dykes of red pegmatite. On the ridge is some coarser hornblendic
gneiss, the strike of which is generally to the north-west parallel
to Commissioner's Creek. On the south-western side of this
ridge lies Wood Cutter's or Sawpit Gully, the rocks on the left
bank of which are mainly schists and gneiss. At the junction of
Wood Cutter's or Sawpit Gully and Twist Creek there are some
excellent exposures on the bed of the valley, where the gravel has
been sluiced away during some mining operations. On the bed
of the stream and on the right bank are some good exposures of
contorted gneiss and schists, striking north-west by north. A
very coarse-grained pegmatite cuts through this series. A little
way up Twist Creek from the junction of Sawpit Gully are some
beds of slate and sandstone, with a strike of from N.N.W. to
N.N.W. by N., and dipping 80 degs. to the west. In the best
exposure the beds are vertical, and the strike is N.N.W. | N. In
the angle between Sawpit Gully and Twist Creek is a wooded
spur, from which the only specimens obtained were faulted
quartzite and iron-stained micaceous slate. Ascending Twist
Creek a series of green sandstones with quartz veins, slates,
quartzites, and chloritic slates are seen on the bed of the stream.

Age of Metamorphic Rocks, Victoria. 127

These rocks are well exposed within 200 yards of the outcrops of
the schists, which there strike N.W. ^ N. Further down the
main valley, by a small cataract, there are some well-exposed
schists, again striking N.W. ^ N.

I could find in the field no evidence whatever of a passage
from the slates into the gneiss and schist series, and the strike of
the two sets of beds was different. I have, therefore, examined
a set of sections of the rocks in order to see if they show any
indication of the derivation of the schists from the ordovician
sediments.

III. — The Microscopic Structurk of the Rocks.

Beginning with the metamorphic series, a rock from the
summit of the ridge between Commissioner's Creek and Sawpit
Gully may be taken as a typical example. The rock [154]^
examined microscopically consists of alternate bands of quartz
and felspar, about 2 mm. and 3 mm. thick, respectively. At
more distant and irregular intervals are dark tliin lines. When
the rock is examined microscopically the quai'tz appears in bands
composed of mosaic. The felspathic material has been broken up
into a complex mosaic of fine-grained constituents. Most of the
felspar consist of allotriomorphic grains of plagioclase, which are
crowded with granules and small prismatic crystals ; both
granules and prisms are of the same general character, and both
are highly refractive. The small prismatic crystals are recognis-
able as zoisite, and the granules are probably of the same
material. No orthoclase is determinable. With the zoisite are
numerous small flakes of white mica. The dark bands lying
scattered through the rock are composed of lines of biotite ; at
intervals the lines are thickened by small .segregations of biotite,
with which occur some flakes of muscovite. Muscovite is
scattered abundantly through the felspathic material, and often
occurs along the bands of quartz. The rock has the characters of
a gneiss, in which tiie felspar has been broken up into a mosaic
of plagioclase, zoisite and white mica.

Near the junction between the normal metamorphic series and
the sediments, both are greatly crushed. On the bed of Twist

1 The numbers are those of the rock collection of the Melbourne University.

128 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Creek, near its junction with Sawpit Crully, are some huimiiocks-
of contorted gneiss. The rock [57; PI. XX., Fig. IJ examined
microscopically is shown to be highly contorted and traversed by
a series of small faults ; some bands in the rock are dark, owing
to the abundance of biotite, and they are separated by layers of
white quartz mosaic.

Another type of the metamorphic rocks is represented at the
head of Twist Creek by some bands of contorted mica schists.
The rock [61] consists of alternations of quartz mosaic and of
greenish-white layers, which are intensely contorted, folded and
faulted ; the whitish layers are composed of packed crystals of
white mica with some indeterminable argillaceous material. The
rock originally contained many large simple grains of quartz ;
but the metamorphic action has altered most of them into
secondary mosaic. This change, in some cases, has only affected,
the margin of the quartz grains.

The dykes in the metamorphic rocks are mostly coarse peg-
matites. A specimen [65] collected half way up the hill
above the stone quarry on the right bank of Commissioner's
Creek, is composed of large coarse grains of quartz, intergrown
with crystals of comparatively fresh orthociase. There are some
old felspar grains and abundant u)uscovite. The pegmatite
is traversing a fine schist of quartz and muscovite. A second
dyke [63] is of much coarser grain ; it consists of quartz, musco-
vite and orthociase, and contains abundant needles of tourmaline..

The rock of the ordovician series in closest contact with the
gneiss is a dark reddish-brown indurated slate [55] with len-
ticular bands of quartz. Most of the quartz occurs as a tine
mosaic, in which larger grains under polarized light show strain
effects. The bulk of the rock is a brown crumpled slate, iron
stained along lines which are roughly parallel. The constituents
of the base are small quartz grains in a cleaved argillaceous base,
containing minute crystals of authigenous mica. They appear
to have been developed owing to the re-arrangement of the
argillaceous material of the ordovician series. A less altered
member occurs at the junction between Sawpit Gully and Twist
Creek. It [62] is a crushed quartzose grit. Some of the
quartz grains have obviously been crushed in sifu, and there is
one thin band of quartz mosaic. There are numerous flakes of

Age of Metamorphic Rocks, Victoria. 129'

muscovite which are crumpled and are clearly allothigenous.
The slide includes one thick layer of iron stained argillaceous
material, in which the quartz grains are small and scarce. The
clastic origin of most of the. material is apparent.

In the spur at the western side of Twist Creek occurs a coarse
grit [56 ; PI. XX., Fig. 2] with large quartz grains, nearly all of
which are rounded. There are also some rounded grains of horn-
blende. The interspaces between the quartz grains are occupied
by a fine grained quartz mosaic, due to secondary crystallization.
Owing to the crushing of the rock, the quartz grains have crushed
and caused a certain flow in the softer material. The rock can,
therefore, be described as a mylonitic quartz grit. Another
variety of arenaceous sedimentary rock occurs a little up Twist
Creek, beyond the spur from which the last specimen was
obtained. This rock [54; PI. XXI., Fig. 4] is a fine-grained grit; it
is composed of quartz, plagioclase and muscovite. The grains are
irregularly arranged; the material is all allothigenous; and the
rock represents a slightly altered sandstone, of which the materials
were derived from some igneous rocks. A similar rock [58 ;
PI. XXI., Fig. 3] from the bed of Twist Creek, near the junction
of the orduvician with the metamorphic .series, shows the same
materials ; it is a coarser grit in which the fragments are often
irregularly oblong, and they are surrounded by tine material in
curved lines. The material is stained brown by iron oxide.
Between these grains are lines of quartz mosaic, and some of the
larger quartz grains are beginning to show alteration into mosaic;
but this structure is only developed on the edges or along lines
running through the grains.

In the bed of Twist Creek, near the junction with Nine Mile
Creek, is a rock [64] showing a further stage in the develop-
ment of the quartz mosaic. Examined under singly polarized
light the rock appears to consist of bands of white structureless
material, separated by layers composed of colourless rounded
grains, strongly set in a base of pale green slightly pleochroic
material. On further examination the green material is shown
to be mostly chlorite; the rounded grains in it are quartz and
plagioclase, and the white bands break up into quartz mosaic, no
doubt due to secondary change, as the large quartz grains are also
passing into mosaic.

130 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

IV. — Summary of Conclusions.

The evidence of the microscopic structure of the rocks and
their relations in the field both point to the following con-
clusions:— First, there is no evidence of a gradual passage from
the ordovician to the schists and gneisses. The two rocks have
a fairly sharp junction, and their strike is not parallel. Both
rocks have been greatly disturbed since ordovician times, so that
they have been crushed together, and a clear section showing an
unconformable junction between them cannot be expected.

The ordovician rocks appear to be decidedly younger than the
schists, for not only are they less altered, but they are clearly
■clastic rocks, and they appear to have derived most of their
materials from pre-existing igneous rocks; they might easily have
been formed as a series of shore deposits, derived from the
weathering of the adjacent schists.

That the ordovician rocks are a later series than the schists
is rendered further probable by their general distribution
in the district, as represented by the Geological Survey map.
The granitic rocks of Yackandandah have cut through both
series, while those at Beechworth are intrusive only into
the ordovician rocks. Had the metamorphic rocks been
produced by the alteration of the ordovicians we should
have expected the rocks close to the great plutonic in-
trusions to have been the most changed ; but on the
contrary the metamorphic rocks that extend from Indigo
Creek to Wodonga are separated from the granites of the
Pilot Range by a narrow band mapped as unaltered ordovician.
I have not verified the existence of this band, but the mapping
and the theory expressed in the legend of the map are clearly
inconsistent. A further objection to the view so long ofiicially
accepted is that the distribution of the metamorphic rocks of the
Beechworth district does not bear any relation to the granitic
instrusions as we might expect had the metamorphic rocks been
formed from the ordovicians.

We may therefore conclude that the schist series is a pre-ordo-
vician series, on which the ordovician and silurian rocks have been
laid down unconformably. The schist series may be of Cambrian
age in the absence of evidence to the contrary, but considering

Proc. R.8. Victoria, l0O2. Plain XIX.

i

X

»

Pror. R.S. ridoria, 1902. Plate XX.

Fig. 1.

Fuj. 1.

Pror. R.S. Virforia, lOO'L I'hifr XXT.

Fin. ■?..

Fig. 4.

Age of Metamorphic Rocks, Victoria. 131

their crystalline character it will be safer to regard them as even
older, and as Victorian representatives of the archean group.

DESCRIPTION OF FIGURES.
PLATES XIX., XX., XXI.

Plate XIX.
Locality Plan.

Showing the relation of the metamorphic rocks, ordovi-
cians and granites, from the Geological Survey
map.

Plate XX.

Fig. 1. — Contorted gneiss, from the bed of Twist Creek, near the
junction with Sawpit Gully [No. 57]. Magnified
15 diam. Ordinary light. Most of the figure shows
one of the dark bands which is much contorted,
and the contortions are broken by a series of
parallel microscopic faults.
,, 2. — Mylonitic quartz grit; western side of Twist Creek
[No. 56]. Magnified 20 diam. Ordinary light.
The rock is composed in the main of large quartz
grains, in a base of fine quartz mosaic. Owing to
pressure a flow has been produced in the rock,
causing a roughly parallel arrangement of the
quartz grains, and a flow of the base around them.

Plate XXI.

„ 3. — [No. 58] Quartz grit; the bed of Twist Creek, further
from the junction. Magnified 20 diam. Ordinary
light. The quartz grains are angular, and the flow
structure of Fig. 2 has not been developed.

„ 4. — [No. 54] A fine grained grit; the bed on Twist Creek,
still further from the metamorphic series. Mag-
nified 45 diam. Ordinary light. The rock consists of
grains of quartz and plagioclase, with flakes of
mica, in a fine argillaceous base.

Art. XIV. — On some Rocks from, the fairivay of Port
PJiillip Heads.

By R E. grant and E. O. THIELE.

[Eead 9th October, 1902.]

Blasting operations were recently carried on at Port Phillip
Heads under the supervision of the Engineer for Ports and
Harbours with the view of deepening the Channel, so as to
render the passage safer for ocean going vessels, and by this
operation large blocks of stone were obtained containing
numerous embedded fossils.

A block of this stone was obtained by the writers, and was
found to consist of coarse sandy limestone of a creamy colour,
composed mainly of a mixture of quartz grains and comminuted
shell remains. On the side of the fresh fracture it was less
compact and showed indistinct lines of stratification. This part
of the rock was full of shell remains, all, unfortunately, more or
less broken and corroded. By far the commonest form was a
Bankivia sp., but on close examination we were able to identify
the following : —

Bankivia sp. (aff. varians).

Mesodesma elongata.

Chione striatissima.

Mytilicardia aviculina,

Corbula sp.

Tellina sp.

Glycimeris sp.

Echini spines.
A sample of the rock treated with acid was found to consist of
a little over 50 per cent, of carbonate of lime, the insoluble
residue being grains of quartz — angular for the most part, with
occasional more or less rounded fragments intermixed.

The chart shows that a rocky platform or reef extends from
Point Nepean to Point Lonsdale at a depth along that line of

Rocks from Port Phillip Heads. 133

little more than forty feet at the most. This reef ends abruptly
on the inner side as is shown by the rapid change to deeper
water, but on the seaside it shelves away much more gradually.
The block of stone under consideration came from a position
about midway between the Heads and a little on the seaside
of a line joining these two points of land and from a depth of
thirty-two feet. The outflowing tide meets suddenly with this
submarine shelf, and tlie rough choppy sea, well-known as the
•' Rip," is the result. This disturbed state of the Channel is
rendered more marked when a strong south-westerly wind is
blowing. The tidal current as it rushes out and in through the
entrance flows at a rate of about eight miles an hour, so that the
scour is considerable. Enormous quantities of sand, loosened from
the neighbouring beaches and sand banks inside the entrance, are
at times carried backwards and forwards through the Channel,
but it is hardly likely thab the rock under consideration has
resulted from the deposition of such sand under present
conditions, especially where the current runs fastest.

It seems probable that the limestone represents a shallow
water marine formation which may pass under the Dune lime-
stone on either side.

If such be the case, taking into consideration the recent record
of an extinct marsupial from the Dune rock\ this deposit may
represent in age the Bankivia beds on the Glenelg, recorded by
Mr. Dennant as Pleistocene.-^

We have to thank Captain Stalker of the Pilot Service, Mr.
McLean, the Chief Engineer of Ports and Harbours, and Mr.
T. H. Smith, Marine Surveyor, for opportunities afforded of
makincr these observations.

1 Proc. Roy. Soc. Vic, vol. xiv., p. ii., N.S., p. 139.

2 Trans, and Proc. Roy. Soc. Vic, vol. xxiii., p. 225. 1887.

Akt. XV. — Coorongite, a South Australian Elaterite.

By ALEX. C. GUMMING.

(Communicated by Professor Orme Masson, D.Sc).

[Eead 9th October, 1902.]

The name Coorongite was given many years ago to a peculiar
substance found as a thin superficial deposit on the soil in the
Coorong district of South Australia. A small sample was
recently sent to the Chemical Laboratory of the University of
Melbourne, and has been examined by me, under Professor
Masson's direction, with results to be described in the sequel.

Previous Accounts. — Coorongite is briefly described by Krause-
(Mineralogy, p. 138), and by G. C. Morris (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.
Philadelphia, 131, 1877), and references have been found else-
where ; but by far the best and fullest account of it that I have
been able to find is contained in a paper by J. R. Jackson,
published in the Pharmaceutical Journal of 1872 (pp. 763 and
785). From this paper it appears that Coorongite had, since its
discovery in 1865, excited a good deal of interest both in
Australia and in England, and that the question of its true
nature and probable origin had been the subject of considerable
discussion. Very different views were expressed, some regarding
the substance as a bituminous hydrocarbon mineral, others
believing it to be of vegetable origin. These discussions of thirty
years ago appear to have been forgotten, and within the last year
attention has been directed afresh to the same questions, still
unsettled, by newspaper accounts of quests for mineral oil in the
district where Coorongite occurs. Jackson's paper was not
known to me till after I had done the work to be described. My
results are, in the main, corroborative of those he records and
quotes from other observers, but additional information has been
gained as to the chemical nature of the material.

Description of Coorongite. — My specimens were in sheets varying
from one-tenth to one centimetre in thickness. The substance
varied in colour on the surface from greyish-black to black, but

A South. Australidv Elaterite. 135

was uniforniily black intpriially. It was soft, flexible, and
elastic, resemblino; caoutchouc ; one surface, probably the upper,
was hard, black, and sponge-like ; it contained a considerable
quantity of sand and some vegetable fibres ; it burnt readily with
a Avhite flame, melting before the flame, and giving, especially
when extinguished, a characteristic odour, quite distinct from
that from hydrocarbon minerals, and suggestive of burning
animal or vegetable fats. Jackson gives the following analysis
of Coorongite by Dr. A. J. Bernays : —

Moisture ... ... ... 0.4682

Carbon ... ... ... 64.73

Hydrogen ... ... ... 11.63

Ash ... ... ... 1.79

Pixed carbon .. ... 1.005

Oxygen and unest. ... ... 20.3768

100.0000
The substance is insoluble in water and alcohol, and only
partially soluble in carbon bisulphide, ether, chloroform, turpen-
tine, benzene and toluene, giving bright yellow solutions. This
confirms observations of G. Francis, quoted by Jackson. On
evaporation of the solvent a soluble body of low melting point is
obtained, the Coorongite being thus separated into this body, and
a friable insoluble residue.

Separation into tivo constituents by extraction with Carbon
Bisulphide. — 100 grms. were cut up into small pieces and
subjected to successive extractions with carbon bisulphide in a
Soxhlet's extractor. After the first extraction the residue, which
was quite friable, was rubbed to powder before adding fresh
solvent. The product of each extraction was separately examined
after evaporating ofl' the carbon bisulphide. The results are
shown in the following table : —

1st Extraction

2nd

3rd

4th

lie of Extraction.

Weifrht of E.\tract.

7 hours

20.80 grms.

12 „

2.78 „

16 „

.16 „

18 „

.05 „

53 hours.

23.79 grms.

4

136 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Thus the sample yielded nearly 24 per cent, of the soluble
constituent. As the residue was found to contain from 30 to 40
per cent, of sand and other mineral matter, the soluble consti-
tuent formed about one-third, and the insoluble constituent about
two-thirds of the organic material. The results of the later
extractions show that separation was complete.

The Soluble Constituent. — This is a clear, yellow, translucent,
wax-like solid. Softens enough to flow if kept at 35°, and is
<iuite fluid at 42^ Heated in an oil bath it decomposed above
225°, yielding a little black distillate and a tar-like solid residue.

It dissolves readily, and in all proportions, in benzene, ether,
toluene, chloroform, and carbon bisulphide, and is insoluble in
water, methyl alcohol and ethyl alcohol.

The composition was obtained by combustion with cupric oxide
in a current of oxygen. The results agree closely with the
figures calculated for the formula CjoH^gO.

T IT TTi -Kt Calculated

^- "• "^- ^«^"- for CioHisO

Carbon - - - 77.86 77.94 77.92 77.91 77.92
Hydrogen - - - 11.97 11.87 11.93 11.92 11.69

Oxygen (by difference) - 10.17 10.19 10.15 10.17 10.39

As the molecular weight could not be got by vapour density
measurement, recourse was had to the freezing point method,
using benzene as solvent. The benzene used was specially
purified and had the freezing point 5.33'^ cor. Ice and water
were used for freezing and five observations were made at each
temperature. The constant K for the benzene was determined
by e.xperiment with napthalene, which gave a value of 5390.

1.080 grms. of the substance dissolved in 30.0 grms. benzene
lowered the freezing point .080°.

Using the formula

M = K — i-
A L

whei-e M = molecular wt., K = a constant (5390 in this case)

A = the depression produced, and L = weight of solvent, these

figures indicate a molecular weight of 2425. The formula

(C,oH|j,0)x requires a molecular weight of 154, or some multiple

thereof ; and it would therefore appear that the value of x in

benzene solution is 16 (M - 2464), or, in other words the

A SoutJt Australian Elaterite. 137

soluble constituent of Coorongite is (CjoHigO)!,; in benzene
solution.

It is well known, however, that organic oxygen dei'ivatives of
the alcohol and acid kind are given to association in benzene
solution, though they have simple molecules in other solvents,
and that the molecular weight of a substance in benzene solution
is often twice as great as the normal.

Observations were therefore made on the boiling point of an
ether solution of the substance, using ether purified by distilla-
tion from sodium immediately before use.

The whole of the ether (about a litre) distilled at 34.2°, but
the first and last portions were rejected.

The boiling point was raised .100° by the addition of 1.370
grms. of the material to 24.1 grms. of the ether, which by the
formula

M = K ^^
A L

where K for ether = 2100, S and A have values given above and

L = 23.9 (allowing for vapour, etc.), gives the approximate

value 1204 for the molecular weight, which is within the error

of experiment, half the value obtained in benzene solution. In

these experiments, Beckmann's freezing point and boiling point

apparatus were used with thermometers divided into hundredths

of one degree C and capable of being read by eye to .002°.

The results oljtained indicate that the soluble constituent of
Ooorongite is (CioHjsO)^; and that x = ^ in etheral solution and
16 in benzene solution ; .v may, of course, have other values
under other conditions.

Only an incomplete examination of the chemical properties of
this substance has been made as yet. It is unacted on by acids
except strong H.JSO4, which chars it.

It comliines with bromine, forming a black, viscous, sticky,
semisolid, readily soluble in carbon bisulphide and ether, but
which has not yet been investigated.

It oxidises readily, as will be shown later. Attempts to
saponify it led to negative results, though it is stated by Jackson
to be saponitiable.

The Insoluble Constituent. — This was rubbed to a coarse
powder during the extraction and resembled brown cork filings

138 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

mixed with much sand. Practically all the elasticity is lost
during the carbon bisulphide extraction ; it is combustible, burn-
ing with a white luminous flame and melting before the flame ;
when burning it gives the same odour, like that of a burning fat,,
which Coorongite itself gives. Analysis by combustion gave the
followins: results for the organic matter : —

I.

II.

Mean.

Calculated for
C10H20O3

Carbon

64.16

64.28

64.22

3.836

Hydrogen - - -

10.54

10.50

10.52

10.64

Oxygen (by difference) -

25.30

25.22

25.26

25.53

100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00

The amount of ash (principally sand) varied from 30 to 40 per
cent. The figures for the organic part agree remarkably well
with those calculated for CioH.iqOj, seeing that the material has.
undergone no purification other than the treatment with carbon
bisulphide. Its dark colour suggests that it contains traces of
some more highly carbonaceous material, which would account
for the slight discrepancy.

This constituent, unlike the soluble one, was found to be
saponiflable by hot alcoholic caustic potash, a soluble soap being
obtained which yielded an insoluble fatty body, on treatment
with acid. This action has not yet been further examined.

Intermediate Oxidation Products. — The similarity of the
formulae CmHigO and CioHo„0., suggest that the insoluble ingre-
dient is derived from the .soluble one by a natural change involv-
ing hydration and oxidation combined.

Ob.servations made in the course of the examination tended to
confirm this and to show that changes of this nature are readily
brought about. In the following table are given the results of
the combustions of three products obtained from portions of the
soluble extract. No. I. was got by blowing air through the
carbon bisulphide solution ; No. II. was formed during an
attempt to extract .some of the substance with methyl alcohol ;
No. III. was obtained when trying to distil it in steam. They
were separated as completely as possible from unaltered suljstanee
by centrifuging the mixture at a temperature high enough to keep
the latter in a molten condition. These three substances had
the appearance of the clear first constituent of the Coorongite,

A Soiitli AustralUoi Elaterite. 139

but containiiis; an opaque, yellowish, frranular precipitate. They
•could not be .separated by solubility in carbon bisulphide or
ether, but a partial separation was effected by ceutrifuging.

For comparison, the mean results of the combustions of the
soluble and insoluble constituents and the calculated values are
again given. It is evident from the table that products I., II.
and III. are incompletely oxidized mixtures.

c.

H.

C) (by diff ).

Calculated for CioHigO

■ 77.92

11.69

10.39

Soluble constituent -

77.91

11.92

10.17

Product No. II.

71.87

11.11

17.02

Product No. I.

70.35

11.42

18.23

Product No. III.

- 66.46

10.71

22.83

Insoluble constituent

64.22

10.52

25.26

Calculated for CjnHooO,

63.83

10.64

25.53

The Ash. — The ash comprised about 25 per cent, of the sample
on which this work was done, but in a latter specimen, since
obtained from R. H. Walcott, Esq., F.G.S., of the National
Museum, only 5.4 per cent, of ash was found. The analysis
failed to show the presence of any phosphates, which would be
expected if the Coorongite were of animal origin. The ash had
the following composition : —

Silica ... ... ... ... 95.12

Aluminium and iron oxides ... ... 3.66

Calcuim oxide ... .., ... 1.17

Sodium chloride ... ... ... Trace

99.95
Mr. D. J. Mahony kindly examined the mineral part of
Coorongite, and found a number of species of typical fresh-
water diatoms. Only a small part consisted of diatoms, the
ash being mostly sand, and it is doubtful whether the occurrence
of these diatoms is more than accidental.

Conclusions. — Coorongite has been shown to consist of two
substances, one with the formula (CioHigO)^, and the other
(CioH.juO;^),^. The physical properties of the substance have
earned it the name of Mineral Caoutchouc, and these formulae
favour the idea that it is really related to caoutchouc, which has
the formula (CjoHi^ja; Caoutchouc oxidizes readily, even taking

140 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

up oxygen from the air, and some of the substances connected!
with it, and with gutta percha have compositions and properties
very similar to those of the two constituents of Coorongite.
The formulae for these constituents ai"e readily derivable from
CioHjg by oxidation and hydration. However, for the present
the nature of Coorongite must still be considered an open
question, as much remains to be done in the furtlier chemical
investigation of its constituents.

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF COORONGITE.

1862. Phipson, T. L. Geologist, vol. v., p. 141.

1866-7. Ulrich, G. H. F. Official Record of Intercolonial

Exhibition, pp. 91 and 168.
1872. Jackson, J. R. The Pharmaceutical Journal and

Transactions, pp. 763 and 785.
1877. Morris, G. C. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sciences, Philadelphia,

p. 131.
1892. Dana, J. D. System of Mineralogy, p. 1019.
1889. Roscoe and Schorlemmer. Treatise on Chemistry, voL

iii., pt. 5, p. 498.
1896. Krause, F. M. Introduction to the Study of Miner-
alogy for Australian Readers, p. 138.
1896. Chester, A. H. Dictionary of Names of Minerals,

p. 64.
1902. Petroleum Prospecting in South Australia. " The

Argus," Melbourne, June 23rd, p. 8.

Akt. XVI. — A New Aininonlte from the Cretaceous
Rocks of Queensland.

By Professor J. W. GREGORY and F. VOSS SMITH.

[Eead 9th October, 1902.]

(With Phxte XXII.).

The Animonite described in this paper was found by one of us
in the Bourke Museum at Beechworth, where it was labelled
simply from the " Mitchell River." It was as.sociated with
specimens from Gippsland, and under the impression that the
Victorian JSIitchell River was intended, the specimen was
borrowed by kind permission of the Trustees of the Beechworth
Museum.

The sutures were carefully developed by Mr. H. J. Grayson,
and its approximate geological position was thus determinable.
Its affinities were clearly cretaceous, but no rocks of cretaceous
age were known from Victoria.

It was subsequently suggested by Mr. T. S. Hall that the speci-
men probably came from the Mitchell River of Queensland. It
agrees fairly well in its matrix with specimens which we have
seen from that area ; and there can be little doubt that its
locality has been correctly, though indefinitely, recorded. The
specimen is of interest owing to the exceptional perfection with
which the complicated sutures are shown. As some time had
already been spent upon the specimen and we devoted further
study to it after our return from Lake Eyre, when our attention
had been directed to the Cretaceous fauna of that area, we now
describe it.

We are much indebted to the Trustees of the Bourke Museum
for their long loan of the specimen, and to Mr. Grayson for the
skill with which he cleaned the suture lines.

142 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

DESCRIPTION OF THE SPECIMEN.
Desinoceras, Zittel.
Desmoceras jonesi, n. sp.

Diagfwsis. — A large and discoid Desmoceras, with flat sides;
young whorls marked by broad, rounded, well developed ribs.
Back narrow, bluntly rounded. Umbilicus broad, the steps over
the successive whorls are steep ; about f th of each whorl is
exposed below the next outer whorl. Mouth long, with the
sides in part subparallel.

Sutures : on the outer whorl there are four paired lateral
saddles. The siphonal saddle is short and broad, it has
one projection on each side ; and it appears bicornate owing
to a lateral projection at the upper corners The first lateral
saddle is very large and complex. It consists of four main
divisions, of which the two middle ones are the largest and most
complex ; they both arise as branches from a narrow stem. The
base of this saddle is large, it gives off" the first branch on the
dorsal side. This branch is simple but deeply notched. The
second branch is on the ventral side, and is divided nearly to the
base by a notch which divides it into a simple and a compound
sub-branch. The last division begins with a narrow stem, and
this dichotomizes to irregular and very sinuous sub-branches.
The second lateral saddle is nmch smaller ; it has two main
simple branches on the ventral side and a compound division on
the dorsal side. The third lateral saddle is slightly smaller than
the second ; it is divided into two divisions. The fourth lateral
saddle is small and consists of three simple divisions.^

The notches on the lobes are comparatively broad and have
blunt rounded ends.

Dimensions.

Largest diameter of specimen - 25 cm.

Proportion (wliole diam. =1.)

Outer vvliorl : whole diam. - = .48

Width of uml>ilicus : whole diam. = .28

1 The saddles within the line of involution are not shown in the specimen.

A New Ammonite from Queensland. 143

Affinities. — Tliis specimen is most nearly related to the Am-
monite from the cretaceous of Southern India, described as
A. beudanti,^ and to the A. flindersi, McCoy,- from Queensland.

It differs from both those Ammonites as in it

1. The form is more laterally compressed.

2. The mouth is higher and narrower.

3. The notches in the lobes are not so sharp and are less

numerous.

The full descriptions by Mr. Etheridge, jar.,'' of Haploceras dain-
treei, Eth.^, suggest that it may be even nearer to the new species.
The new species, however, has a greater complexity of sutures,
and the saddles are wider proportionally to the lobes, than is the
case in H. daintreei. H. daintreei moreover is thicker and
broader, with a shorter apertui'e and deeper umbilicus.'^ Our
Desmoceras is allied to the above two species, but its generic
position is with Desmoceras rather than Haploceras with which
the two well known Queensland forms have been placed.

Von Zittel's description of his genus Haploceras, states" it
differs from Desmoceras by the first lateral saddle projecting
extensively beyond the line of the rest of the .saddles. In this
character our species is a typical Desmoceras. Probably some of
its nearest Queensland allies, as the species flindersi and dain-
treei, belong to the same genus.

We pi'opose to name the new species jonesi, after Mr. J. W.
Jones, the Conservator of Water in South Australia, whose work
has thrown so much light on the water distribution in the
Cretaceous rocks of Central Australia.

1 Stoliczka, F.: Cretaceous Cepbalojiofis of S. India, I'al. Indica, vol. i., p. 143, pi. Ixii.,
fi^'S- 1— t, and pi. Ixii.

^ McCoy, F.: Trans. Roy. .Soc. Vic. 1S66, vii., p. 51. Ibid., 1868, viii., pt. i., p. 42. See
also Etheridg-e, R., junr. : Additional Notes on the Palaeontolojfy of Queensland. Bull : No.
13, Geol. Surv. Queensland, pt. ii., 1901, p. 31.

3 R. Etherid;^'e, Jnr. Oy. cit, pp. 30-31.

■i R. Etheridire, .Senr. : Description of the Palaeozoic and .Mesozoic Fossils of Queens-
land. Quart. .Jourii. Geol. Soc, xxviii., 1872, p. 346, pi. xxiv.

^ c./. Fig. R. Etheridsre, Jnr. Loc. cit., pi. ii., fig. 6.

c «.(/. Grundzuge der Palaeontologie, 189.5, yi. 426.

Ilu ( L I B R A R Y

TT^T^v^?^^

144 Proceedings of tJce Royal Society of Victoria.

DESCRIPTIONS OF PLATE No. XXII.

Fig. 1. The specimen from the side, from a photograph by Mr.

H. J. Grayson. Reduced aViout ^ diam.
Fisr. 2. One of the sutures. Nat. size.

T'yr. 11.^. Vidwia, 1902. Phii<: XXII.

Fig.

Art. XVI, L — Description of two new Australian Lizards,,
Varanus spencer i and Diplodactylus hilineatus.

By A. H. S. LUCAS, M.A., B.Sc, and C. FROST, F.L.S.

[Read 9th October, 1902.]

Varanus spenceri, sp. n.

Description. — Snout very short, depressed at the end, measur-
ing about one-tiftli less than the distance from the anterior
border of the orbit to the ear ; can thus rostralis not very distinct.
Nostril oval, distant from the end of the snout about one-third
less than its distance from the orbit. Limbs stout ; digits
strong, moderately elongate. Tail swollen and depressed at the
base, compressed with a doubly toothed keel posteriorly, a little
longer than the head and body. Upper head scales larger than
those on the temples, subequal ; supraocular scales very small,,
granular, subequal. Scales of upper surfaces small, varying in
size and .shape, round or oval, convex, .sometimes tubercular.
Abdominal scales smooth, flat, in from 115 to 120 transverse
series. Upper and lateral caudal scales tubercular at the base,
bluntly keeled posteriorly.

Colour. — Pale yellowish-brown above, with numerous broad,
dark brown bands on the back and sides, usually rising alter-
nately to right and left from the vertebral line ; head with or
without dark brown blotches and streaks. Tail with dark brown
annuli, under surfaces uniform pale yellowish-brown.

Dimensions of Type.
Total lengtli - - - .
From tip of snout to gular fold
From gular fold to vent -
Max. width of head
Fore limb ... -
Hind limb . - - -
Tail

76.5

cm.

13

25

3.5

10

13

38.5

146 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Habitat. — Table lands 50 miles to N.E. of Tennant's Creek,
Central Australia.

We have named this fine species after Professor Baldwin
Spencer, F.R.S., who obtained fine specimens on the Spencer-
Gillen expedition, and who, during his travels in Central Aus-
tralia, has added so much to our knowledge of the fauna of those
little known regions.

Type, in the National Museum, Melbourne.

The specimen chosen for the type is the largest perfect
individual, although apparently not fully grown. Two other
imperfect specimens in the series under examination attain a
total length respectively of 81 cm. (tail reproduced) and a skin
110 cm. Tail, 52 cm.

This species belongs very clearly to group III. B2 of Boulenger
in the British Museum Catalogue, viz., V. varius, V. giganteus, V.
gouldii. The members of the group are not differentiated by
very strongly marked characters. Tiie chief points of distinction
are the shape of the nostril and its position, and the number of
transverse rows of abdominal scales. The colour markings are
very variable, as is the number of well marked rows of abdominal
scales.

The present species difFei's from all these in the comparative
shortness of the tail, in which character it agrees with V. brevi-
cauda, Boulenger.

Diplodactylus bilineatus, sp. n.

Description. — Head rather short, high, convex. Snout pointed,
scarcely longer than the distance between the eye and the ear
opening, latter small, vertically oval. Body moderate ; limbs
rather short. Digits rather long, moderately depressed with
rounded tubercles below ; apical dilations with two suboval
plates inferiorly. Upper surfaces covered with small granular
scales, largest on the middle of the back. Rostral large, not
twice as broad as high, with trace of median cleft above ; nostril
pierced between the I'ostral, first labial, and five or six nasals,
the supero-anterior large, and in contact with each other.
Seventeen upper labials, first very high ; fifteen lower labials,
anterior large. Mental large, subtriangular, rounded behind.

Tivo Neiv Australian Lizards. 147^

Abdominal scales granular, sniallei" than the dorsal. Tail
swollen, contracted at the base, tapering very rapidly, with rings
of suboval scales, convex above, and flat, imbricate beneath.
Male with a group of Ave or .six blunt spines on each side of the
base of the tail.

Colour. —Pinkish-brown above, a broad black-edged light band
along tlie_ middle of the back and tail, bifurcating on the nape
and extending to behind the orbit, enclosing a dark subtriangular
patch on the occiput ; a few small dark dots occur in the light
median area. The black edges bordering the lighter vertebral
band are produced in two conspicious but discontinuous black
lines extending to the very tip of the tail.

Dim PENSIONS.

Total length . . . .
Head ------

Width of head - - - -

Body ------

Fore limb - - - - -

Hind limb -----

Tail ------

Habitat. — Caernarvon, Western Australia.

Type, in the National Museum.

This is a form allied to D. steindachneri, Boulenger, but difters
in the oval ear opening, the gi-eater number of labials, the
absence of a fringe of conical scales to the upper eyelids, in the
abdominal scales considerably smaller than the dorsal, and
greatly in the relative measurements of head and body. In
D. steindachneri the body is 2.3 times as long as the head, in
D. bilineatus it is 4.8 times as long. In colour our species is
conspicuous by the two dark longitudiual bands reaching to the
tip of the tail, whilst there are no dorsal ocelli which are so
marked in D. steindachneri as figured in the British Museum
Catalogue.

88 mm

10

9

48

15

18

30

Art. XVIII. — The Heathcotian — a Pre-Ordovician Series
— and its Distribution in Victoria.

By J. W. GREGORY, D.Sc, F.R.S.

[Read 13tli November, 1902].
[With Plates XXIII.-XXVI.].

PAGK.

I. Introduction ------- 148.

II. Previous Literature ------ 149.

III. The Geological Sequence at Heathcote —

(A) Silurian - - - - - - - 152.

(B) Ordovician - - - - - - - 153.

(C) The Fossils of the Dinesus ida beds ; Nota-

saphus, a New Genus of Trilobites - - 154.

(D) The Heathcotian Series - - - - 156.
IV. Petrography - - - - - - - - 157.

V. Age of the Heathcotian Series —

(A) Relations with the Silurians - - - 160.

(B) Relations with the Ordovicians - - - 161.

(C) Geological Sequence at Heathcote - - 163.
VI. The Distribution of the Heathcotian Series in Victoria 164.

VII. Relations of the Ordovician and Silurian Systems - 167.

VIII. Subdivision of the Silurian System - - - 170.

IX. Summary of Conclusions . . - . . 173.

I. — Introduction.

One of the most interesting and instructive rock series in
Victoria occurs along the floor of the Heathcote Valley, and
forms the crest of the Colbinabbin Range. Conflicting opinions
have been expressed as to the age and character of these rocks.
Several visits to diff'erent parts of the outcrop of the rocks
suggested to me a solution, which promised, to some extent, to
reconcile the views as to their interpretation. I have recently
been able to test this idea during a four days' visit to Heathcote
Avith my assistants, Messrs. H. J. Grayson and D. J. Mahony,

The Heatlicot'ian. 149

and the students of the Geological Department of the Melbourne
University. Our joint examination of the country showed that
the explanation was well founded.

Heathcote is a straggling township extended for about three
miles along the Bendigo Road, in the broad valley of Mclvor
Creek. It is situated seventy-four miles northward from
Melbourne. Along the floor of the Heathcote Valley, and
upon its south-western slope are numerous exposures of a
series of igneous rocks, which can be divided into an acid and a
basic series. In close contact with these igneous rocks are some
narrow belts of rocks which are clearly metamorphic sediments.
These metamorphic and igneous rocks extend from the head of
Mclvor Creek, along a bold curve to the north-west ; bending to
the north, they are continued on the floor of the valley to the
west of Mount Ida, whence they gradually rise and form the long
Colbinabbin Range. The rocks of these metamorphic and diabase
series extend along this line, with occasional slight interruption,
for about thirty miles. On the north-eastern side of this line
the rocks are quartzites of silurian age. On the outer side of
the curve to the west and south-west the rocks are slates,
quartzites, and sandstones of ordovician age.

II. — Previous Litehaturk.

The literature begins in 18G6 with Selwyn's Geological Sketch
of the Colony of Victoria,^ in which th,e rocks of this line are
marked simply as trap, and they are described (p. 172) as dykes.
More precise information was given by Selwyn in 1868 in his
" Descriptive Catalogue of the Rock Specimens and Minerals in
the National Museum, Melbourne" (p. IG), in which the rocks
from Mount Camel, the highest peak in the Colbinabbin Range,
were determined as diabase ; but in the same work, in the list of
errata, the name was changed to diorite, owing to the indenti-
tication of the ferromagnesian constituent as an amphibole
instead of a pyroxene. A material described as a mineral under
the name of selwynite," which occurs in these rocks four miles
north of Heathcote was described as in "a vein in the upper

1 A. R. C. Selwjn: Official Record Iiitercol. Exhib., Austral., 1866-1867, pp. 147-227.

2 Ibid., p. 18.

150 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Silurian rocks " ; so that we must interpret Selwyn's view as
being that the diabase series was intrusive in post-silurian
times.

The next contribution to the Lower Palaeozoic geology of
Heathcote was a short but important note by Mr. E. J. Dunn,
published in 1889 ; he described the rock series as beginning
with some "schistose beds," (p. 77), followed by lower silurian
[ordovician] and upper silurian. That Dunn regarded the
schistose beds as older than the ordovician is stated by Sir F.
McCoy, when describing some markings from Heathcote which
he determined as worm tracks. Dunn's " Notes " moreover state
that the basic rocks, which he calls " greenstone " are intrusive.^

In 1894 Mr. Lidgey published a fuller account of the Heath-
cote rocks, in which he stated Mr. Dunn's views as to the
pre-silurian [i.e., ordovician] age of the metamorphic rocks. He
added the opinion that the basic rocks were lavas and amygda-
loid s.

During the survey of this area by the Victorian Geological
Survey, Mr. W. H. Ferguson discovered a series of fossils, which
were described by Mr. R. Etheridge, jun., as of cambrian age. In
1896 Mr A. W. Howitt published the results of a most careful
microscopic study ot" the rock specimens collected near Heathcote
by the officers of the Greological Survey ; he recognised the
intrusive character of many of the rocks. According to his
instructions, Mr. Lidgey re-examined the ground, and some of
the sections were visited by Mr. Howitt. The result was the
conclusion that the rocks of the diabase series were intruded in
devonian times, and that they were injected along the line of
junction of the ordovician and silurian series.

1 McCoy's note suggested that Dunn had done more work on the Heathcote rocks
than is given in his report of 1S89. On enquiry in tlie Mines Department, I have seen a
letter from Mr. Dunn (Cth July, 1891) in which he clearly expresses the view that the
Heathcote rocks include a pre-silurian system. He says— "'The formation is of pre-
silurian age, and the beds ot which it consists comprise highly siliceous and jaspideous
rocks, very talcose splintery schists, tufaceous deposits, quartzite, and ancient vesicular
basalts, once surface flows but now intercalated with other strata. The railway cuttings
near Heathcote expose a tongue of these rocks ; they extend and widen out in a northerly
direction towards Mounts Camel and Pleasant ; how far the.\- continue has yet to be deter-
mined, as I only discovered the formation on Saturday last, and traced it towards Mount
Camel." Mr. Dunn then makes the interesting suggestion that these rocks have marked
resemblences to the rocks of the Te Anari series in New Zealand.— J. W.G., 13-xi.-02.

The Heathcotian. 151

Mr. O. A. L. Wliitelaw, in the geological sketch map of the
parish of Heathcote (1896), used the nomenclature based upon
Mr. Howitt's view. Mr. W. H. Ferguson in 1900 described the
relations of the beds yielding the fossils, described by Mr.
Etheridge as cambrian. Mr. Hall has referred to the possibility
of the occurrence of graptolites in these beds, in which he has
"detected theca of the type of Bryograptusy Ranft asserted
the presence of ordovician graptolites at Costerfield.

The following bibliography enumerates the literature of the
geology of Heathcote, excluding papers dealing only with the
glacial deposits and mineralogy : —

1. Dunn, E. J. — Notes on the Geological Features of Heath-

cote and Neighbouring Parishes. Quart. Rep. Min.
Dep., Dec. 31, 1888 (1889), pp. 76-77.

2. Etheridge, R., jun. — Evidence of the Existence of a

Cambrian Fauna in Victoria. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict.,
new ser., vol. viii., 1896, pp. 52-64, pi. 1.

3. Also Mon. Prog. Rep. Geol. Surv. Vict. No. 11, 1900,

p. 26.

4. Ferguson, W. H. — Report on an Area of Cambrian

Rocks at Heathcote. Ibid., No. 2, 1899, pp. 23-25,
Ipl.

5. Hall, T. S. — Supposed Graptolites from Heathcote. Ibid..,

No. 11, 1900, p. 26.

6. Howitt, A. W. — Notes on Diabase and Adjacent Forma-

tions of the Heathcote District. Spec. Rep. Dep.
Mines Vict., 1896, 16 pp., 5 pi. [with appendix by
E. Lidgey, p. 15].

7. Jenkins, H. C. — Report on the Heathcote, Costerfield,

Graytown, Rushwortli, Whroo, and Redcastle Dis-
tricts. Spec. Rep. Dep. Mines Vict., 1900, 7 pp.

8. Lidgey, E. — Notes on Quarter Sheet No. 80, N.W. —

Parishes of Dargile, Heathcote, Costerfield and
Knowsley. Prog. Rep. Geol. Surv. Vict., No. viii.,,
1894, pp. 44-46, 4 pi. Also vide Howitt.

9. McCoy, F. — Report on Palaeontology of the Geological

Survey for the Year 1891. Ann. Rep. Sec. Mines
for 1891 (1892), p. 30.

152 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

10. Ranft, J. A. H. T. — Origin and Formation of Auriferous

Rocks and Gold. Sydney, 1889.

11. Selwyn, A. R. C — Notes on the Pliysical Geography,

Geology, and Mineralogy of Victoria. Intercol.
Exhib. Essays, 1866-67. Off. Rec, pp. 147-227.

12. Selwyn, A. R. C. — A Descriptive Catalogue of the Rock

Specimens and Minerals in the National Museum.
96 pp. Melbourne, 1868.

13. Walker, B. D.— Report on Neglected Gold Fields, Part

II., Spec. Rep. Dep. Mines Vict., 1894, 12 pp.

14. Whitelaw, O. A. L. — Geological Sketch Map of the

Parish of Heathcote. Mines Dep., Sept., 1896.

III. — The Geological Sequence at Heathcote.

The palaeozoic rocks at Heathcote may be divided between
four systems. The famous glacial deposits of Derrinal occur to
the west ; though often recorded as mesozoic, they are probably
of upper carboniferous age. Their only concern with this paper
is that they are rich in fragments of the metamorphic and
diabase rocks. The remaining palaeozoic rocks belong to the
Silurian and ordovician systems, and to a group of igneous
and metamorphic rocks.

III. (A). — Silurian.

The Silurian rocks lie to the north-east of Heathcote, and
occur as a thick series of breccias, conglomerates, quartzites and
quartzose grits. Certain bands are extremely rich in fossil casts,
including encrinite stems, brachiopods, gastropods, and occa-
sional trilobites. I have not given attention to the palaeon-
tology of these beds ; but they contain a Homolonotus of the
type found in the lower part of the Victorian silurian system.
Further east the sandy type is less persistent and some shales
occur. The prevalent strike of the silurian rocks is from north
to south, but around Mount Ida the strike is from east to west ;
this cliange is no doubt due to a fault, which is now hidden by
the valley to the south of the mountain. In the breccias the
pebbles are mainly quartzites, derived in the main from the
silurian and ordovician rocks. Mr. Lidgey has recorded the

The Heathcotian. 153

occurrence of pebbles of the metamorphic rocks in the breccias
on the summit of Mount Ida. (No. 8').

The Silurian rocks can be seen in close contact with the
diabases on the eastern side of the Murray-road, opposite the
so-called copper mine. There is no sign of any contact altera-
tion of the Silurian rocks there. The silurian sandstones are
often I'eddish-brown, owing to the abundance of material, which
the microscope shows to be mainly decomposed diabase.

The junction of the silurian rocks with the diabase series is
rarely shown, as they are generally separated by the alluvium
along the Mclvor Creek ; but in some workings by the old
scheelite mine at South Heathcote the silurian rocks were
exposed close to the diabases ; there is no apparent sign of
contact alteration in the silurians ; the development of the
scheelite was probably a secondary change due to the action of
solutions.

III. {B). — The Ordovician.

The ordovician rocks to the south and west of Heathcote are
in the main sandstones, quartzites, shales, micaceous mudstones
and shales. The strike is generally from north to south ; but
near Heathcote it changes to from N. 30 W. to S. 30 E. The
beds, as a rule, are not much contorted, and the bedding is fairly
regular. Some of the beds which had been mapped as ordovician
slates, Mr. Howitt has determined as phyllitic schists. Most of
the oi'dovician rocks still clearly show their clastic origin, and they
have not been converted into schists. The rocks are themselves
unfossiliferous, except for a band which lies along the eastern
border of the ordovician series, in the parish of Knowsley East.
The fossiliferous band occurs across the paddocks from 3q, 3p,
3m, 3], 3n, 31, and 3i. It has been carefully described by Mr.
Lidgey and Mr. Ferguson, and the latter has twice collected
from it a series of fossils. The first determined fossil from this
band was described by Mr. R. Etheridge, jun., as a new genus
of trilobite, of cambrian age. He named it Dinesus ida.

1 The reference numbers are to the bibliography on p. 151.

] 54 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victorkt.

III. (C). — The fossils of the Dinesus ida Beds, and Notasaphus,.
a new genus of Trilobites.

The need for more precise determination of the age of the'
Dinesus ida beds renders necessary reconsideration of the fossils-
found in them. Some supposed graptolites are too indefinite tO'
be of use. The trilobites give the most important evidence.
They were discovered by Mr. Ferguson, and some specimens
were collected by Mr. Lid gey. The specimens consist of some
cranidia and pygidia scattered together in an iron-stained shale.
Mr. R. Etheridge, jun., who described the specimens, naturally
concluded that they belonged to the same species. Mr. Ethe-
ridge gave a detailed description of the material then available ;.
he referred it to a new genus and species, Dinesus ida. He did
not refer the genus to a family, though he carefully contrasted it
with several lower cambrian genera.

In order to obtain more material to settle the generic affinities
of Dinesus, Mr. Ferguson made an excavation in the shales
during last June, and obtained additional specimens of the trilo-
bites. The new specimens are also fragmentary, but their
evidence shows that at least two distinct trilobites have been
included in Dinesus ida. They show that the pygidia and'
cranidia figured as Dinesus do not belong to the same genus.
The pygidia figured by Mr. Etheridge agree better with some
cranidia recently obtained by Mr. Ferguson. One specimen of
Dinesus shows two of the thoracic segments.

Mr. Ferguson's recent collection enables me to suggest the
following arrangement of the trilobite remains from this horizon.

1. Family Asaphidae.
Genus Dinesus, R. Etheridge, fil., 1896.

Diagnosis. — An asaphid with a nearly smooth glabellum, whicb
has the sides sub-pai-allel or slightly contracted in front ; the
axial grooves are deep. The third side-lobes are cut off from the^
rest of the glabellum by the junction of the third side furrows
and the neck furrow. Eye lobes small, and slightly projecting.
Facial suture cutting the frontal border in front of the axiali

Tlte Heatlicotian. 155

•groove. The fixed cheeks are triangular, long, regularly tapering
to the front ; they are gently convex. Neck furrow deep and
straight. Thoracic segments large ; the number is probably
small. The pleura are wide, but short.

Type species, Dinesiis ida. R. Eth. ill. : Cambrian Fauna in
Victoria. Proc. R. Soc. Vict., Vol. VIII. (new ser.), 1896.,
pp. 56-57, pi. 1, fig. 1, 2, 3 and -1, not fig. 5 and 6.

This genus differs from Asaphns by its large, pai'allel-sided
glabellum, small eyes, triangular fixed clieek, and much deeper
thoracic segments.

Genus Notasaphus, n. g.^

Diagnosis. — An Asaphid, with glabellum expanded widely in
front; it is crossed by deep, well marked neck furrow, with a
slight projection on the middle line. Lateral furrows barely
recognisable. Fixed cheeks broad behind, and with a well-
rounded expansion in front of the deep, well marked eye lobes.
Free cheeks large.

Pygidia large, with three or four large annulations on the
•axis. In the front pygidial segments the pleura are wide ; but
the hindermost pleura are narrow, and the whole bordered by a
•wide doublure with the edge broken into four, five or six pairs of
long, projecting spines. Number of thoracic segments unknown.

Distribution. — Lower ordovician. Victoria.

Type species, Notasaphus fergusoni, n. sp. (PI. XXVI.)

Affinities. — The collection may include two species of this
genus as the number of spines and width of the doublure on the
pygidia vary. The cranidia found all appear to belong to the
same species, and one of them was attached to a pygidiuin with
five pairs of spines. This genus appears to be an asaphid, as
the cephalic shield and pygidium are large and sub-equal, and it
no doubt had but a small number of thoracic segments. Only
some isolated fragments of the thoracic segments remain.

The genus differs from the other genera of Asaphidae by its
spiny pygidium ; but as a doublure is found in some asaphids

1 From Greek, VOTIOS- southern.

156 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

the development of spines is not remarkable. The genus
resembles Asaphiscus, Meek, 1873, which has, however, a conical
glabellum. The spiny border of the pygidium resembles that of
Ceraurus (syn. Chicrurus), but Notasaphus appears to be a true
Opisthoparian (using Beecher's classification), as the specimens
suggest that the genal spines were born on the free cheeks.

Dinesus and Notasaphus both have the characters of ordo-
vician rather than of Cambrian trilobites. They might be
upper Cambrian ; but their evidence does not necessitate the
separation of the Dinesus ida beds from the ordovician system.

In some shales associated with the trilobite bed are some
fossils resembling graptolites or algae. Mr. T. S. Hall has failed
to find any more definite evidence than hydrotheca of the
Bryograptus type, so they give us no definite evidence. In Mr.
Ferguson's later collection there are a few brachiopods, which
have been examined by Mr. F. Chapman, who has reported on
them, and regards them as of ordovician and probably even of
upper ordovician age. The strike of the fossiliferous band is
conformable with the strike of the overlying ordovician beds.
It seems to me safest, with our present knowledge, to include
them in the ordovician, as the lowest part of that system along
the Heathcote line. The beds may be shown on the Victorian
Survey Map as simply Dinesus beds of lower ordovician age.

III. (D). — The Heathcotian Series.

The last rocks of this ai-ea may be grouped together as the
Heathcote series. They may be divided into two main divisions :
the first includes some clearly altered sediments ; the second a
series of altered igneous rocks.

The microscopic structure of the rocks has been carefully
described in Mr. Howitt's excellent memoir, to which reference
may be made for detailed description of most of the rocks and
the character of their minerals. Mr. Hosvitt has determined the
rocks of the acid series as aplites, granophyres and labradorite-
porphyrites ; and the rocks of the basic series he has identified
as diabase, diabase-porphyrite, enstatite-diabase-porphyrite and
hornblende-diorite ; and one very altered series is referred to as
spilite.

The Heathcotian. 157

IV. — The Petrography of the Heathcotk Rocks.

With Mr. Hewitt's description of tlie petrography of the rocks
I am in agreement, except in a few minor matters of nomen-
clature. The rocks may be divided into four groups — the
unaltered sediments, metamorphic rocks, acid igneous rocks, and
basic igneous rocks.

The unaltered sediments show nothing of special interest.
Reference has already been made to the occurrence of fragments
of the diabasic materials in the Silurians. The ordovician rocks
are normal clastic rocks, considerably crushed, but not foliated.

The metamorphic rocks of the Heathcote series are of two
types. They include schists and sandstones. As a type of the
altered schists I may refer to a specimen collected 130 yards
west of the so-called copper mine, on the Murray road, two and
a-half miles north of Heathcote. The rock is a phyilite, traversed
by two distinct cleavage planes. The rock was Hrst altered by
the development of a foliation, which formed alternate bands of
fine grained argillaceous matter and quartz. It was subsequently
cleaved obliquely to the foliation planes. The rock breaks
readily along the second planes, and these are clearly shown in
section as they are marked by limonite stains. The typical
rock of this group is phyllitic schist.

The second type of the metamorphic rocks includes a series of
black cherts, which are especially well shown near Lady's Pass
in Dargile. These cherts when freslj are of a black colour with
a satiny lustre. When exposed for some time to the weather,
they become grey or they may be quite bleached. These rocks
have been described by Mr. Howitt as adinoles. An adinole is
a rock altered by a basic intrusion, and the term seems to
imply the absorption by tlie altered rock of some material
from the intrusive rock. Two analyses of adinoles given I)y
Rosenbusch^ show 8.33 and 7.77 per cent, of soda respectively,
whereas the analysis of the Heathcote rocks, made l)y Mr. F.
Stone for Mr. Howitt,- show only 0.84 and 1.98 per cent, of
alkalies. The analyses are as follows : —

1 Rosenbusch : Elemente der Gesteinslehie, 1898, p. 333.

2 Howitt, op. cit., p. 8.

158 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

I.

II.

III

IV.

SiO„ - -

91.08

SiO, - 92.74

SiO., -

72.63

76.30

ALA- -

6.00

A1.A-

15.81

14.68 .

FeA- -

tr.

FeO -

0.74

trace.

CaO - -

O.U

CaO -

].02

0.18

MgO - -

.25

MgO -

1.21

0.02

K,0 - -

1.82

K,0 ^ ^,

Na,0J -^^

K.X) -

0.75

0.53

Na,0 - -

.16

Na,0 -

8.33

7.77

Juoss on
ignition

.96 w

H.O -

0.61

0.48

100.41 101.10 99.96

Sp.G. 2.778 2.637

I. "Metamorphosed Sediment," analagous to adinole, allotment

12, Parish Crosbie. Howitt, A. W., " Notes on Diabase
and Adjacent Formations of the Heathcote District," p. 8.

II. The same, No. 18 Gatehouse, at Heathcote. Howitt, A. W,

0/>. cit., p. 8.

III. Adinole, Heinrichsburg, near Magdesprung. Harz. H.

Rosenbusch, " Elemente der Gesteinslehre," p. 333.

IV. Adinole, Gitzhiigel, near Hasselfelde. Harz. H. Rosenbusch,

Op. cit, p. 333.

The acid igneous rocks have been carefully described by Mr.
Howitt, who states that " I have felt much difficulty in assigning
a place in classification to these granitic rocks." (6, p. 5.) He
finally called them aplites and suggested for them the provisional
term of plagioclase-aplites. With Mr. Howitt's determination of
the mineral constituents and structure of these rocks I entirely
agree. There are two distinct varieties of rock. The first—
those identified as aplites- — consists of orthoclase in eroded and
altered crystals, idiomorphic crystals of plagioclase, rounded
grains of quartz, and flakes of colourless mica. The plagioclase,
as Mr. Howitt remarks, is " more or less completely replaced by
flakes and rosettes of a colourless mica." Biotite is also present
in small patciies.

In the second variety of rock — Mr. Howitt's labradorite-
porphyrite — the structure is porphyritic, and the base is grano- •
phyric. The colour of the rock is dark grey to bluish or blackish
grey. Plagioclase occurs both in phenocrysts and in radial tufts.

0) This sample lost .20 per cent, on drying at 212 deg. F.

The Heathcotian. 159

The plagioclase, according to Mr. Hewitt's measurements, is a
member of the labradorite group. There is also an araphibole.
■either anthophyllite or a monoclinic species witli a nearly
straight extinction. The rocks of this second type Mr Hewitt
•described as later effusions from the aplite magma, and he calls
them labradorite-pophyrite.

The two varieties of the rocks are probably associated, as Mr.
Howitt concluded, and the labradorite-porphyrite is intermediate
between the more acid variety and the diabase.

The use of the term aplite for either of the rocks seems to me
open to doubt. Taking Rosenbusch's^ last definition of the term
aplite, he describes it as "a panidiomorphic granular rock, which
■consists of predominant potash felspar (orthoclase, microcline
with lattice structure, microperthite, more rarely microclinmicro-
perthite), and quartz with acid plagioclase and a very limited
•quantity of muscovite and biotite, or both these micas." The
structure, therefore, of an aplite is panidiomorphic, whereas in
these Heathcote rocks the structure is hypidiomorphic. The
rock, moreover, occurs more in masses than dykes, and it .seems
to me safer to regard the rocks as fine-grained granodiorites. It
is quite natural to find them associated with later effusions, as
Mr. Howitt describes them, or possibly dykes having the chemical
character of rocks of the intermediate group. The porphyritic
granophyric labradorite rock in all-otment No. 16, at South
Heathcote, can be more easily explained as derived fioin a
granophyr than from an aplite.

The typical granodiorites occur at the Red Hill, where tiiey
are seen to be clearly intrusive into tlie diabase series. They
also occur in the area round the water reserve, where they occur
as a series of small tors.

The labradorite-porphyrite is best shown in South Heathcote,
■on the northern side of Photograph Knob.

The Diamase Sehies.
The rocks of this series, as Mr. Howitt has pointed out, are
very varied in their petrographic characters. Many of them,
such as the diorite, the enstatite-diabase, and most of the

1 H. Rosenbusch : Eleiuente der Gesteinslehre, 1898, p. 206.

160 rroceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

porphyrites, have the characters of intrusive rocks. In various
parts of the series there are diabases which have the structures
of lavas, though the material is now entirely altered. Photo-
graph Knob, South Heathcote, consists of one of the most
interesting rocks in this series ; it has the characters of a
volcanic agglomerate. Hence, especially at South Heathcote,.
some of the diabases are of eruptive and volcanic character.

V. — Age of the Heathcotian Series.

According to the view which has hitherto prevailed, the-
Heathcote series is of postsilurian age. In that case the rocks
of the diabase series are intrusive into the silurians.

(A). — Relatiofi with the Si/uriafi.

The first evidence against this view is the complete absence
of any contact alteration along the line of junction of the diabase
and Silurian series. Where they are in close juxtaposition the
Silurian rocks have not been baked. Lidgey has already quoted
the occurrence of pebbles of the metamorphic rocks in the
silurian ; and the microscopic examination of the basal silurian
rocks at the Copper Mine shows that they contain a considerable
pi'oportion of diabasic material. These facts clearly show that
the silurian is later than the Heathcotian series, and is resting
u neon form ably upon it.

(B). — Relations with the Ordoviciaii.

The relation of the ordovician and eruptive rocks is less clear.
As a rule the junction is somewhat obscure ; and I have not
attempted to follow it all along the line. I have examined
typical sections where the ordovician and the dial)ase series occur
in contact, and in some cases found no evidence of contact
alteration. In places, as at Red Hill, the diabase series is
separated from the ordovician rocks by a band of schists,.
and I liave not been able to find any sharp junction between
these schists and the overlying ordovician beds ; but, on
the other hand, I have not been able to see any passage from the
schists into the ordovician beds. I have in no case been in

The Heathcot'ian. 161

doubt, after the application of the luicroscope, as to whether a
rock belonged to the schistose or to the ordovician series.

In Craven's paddock, in Knowsley parish, allotment 32, the
two rocks can be well seen in contact close along the eastern
fence. Here, as elsewhere, the junction between the hard
cherts of the metamorphic series and the normal slates and sand-
stones of the ordovician series can be clearly recognised.

A serious difficulty in the view that the diabase rocks were
intrusive into the ordovician rocks is the spoi-adic character of
contact alteration along the line of junction. Thus in Mr. 0. A.
L. Whitelaw's sketch map of Heathcote, the diabases are repre-
sented in contact with the ordovician rocks from the northern
boundaiy of the parish across Mount Ida Creek and Mclvor
Creek to the west of the northern end of tlie township. Along
this line of two and a half miles no metamorphic i-ocks are
represented as occurring between the ordovician and diabase
series. In the Heathcote township there are two blocks of
metamorphic rocks. One is shown on the map to the north and
east of the water reserve ; but these metamorphic rocks, instead
of occurring between the diabase rocks and the ordovician, are
on the wrong side of the igneous series. A sraall narrow band
of metamorphic rocks occurs at Red Hill ; it is a quarter of a
mile in length, about ninety yards in width at tlie thickest point;,
it thins out to north and south, leaving unaltered ordovician rocks
resting directly upon the diabases. Then follows another
mile and a half without any metamorphic rocks along the
contact; then, close by a small patcli of diorite on the eastern
side of the road going to Arygle's reef, there is another patch of
metamorphic rock (PI. XXTV., Fig. 1). It forms a b;iy
running into the diabase series, which occurs round it
on the north and east; on the south is a small out-
crop of diorite, which appears to be sliarply marked off from
the ordovician rocks by a line running from north-west
to south-east. This line cuts with equal abruptness straight
across the metamorphic rocks, the diorite and the diabase, as if
they were all part of the same series. The last patcli of the
metamorphic rocks occurs in South Heathcote, in allotments
Nos. 15 and 16 (PI. XXIV., Fig. 'l). Here a bay, re-
presented on the map as unaltered ordovician, runs up

162 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

between the diabase on the north and an intrusion of
aplite on the south-east. The unaltered ordovician is shown
as half a furlong in width, but the only part which is
represented as metamorphic is a circular patch at the
extreme head of this ordovician bay. Had the metamorphic
rocks been formed by the alteration of the ordoviciaiis owing to
the intrusion of the diabases and the aplites, then we should have
certainly expected the whole of this nari'ow band of the
ordovicians to have been altered.

The map at the northern end of the Heathcote series is
equally difficult to explain on the view that the metamorphic
rocks have been formed by the alteration of the ordovicians
(PL XXIV., Figs. 3, 4). For instance, the plan of Crosbie
and Redcastle (Nos. A and B, opposite p. 4, in Mr.
Howitt's Monograph) shows one thin band of metamorphic
rock in the southern half of paddock 4C ; it lies between diabase
•on the east and the ordovician on the west ; but the ordovician
rocks at the northern end overlap the metamorphic and rest
directly on the diabases. Similarly on the western flanks of the
diabase range at the south-eastern corner in Crosbie and south-
western corner of Redcastle and north-western corner of Dargile.
Here for most of the way the ordovicians are separated from the
diabase by a band of metamorphic rocks ; but at the northern
half of paddock loaa in Redcastle, the ordovician rocks are
shown^ to overlap the metamorphic band and rest directly on the
diabases.

I have not been able to confirm the mapping in these localities,
and have not visited the sections at the northern part of Crosbie.
But the evidence is of importance as it is inconsistent with the
view expressed in the memoir accompanying those maps. The
field relations show, according to the work of the surveyor, that
the ordovician rocks have been deposited unconformably on the
edge of an old series of metamorphic rocks and diabases. In
some cases the ordovicians were laid down upon the xuetamorphic
rocks and in other cases directly upon the diabase. Moreovei',
the metamorphic rocks occur in places where there are no igneous
rocks exposed in the immediate vicinity. Thus an exposure of

1 Howitt, op. cit., Map facing p. 4 ; the part in (luostion is reproduced on pi xxiv. , fifr. 4.

Th<> Hmthcotian. 16^

the typical cherts of the inetamorphic series occurs along t he-
eastern edge of allotment 3Q in Knowsley East. The cherts
occur between the silurian rocks on one side and unaltered
ordovician on the west. There are some diabases a little south
of this allotment, but none occur in it. If we explain the
metamorphisni there as due to a continuation of the diabases at
a sliglit depth below the surface, then it is difficult to understand
why there is no sign of alteration in the Dinesus ida beds, which
must be approximately the same distance from any such assumed
igneous mass.

Further evidence of a negative, but still of an important
chai'acter is the fact that, although these diabases and igneous
rocks occur along a line of nearly thirty miles in length, not one
case is known of an apophysis or of a dyke striking from this
series into the silurian or ordovician beds. Had this complex
series of intrusive igneous rocks been injected- in post silurian
times, it is highly improbable that they should have kept along
the actual line between the two lower palaeozoic system;?, and
should not, in a single case, have sent off* an intrusion into the
lower palaeozoic beds.

Q.—Geolflqical Sequence at Heathcoie.

The evidence therefore seems to nje conclusive that the series

is as follows : —

Silurian - - Sandstone and Quartzites.

Unconformity.

. . i Sandstones and slates.

Ordovician \ ^. • i i i

V Dmesus ida beds.

Granodiorites and granupliyric porphyrites.

Diabase series partly eruptive and partly in-

Heathcotian ,

trusive

Cherts and schists.
Accoi-ding to this view, Mr. Dunn was right in regarding the
rocks in the Heathcote series as pre-ordovician (or as he has put
it, pre-silurian), and the diabases as in part effusive. ^\\\
Howitt was right in his rock determinations, and in the view
that the diabase and acid rocks are mainly intrusive ; but Ijoth

164 Proceedings of tJie Royal Society of Victoria.

the igneous aud the metamorphic rocks were of pre-ordovician
instead of post-silurian age.

VI. — The Distributiox of the Heathcote Series in
Victoria.

"We must enquire where else in Victoria representatives of the
Heathcote series occur. South of the Colbinabbin Range of the
Heathcote Valley we find a similar rock series forming the Mount
William Range, and extending from Mount William to south of
the Lancetield Gap. The distribution of the rocks is well shown
in the quarter sheet of the Geological Survey Map (Xo. o, S.E.),
where they are marked as '"Trap or Hypogene and metamorphic
Silurian." The famous aboriginal quarries of Mount William were
worked in outcrops of the amphibolites and impure nephrites of
the Heathcotian series.

Mr. W. H. Ferguson^ has shown that at Dookie there is
another outcrop of diabases, and some specimens that he collected
{now in the Mines Deparment) show that both the igneous and
the associated metamorphic rocks have the characters typical of
the Heathcotian series.

The bores put down by the Mines Department at Rushworth
have revealed beneath the silurian sandstones and shales a thick
series of hard black quartzites. I have had sections prepared
from these rocks and they show that these deeper Rushworth
quartzites have the characters of the Heathcotian cherts. Mr.
A. M. Howitt has re-examined the bore records of the Rush-
worth bores and has sorted out the sample of the cores. The
non-success of the boring for gold at that locality was due to the
fact that the deeper bores passed into the barren series of
Heathcotian cherts.

That the Heathcotian rocks had at one time a considerable
extension further east than Dookie is probable from the evidence
of the glacial conglomerates between Chiltern and the Springs. I
have been guided over these deposits by Messrs. S. Hunter and
A. W. Gahan. The most abundant foreign boulders in these
deposits are cherts of the Heathcotian series. They are

1 W. H. Ferguson : Notes on the Rocks at Dookie. Prog. Rep. Geol. Surv. Vict, No.
viii^ pp. 59-60, 1894.

Tlte Heathcotlaii. 165

associated with fossiliferous quartzites, whicli resemble those of
Mount Ida. Both materials were probably derived from the
<lenudation of an eastern extension of the rocks exposed at
Heathcote.

South of the Lancefield Gap another outcrop of hypogene trap
is recorded on the survey maps. I have been able to examine
the rocks of this outcrop owing to the kindness of the Rev. H.
Hennell, of Lancefield, who has collected some specimens for me.

Mr. Hennell's collection nicludes several varities of diabases,
and a specimen of banded chert, which nearly resembles that of
the Heathcotian series. The lithological characters and strati-
graphical position of these rocks both suggest that they are a
southern continuation of the Mount William range.

Near Geelong there are some more outcrops of the Heath-
cotian series. The two largest are shown on the Geological
Survey Map, No. 24, S.E., and are there coloured as Trap or
Hypogene. They were determined by Selwyn as diabases. An
unmapped exposure occurs flanking the granodiorites of the Dog
Rocks in the Moorabool Valley. As I understand that Mr. E,
G. Hogg is undertaking a study of these rocks, I have only
examined them as far as is necessary for the course of this paper.
In the Moorabool Valley, opposite the Dog Rocks, is an
irregularly foliated amphibolite (No. 149); it is mainly composed
of needles of green hornblende, associated with zoisite and some
material, probably derived from altered grains of felspar. The
rock was a basic igneous rock, intensely altered — in part, no
doubt, owing to the intrusion of the adjacent granodiorites of
the Dog Rocks.

A second amphibolite (No. 143) of somewhat the same character
occurs at George's Hill in the Barwon Valley. It was collected
by Messrs. D. J. Mahoney and G. Voss Smith. This rock is less
foliated and the remains of the felspars are larger and more
angular than in the amphibolites from the Dog Rocks. The
rock has been altered and the ferromagnesian constituents now
consist of abundant needles and plates of amphibole. This
mineral has an extinction of 12 degrees, a i)rismatic angle of
about 123 degrees, and its pleochroism ranges from blue or
bluish green to pale green and yellowish green. It may therefore
be identified as arfvedsonite.

166 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

A rock represented by specimens in the conglomerates at the
Barwon Falls has been called gabbro. It gives us a better
indication as to the original character of one of the rocks of this
series. It (147) is an enstatite-diabase, not unlike some of the-
speciraens from Heathcote.

A specimen from the Barwon Falls, Geelong (150), is normal
epidiorite, with the plagioclase well developed and the uralitic
hornblende abundant.

An analysis of one rock from the outcrop near Geelong has
been given in Selwyn's " Descriptive Catalogue of the Rock
Specimens and Minerals in the National Museum," 1868, pp.
17, 94. It is identified as a "Greenstone (diabase)." The
analysis was interpreted to identify the plagioclase as labradorite,
and the green mineral as probably chlorite. The exact locality
of the rock is not stated.^

Greenstone (diabase), Geelong.

Silica 50.84

Alumina - - - - - - 12.92

Sesquioxide of Iron - - - - 0.52

Protoxide of Iron - - - - 6.99

Lime ------- 14.35

Magnesia - 10.97

Potash 1.83

Soda ------- traces.

Water 0.71

In south-western Victoria, near Mount Staveley, we have
another development of the Heathcotian rocks. They extend in a
band, coloured on Mr. Everett's Geological Survey Map of
Victoria- as " Porphyrites, Diorites, and Trachytoid rocks, &e."
This band extends north and south for some twelve miles. I
have been able to examine this bed near Mount Staveley, between
Wickliffe Road and Glen Thomson. This hill is mainly com-
posed of hard cherts of the Heathcotian type ; they are associated
with diabases, also like those of the Heathcotian series. The
ridge may be regarded as another exposure of the pre-ordovician
rocks.

1 Ibid., p. 94.

2 Geol. Survey, 1902.

The Heathcotian. 167

The confused rocks at Waratah Bay, Cape Liptrap, may
include an outcrop of the Heathcotian series. Mr. Stirling^ has
recorded the occurrence there of "hard felsitic beds "" either
Silurian or pre-silurian " ; of a gabbro with serpentine veins; and
of a " hornfels-like contact rock." But he regards the gabbro
and diabasic rocks as associated with deep-seated apophyses, fron»
the granitic area of Wilson's Promontory ; and the granitic
rocks there have been generally regarded as devonian in age.

On Mr. Stirling's plates some rocks in fig. 1 are marked as
Cambrian ; in fig. 2 the diabase or " melaphyre " is shown as
intrusive into the silurian (?) ; in the view of Waratah Bay the
"felsitic jointed rock" is stated as pre-silurian (?) ; and in the
sketch section at " Serpentine Dyke, to west of Bird Rock," it
is said to be cambrian, and the serpentine is shown intrusive into
it, separated by a "contact rock (mica porphyrite)."'-

Another area where Heathcotian rocks may occur is on the
line of junction of the silurian and devonian rocks in Wonnan-
gatta. The most probable locality would be in the Howqua
Valley, south of Mount Buller. Mr. Murray's" report on this
district refers to the upper silurian beds being there "partly
metamorphic in character." So far T know of no certain evidence
of Heathcotian rocks in that area.

VII. — Relations of the Ordovician and Silurian Systems.

The above conclusions help us to understand the relations of
the ordovician and silurian deposits in Victoria. It has been
well known since the time of Selwyn's work that the ordovician
and silurian rocks meet along a line running from Melbourne
northward through Heathcote; but no very satisfactory junctions
have been found along this line.

Starting at the Mount William Range the hills are formed by
a continuation of the Heathcotian series. Immediately at the

1 J. Stirling : Notes on the Silver Deposits and Limestone Beds of Waratah Bay. Projf.
Rep. Geol. Surv. Vict., No. viii., pp. 68-69, pi. 4.

■■: The general impression left by the above account is that the rocks are probably
Heathcotian ; but one of my colleagues on the Geological Survey is of opinion that the
supposed pre-ordovician roclis are altered Silurians.

3 R. A. F. Murray : Howqua Hills District. Prog. Rep. Geol. Surv. Vict., No. vii.,
1884 (1885), p. 57.

168 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

western foot of the hills are the Lancefielcl beds ; going westward
we cross an ascending series of the ordovicians, coming first to
the Bendigo and then to the Castleniaine divisions of this system.
Whereas, on the generally accepted view that Victoria is in
the main one great synclinal, we should expect to find the
uppermost, and not the lowermost, of the ordovician beds
nearest to the junction with the silurians.

So far there is no fully convincing, definite evidence of the
Silurian beds resting upon the ordovician beds. There are three
possible cases. Specimens collected by Mr. Ferguson in Wombat
Creek, in north-eastern Victoria, have enabled Mr. Robert
Etheridge, jun., to record the occurrence of silurian fossils from
beds above a series with ordovician fossils. But Mr. T. S. Hall's
determination of the graptolites from that area suggests doubt as
to the occurrence of both the ordovician and silurian systems of
that locality.

A second possible case is at Costerfield. Ranft, in his " Origin
of Gold," refers to the occurrence of abundant ordovician grapto-
lites in the tip heaps in the mines of Costerfield, although the
beds on the surface are there mapped by the Geological Survey
as silurian. If Ranft and the Geological Survey are both right
in their determinations, then the silurians at Costerfield rest
upon the ordovicians.

The third possible case is at Sandy Creek, a tributai-y of the
Mitchell River, in Dargo. Mr. Herman collected some fossils
there, which have been identified by Mr. R. Etheridge, jun., as
silurian, and the beds are marked accordingly on the last edition
of the Geological Map of Victoria. Mr. Herman, however, had
previously mapped these beds as middle devonians.^ The collec-
tion included a Frodudus. Mr. Etheridge suggests that this
fossil was accidentally included with the Sandy Creek fossils.- A
definite conclusion in this case must await further evidence.

The Heathcote evidence gives a simple explanation of this
remarkable fact that there is no evidence of the super position of
the silurian on the ordovician. During the time of deposition of
the ordovician rocks a high ridge probably extended across

1 H. Hennan : Trans. Austral. Instit. Min. Eng., vol. v., Paper No. 68.

2 R. Etheridge, jun. : Note forthcoming in Records Geol. Surv. Vict.

The Heathcotian. 169

Central Victoria from south to north. The deposition of the
ordovician beds began by the sinking of the ground to the west
of the line from Heathcote to Melbourne, and by a second
subsidence in eastern Victoria from Bogong to Dargo. The
oldest deposits were naturally deposited on the sinking shore
lines, so that the Lancefield series was laid down on the
eastern side of the land made up of Heathcotian and perhaps
also still older rocks ; as the subsidences continued later sedi-
ments accuniulated further and further to the west (PI. XXV.,
Fig. 5). During the time represented by the unconformity
between the ordovician and silurian rocks, the country to
the west of the Heathcote-Mel bourne line was probably
upraised ; subsidence or denudation in the counties of Evelyn,
Anglesey and Rodney led to a silurian sea running northward
from Port Phillip to the Murray basin. This silurian sea was
bounded both to the west and east by highlands of ordovician
rocks (PI. XXIII). It is possible that gulfs from the
ordovician sea ran into the old Heathcotian land area, Sandy
Creek and Wombat Creek ; and in these places the ordovician
deposits may have been covered by silurian sediments. The
silurian rocks may also have extended westward from Mount Ida
over the eastern border of the ordovician series ; hut in all
probability, the main part of the ordovician and silurian rocks
were deposited in independent basins; and these basins were
separated by a range of old rocks, which once extended from
Geelong to Mount Camel, and of whicli the Colbinabbin and
Mount William Ranges are the best preserved remnants.

The range of the Heathcotian rocks does not appear to have
been continuous from Lancefield to Geelong even in upper
ordovician times. No trace of it is known where the
silurian and ordovician rocks occur near together, between
Keilor and Sunbury. Rocks of the Melbournian division of the
silurian system are exposed near rocks belonging to the upper
ordovician. Thus, near Diggers' Rest, there are slates with
Dicranograptus ramosus and Coenograptus gracilis, which are
regarded as upper ordovician. The slates along the Coimaidai
Creek, near Bacchus Marsh, contain Didymograptus caduceus,
Didymograptus extensus and Tetragraptus quadribrachiatus ;
they are typical of the Castlemaine series, the uppermost of Mr.

170 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Hall's three subdivisions of the lower ordovician. At Matlock
we have a<,fain upper ordovician graptolites such as Dicellograptus
morrisi, and Diplograptus foliaceus. It is therefore probable
that while the ordovician series was being deposited, denudation
was destroying the land area of Heathcotian rocks. The trans-
gressions of the ordovician sea carried the higher part of the ordo-
vician rocks round the southern flank of the Mount William and
Lancefield Ranges across the line that formerly connected them
to the Heathcotian rocks near Geelong. In the neighborhood of
Melbourne the rocks of the silurian and ordovician systems are
not, so far as I know, exposed in actual contact ; for the junction
is covered by the basalt sheets. Yet it is possible that the
Melbouinian rocks rest unconformably upon the upper ordo-
vician.

Again, east of Melbourne, in the basin of the Upper Yarra,
and on the main divide near Mount Matlock, there are some
upper ordovician i-ocks ; they show that the ordovician trans-
gression had carried the sea into the area occupied by land
throughout the lower ordovician.

VIII. — The Subdivision of the Silurian System.

The relation of the ordovician and silurian rocks in Victoria
raises the question of the silurian succession in Victoria. Surprise
has often been expressed at the absence of clear junctions
between the rocks of those two systems or of the superposition
of the silurian upon the ordovician. But, as we have seen, this
ditficulty is explained by the geology of Heathcote.

The silurian rocks of Victoria occur in three distinct types.
There is a series of coarse grained shore deposits which are best
shown at Mount Ida, near Heathcote. They consist of coarse-
grained conglomerates, grits and sandstones. The second type
consists of alternations of shale and sandstone. It is well
developed around Melbourne, near which the beds are often
intensely contorted. The third type consists of a series of
lenticular masses of limestone, associated with sandstone and
shales ; they occur at Lillydale, Loyola, Cape Liptrap and
the Thomson Kiver. The relation of these three lithological
divisions of the silurian is obscured by the intense folding of
certain bands. These contortions are especially well shown near

The Heathcotian. 171

Melbourne, in oui' most familiar silurian sections ; hence there
has naturally been a tendency to exaggerate the importance of
this folding in the Victorian series. The foldings occur on
certain lines of fracture and contortion, which are separated by
broad bands, in which the silurian rocks have a fairly normal
sequence. The silurian rocks seem to me to be bent into two main
Anticlinals and two main synclinals (PI. XXV., Fig 6). Along the
eastern side of Melbourne is an extremely contorted zone, which is
especially well shown in the cutting by the Yarra at the
Johnston Street Bridge and near Heidelberg. East of this
Melbourne fracture zone the beds have a regular dip to the west.
This slope is part of a great anticlinal, of which the axis passes
tlirough Warrandyte. Along this anticlinal axis there is another
line of contortions and faults, along which occurs a series of
a,uriferous quartz reefs. The eastern leg of the anticlinal is
much steeper than the western ; and beyond it we come to the
great synclinal which passes through Lillydale and Yering. We
will therefore call it the Lillydale synclinal. A smaller synclinal
with some Yeringian beds appears to occur in the upper Yarra.
Eastward again we come to another great anticlinal. Some
ordovician beds are exposed in the axis of this anticlinal near
Matlock ; we may therefore call it the Matlock anticlinal. To
the east again comes the great synclinal of Walhalla ; its two
legs are said by Mr. 0. A. L. Whitelaw to have a very regular
dip, though the beds along the axis line of this synclinal are
intensely folded and contorted. Beyond the Walhalla synclinal
the beds are unconformably covered by the rocks which are
included in the devonian system.

In tracing the folding of the silurians it is important to get
a palaeontological basis for the correlation of the beds ; but
unfortunately, owing to the comparative scarcity of fossils, their
imperfect preservation, and the great difference in characters
between the limestone and shale faunas, the palaeontological
evidence is at present insufficient. There seems, however, to be
■evidence of two main subdivisions ; the first we may call the
Melbourne series or Melbournian ; many fossils have been,
obtained from it at Moonee Ponds and at the Yarra improve-
ments ; and it can be traced north-westward from Melbourne
through Keilor, East Kilmore and Heathcote. The beds at

172 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Reefton, MacMahon's Creek, Macclesfield, Alexandra, and
Matlock also seem to belong to the Melbournian horizon.

The second series we may call the Yeringian, after Yering
north of Lillydale, where the beds have yielded a small brachio-
pod fauna. These beds are best shown at Lillydale, but the name
Yeringian is preferable, as based on a native Australian place
name. This Yeringian series includes the most important silurian
limestones, including those of Lillydale, Loyola, the Thomson
River, Cape Liptrap, and also the beds of Seville and various
localities in the basin of the Woori Yallock. We should expect
this horizon also to appear in the synclinal to the west of the
Warrandyte anticlinal ; but so far I know no definite palaeonto-
logical evidence of its occurrence here.

No satisfactory list of the distinctive fossils of these two
horizons can yet be drawn up ; but I may quote the following
species, using the names generally known in Victoria, without
any attempt to revise the nomenclature.
Melbournian —

Phacops (Odontochile) caudatus, Brgn.

Forbesia euryceps, McCoy.

Homolonotus harrisoni, McCoy.

Cyphaspis spryi, Greg.

Hapalocrinus victoriae, Bath.

Retiolites australis, McCoy.

Spirifera plicatella (L.), var. macropleura (Cunr. ).

Cardium gippslandicum, McCoy.

Orthoceras (Cycloc.) ibex. Sow.

Orthoceras buUatum, Sow.
Yeringian —

Phacops (Portlockia) fecundus, Barr.

Lichas australis, McCoy.

Homolonotus sp. n.

Leptaena (Leptagonia) rhomboidalls (Wilck). ?■

Spirifera sulcata. His.

Spirifera reticularis, L.

Pentanierus australis, McCoy.

Orthoceras lineare, Mst.

Trochus (Scalaetrochus) lindstromi, Eth.

Pleurotomaria (Phanerotrema) australis, Eth.

The Heathcotian. 173

Bellerophon cresswelli, Eth.
Tremanotus pritchardi, Cresswell.
Favosites grandipora, McCoy.

IX, — Summary of Conclusions.

1. The heathcotian series of Victoria consists mainly of
phyllites and schists, with diabases, porphyrites, and amphibolites.
Some of the igneous rocks are intrusive, others are eruptive, and
some are volcanic agglomerates.

2. The heathcotian series is of pre-ordovician age. The
evidence at present is insufficient to show whether it be Cambrian
or pre-cambrian. It is probably, however, more recent than the
metamorphic rocks of north-eastern Victoria and of Dundas.

3. The Dinesus ida beds may be regarded as of lower
ordovician age, and they contain a new genus of trilobite,
Notasaphus.

4. Dinesus, so far as the available evidence goes, may be
included in the Asaphidae.

5. The heathcotian series is best exposed on the Colbinabbin
and Mount William Ranges. The latter extends from Mount
William to the south of Lancetield Gap, and has an outlier in
Deep Creek, south-east of Lancefield. Representatives of this
series also occur at Dookie ; under the silurian rocks of Rush-
worth ; some miles west and north-west of Geelong, in the
valleys of the Barwon and the Moorabool ; at Mount Staveley in
Western Victoria. Probably also at Waratah Bay, Cape Liptrap.
Possibly also on the Howqua River.

5. The heathcotian rocks formed, in lower ordovician times,
an extensive land area across Central Victoria. By the upper
ordovician times, the sea had spread eastward across what is now
the Melbourne basin and the Upper Yarra.

6. The silurian system in Victoria may be divided into two
divisions, a lower or Melbournian and an upper or Yeringian.
The silurian system occurs partly in a series of gentle folds
and partly in belts along a series of meridional fracture
lines, along which the beds are intensely contorted. Going
eastward from the western edge of the series the main folds
in the silurian are (1) the contorted zone of the Melbournian

1 74 Proceedings of tJie Royal Society of Victoria.

heds ; (2) the Warrandyte anticlinal ; (3) the Lillydale synclinal ;
(4) the anticlinal of the Upper Yarra, in the centre of which, near
Matlock, upper ordovician rocks are exposed ; (5) the geosyn-
clinal of Walhalla.

7. The heathcotian I'ocks are the fragments of the old frame-
work upon which Victoria has been built.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES XXIIL-XXVI.
Plate XXITI.

Sketch map of the distribution of land and sea in Victoria in ordo-
vician times. The areas in black are the present
outcrops of the Heathcotian series. In upper ordo-
vician times there was a transgression of the sea
round the northern end of the Colbinabbin Range and
into the Upper Yarra.

Plate XXIV.

Fig. I. — Map of part of Heathcote, showing diabase series in
part between the metamorphic rocks of the ordo-
vician, and also the overlap of the ordovician across
the metamorphic series. From the Geological Survey
Map of Mr. O. A. L. Whitelaw, as reduced in
Howitt's Memoir.

Fig. 2. — Map of the relations of the ordovician and meta-
morphic rocks, near South Heathcote. After O. A.
L. Whitelaw.

Fig. 3. — Copy of Mr. Lidgey's map of part of Crosbie, represent-
ing the overlap of the ordovician rocks across the
metamorphics.

Fig. 4. — Copy of Mr. Lidgey's map of part of the parish of
Knowsley.

Plate XXV.

Fig. 5. — Diagrammatic section showing the relations of the
ordovician, lieathcotian, and silurian rocks, near
Lancefield.

Fror. K.S. VIrturl,!. I'J<I2. Plate XXIII.

OoytK/ern. 0 t e. a. n-

SieXi ef Mules. ^\ " ' '"i

Proc. R.8. Victoria, 190i. Plate XXIV.

Proc. R.S. Victoria, 1902, Plate XXV.

m> W«Wmj>»i

^

Diagrammatic Section /,.„ w„, ,, »,n.„„^ u.„, t^ Y.,r,

7.i (-ht ;.„V^Ut .t4„,,,.

S.U^ii,^ Vo.,.,

^tcr/i;>, Lath
^' W,/>)«.Tr. 1?<

a™ i Wert acrocc

itni

foUti^.lUTi i;„,Awo»tK

BfnaTnlra. Uir\1a.nis

irOitCTn.

Ht»lkcciia.n
1 Diagrammatic Section from Bendigo to Benambra.

Proc. U.S. Victoria, 1902. riate XXVI.

/■? S.

The Heathcotian. 175

Fig. 6. — Diagrammatic section across the silurian rocks from

Melbourne to Mount Wellington.
Fig. 7. — Diagrammatic section from Bendigo to Benambra.

Plate XXVI.

Fig. 8. — Cranidium and two thoracic segments of Dinesus ida.
Figs. 9 and 10. — Two cranidia of other specimens of Dinesus

ida.
Fig. 11. — Cranidium of Notasaphus fergusoni, showing fixed

cheeks. Natural size.
Figs. 12 a and ^. — Cranidium and pygidium of Notasaphus

fergusoni. Natural size. The two probably belonged

to the same individual.
Fig. 13, — Pygidium of another specimen of Notasaphus fergusoni.
(The specimens on PI. XXVI. are in the collection of the Mines
Department, Victoria).

Art. XIX. — Catalogue of the Marine Shells of Victoria.

Part VI.

By G. B. PRITCHARD and J. H. GATLIFF.

[Eead 9th October, 1902.1

The present paper refers to one hundred and twelve species,
contained in the following families : — Stomatiidae, Haliotidae,
Pleurotomariidae, Fissurellidae, Patellidae, Lepidopleuridae,
Ischnochitonidae, Mopaliidae, Acanthochitidae, Cryptoplacidae,
Chitonidae, Tornatinidae, Scaphandridae, Bullidae, Akeridae,
Ringiculidae, Philinidae, Aplysiidae, Pleurobranchidae, Umbrel-
lidae, Siphonariidae, Gadiniidae, and Dentaliidae.

The previous papers, Parts I. to V., dealt with 419 species, so
that with the present additions the total number of species now
dealt with amounts to 531.

We have omitted from present consideration our representa-
tives of the families Truncatellidae, Auriculidae, and Amphi-
bolidae, as they are not strictly marine forms.

The present part concludes the Gastropoda and Scaphopoda,
with the exception of some species which have been obtained
and identified subsequent to the publication of the various parts
to which they belonged ; these will be included in an appendix
at the end of the treatment of the Lamellibranchiata.

Subsequent to the reading of our last paper. Professor Tate
and Mr. May published a Revised Census of the Marine IMollusca
of Tasmania, in which they deal with 679 species, including the
Palliobranchiata and brackish water forms. We do not agree
with all their conclusions, and will take an opportunity later on
of discussing the points on which we differ.

Family Stomatiidae.
Genus Stomatella, Lamarck, 1809.
Stomatella imbricata, Lamarck.

1822. Stomatella imbricata, Lamarck. Anim. S. Vert.,
vol. vi., (2), p. 209.

Catalogue of Marine Shells of Victoria. 177

1822. Stomatia imbricata, Sowerby. Genera, vol. ii.,.

pi. 143, f. 1.
1839. Stomatella imbricata, Lamarck. Anim. S. Vert.

(3rd ed. Deshayes and Edwards), vol. iii., p.

509, No. 1.
1843. Stomatella imbricata, Lamarck. 7^., (ed. Deshayes),

vol. ix., p. 16, sp. 1.
Stomatella imbricata, Deshayes. Encycl. Meth.,

vol. iii., p. 984, No. 1., pi. 450, f. 2a, b.
1850. Stomatella imbricata, A. Adams. P.Z.S. Lond.,

p. 30.
1854. Stomatella imbricata, Adams and Sowerby. Thes.

Conch., vol. ii., pt. 15, p. 833, sp. 1, pi. 174,

f. 1.
1867. Stomatella imbricata, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p.

218, No. 201.

1874. Stomatella imbricata. Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol.

xix., pi. 2, f. 10.

1875. Stomatella imbricata. Woodward. Man. Moll.,

p. 267, pi. 10, f. 19.

1886. Stomatella imbricata, Watson. Chall. Zool., vol.

XV., p. Ill, No. 1.

1887. Stomatella imbricata, Fischer. Man. de Conch.,.

p. 838, pi. 10, f. 19.
1890. Stomatella imbricata, Tryon. Man. Conch., vol.
xii., p. 9, pi. 52, f. 62, and pi. 51, f. 4, 5.
Hab. — Port Phillip ; common along the rocky parts of the
western shores of W^estern Port ; Kilcunda to Cape Patterson
(W. H. Ferguson).

Genus Gena, Gray, 1840.

Gena nigra, Quoy and Gaimard.

1834. Stomatella nigra, Quoy and Gaimard. Astrolabe

Zool., vol. iii., p. 307, pi. 66 ^is, f. 10-12.
1839. Stomatella nigra, Lamarck. Anim. S. Yert. (3rd

ed. Deshayes and Edwards), vol. iii., p. 509,

No. 6.
1843. Stomatella nigra, Lamarck. Id. (ed. Deshayes),.

vol. ix., p. 18. sp. 6.

3 78 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

1850. Stomatia (Gena) strigosa, A. Adams. P.Z.S.

Lond., p. 37.
1854. Gena nigra, Adams and Sowerby. Th(!S. Conch.,

vol. ii., pt. 15, p. 829, sp. 4, pi. 173, f. 14-16.
1854. Gena sti'igosa, Adams and Sowerby. Id., p. 830,

pi. 173, f. 11, 12.
1867. Gena strigosa, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p. 218.
1874. Gena nigra. Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. xix., pi. 2,

f. 11.
1874. Gena strigosa, Reeve. Id., pi. 2, f. 12.
1886. Stomatella (Gena) nigra, Watson. Chall. Zool.,

vol. XV., p. 112, No. 3.
Hab. — Western Port.

Family Ualiotidae.

Genus Haliotis, Linnaeus, 1735.

Haliotis albicans, Quoy and Gaimard.

1834. Haliotis albicans, Quoy and Gaimard. Astrolabe

Zool., vol. iii., p. 311, pi. 68, f. 1, 2.
1839. Haliotis albicans, Lamarck. Anim. S. Vert. (3rd

ed. Deshayes and Edwards), vol. iii., p. 514,

No. 16.
1846. Haliotis albicans. Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. iii.,

pi. 10, f. 30.

1882. Haliotis albicans, Sowerby. Thes. Conch., vol. v.,

pt. 37, p. 30, pi. 430, f. 20.

1883. Haliotis albicans, Weinkauff. Conch. Cab. (ed.

Kiister), p. 71, pi. 21, f. 6, and pi. 28, f. 2.
1890. Haliotis albicans, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.,
vol. xii., p. 78, pi. 5, f. 27.
Hab. — Sorrento, Port Phillip ; Port Phillip Heads to West
Head ; common in Western Port, and along the shores of Phillip
Island ; Warrnambool ; Portland.

Maliotis naevosa, Martyn.

1784. Haliotis naevosa, Martyn. Univ. Conch., vol. ii.,
£. 63.

Catalogue of Marine Shells of Victoria. 179

1839. Haliotis naevosa, Lamarck. Anim. S. Vert. (3rd

ed. Deshayes and Edwards), vol. iii., p. 515,

No. 20.
1843. Haliotis naevosa, Lamarck. Id. (ed. Deshayes),

vol. ix., p. 31. No. 20.
1846. Haliotis naevosa. Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. iii.,.

pi. 8, f. 11a., and pi. 9, f. 27/', and c.
1865. Haliotis naevosa, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p. 183,

No. 178.
1867. Haliotis naevosa, Angas. Id., p. 218, No. 203.

1882. Haliotis naevosa, Sowerby. Thes. Conch., vol. v.,

pts. 37, 38, p. 31, No. 59, pi. 433 (Genus 6),
f. 39, and pi. 437 (Genus 10), f. 73.

1883. Haliotis naevosa, Weinkauff. Conch. Cab. (ed.

Kiister), p. 34, pi. 14, f. 1-3.
1886. Haliotis naevosa, Watson. Chall. Zool., vol. xv.,

p. 49, No. 1.
1890. Haliotis naevosa, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.,
vol. xii., p. 116, pi. 11, f. 56, 60.
Hab. — Coast generally.

Obs. — This is our commonest species, and it shows considerable
variation, but it is always easily identitit-d. Pilsbry indicates
figure 26, plate 5, as this species in addition to the figures on.
plate 11, but we do not think that this represents our species.

Haliotis emmae. Reeve.

Haliotis emmae, Gray. MSS., Brit. Mus. Cat.
1846. Haliotis emmae. Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. iii.,.

pi. 10, f. 29.
1860. Haliotis emmae, Reeve. Elements of Conch., vol.
ii., pp. 12, 13, pL 23, f. 131.

1882. Haliotis emmae, Sowerby. Thes. Conch., vol. v.,

p. 32, pi. 429 (Genus 2), f. 16.

1883. Haliotis emmae, Weinkautf. Conch. Cab. (ed.

Kuster), p. 56, pi. 22, f. 1, 2.
1890. Haliotis emmae, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.,
vol. xii., p. 122, pi. 14, f. 75.
Hab. — Port Phillip and Western Port, but much rarer than
the preceding species.

180 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Obs. — We do not accept figures 27-29 on plate 49 in the
Manual of Conchology as representing this species. Having been
asked whether this species was not H. carinata, Swainson, we
can distinctly state that it is not ; the latter name being only
a synonym of H. parva, Lin., a Cape of Good Hope species.

Haliotis excavata, Lamarck.

1822. Haliotis excavata, Lamarck. Anim. S. Vert.,

vol. vi., p. 215.
Haliotis excavata, Deshayes. Encycl. Meth. Vers,

vol. ii., p. 179, No. 4.
1839. Haliotis excavata, Lamarck. Anim. S. Vert. (3rd

ed. Deshayes and Edwards), vol. iii., p. 512,

No. 4.
1846. Haliotis excavata. Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. iii.,

pi. 8, f. 25.

1882. Haliotis excavata, Sowerby. Thes. Conch., vol. v.,

pi. 3, f. 21, 26.

1883. Haliotis excavata, Weinkauff. Conch. Cab., p. 39,

pi. 16, f, 1, 2.
1890. Haliotis excavata, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.,
vol. xii., p. 119, pi. 9, f. 51, and pi. 49, f. 23.
Hab. — Portsea, Port Phillip.

Haliotis granti, Pritchard and Gatliff.

1902. Haliotis granti, Pritchard and Gatliff. P.R.S.
Vic, vol. xiv., n.s., pt. 2, p. 183, pi. 10, 3
figures.
Hab. — Shoreham, Western Port.

Obs. — This species has been collected by Mr. E. Ashby, at
Cape Northumberland, in South Australia. It is closely allied
to H. naevosa, Martyn, but may be distinguished from it by
being proportionately broader, by its more elevated and terraced
spire whorls and their more circular enrolment, and by the
coarse development and strong tubiform projection of the
perforations.

Catalogue of Marine Shells of Victoria. 181

Family Pleurotomariid^.
Genus Scissupella, d'Orbigny, 1823.

SCISSURELLA OBLIQUA, WatSOll.

1886. Scissurella obliqua, Watson. Chall. ZooL, vol.

XV., p. 116, pi. 8, f. 5.
1890. Scissurella obliqua, Pilsbry. Tiyon, Man. Conch.,
vol. xii., p. 58.
Hab. — Ocean Beach, Flinders ; Ocean Beach, Point Nepean ;
San Remo.

Obs. — Pilsbry in Tryon refers to plate 58, figures 20 and 21, for
this species, but it is not there, that plate being wholly occupied
by Fissurellidse. It seems probable that plate 65, figures 20 and
21, are copied from the Challenger Report, but unfortunately
there is no explanation of this plate in Tryon's volume xii., as
tlie I'eferences cease with plate 64.

Genus Schism ope, Jeffreys, 1856.

SCHISMOPE ATKINSONI, T. Woods.

1877. Scissurella atkinsoni, T. Woods. P.R.S. Tas., pp.

149, 150.

1878. Schismope atkinsoni, T. Woods. Id., p. 43.
1886. Schismope carinata, Watson. Chall. Zool., vol.

XV., p. 119, pi. 8, f 6.
1890. Schismope atkinsoni, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.,

vol. xii., p. 66.
1890. Schismope carinata, Pilsbry. Tryon, Id., p. 65.,
pi. 65, f. 17-19.
Hab. — Flinders, and dredged off" Rhyll, Western Port ; Cape
Schanck ; Puebla Coast.

Schismope beddomei, Petterd.

1884. Schismope beddomei, Petterd. Jour, of Conch.,

vol. iv., p. 139, No. 16.
1890. Schismope beddomei, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.,
vol. xii., p. 67.
Hab. — Flinders, Western Port.

182 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

SCHISMOPE PULCHRA, Petterd.

1884. Schisraope pulchra, Petterd. Jour, of Conch., vol.

iv., p. 139, No. 17.
1890. Schismope pulchra, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.,.

vol. xii., p. 68.
Hab.— Off Rhyll, Western Port.

Family Fissurellidae.
Genus Fissurella, Brugui^re, 1789.

FiSSURELLA OMICRON, Crosse and Fischer.

1864. Fissurella omicron, Crosse and Fischer. Jour. d.

Conch., p. 348.

1865. Fissurella omicron, Crosse and Fischer. Id., p. 41,

pi. 3, f. 4-6.
1890. Fissurella omicron, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch. ^
vol. xii., p. 174, pi. 22, £. 45-47.
Hab. — Portsea, Port Phillip ; Cowes, Phillip Island, Western
Port.

Genus Megatebennus, Pilsbry, 1890.

Megatebennus concatenata, Crosse and Fischer.

1864. Fissurella concatenata, Crosse and Fischer. Jour.

d. Conch., p. 348, pi. 3, f. 4-6.

1865. Fissurella concatenata, Crosse and Fischer. /</.,

p. 41, pi. 3, f. 1-3.
1882. Fissurellidaea concatenata, Tate. T.R.S. S.A.,

vol. v., p. 46.
1890. Megatebennus concatenata, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man.

Conch., vol. xii., p. 187, pi. 22, f. 40-42.
1893. Fissurellidaea concatenata, Adcock. Hand List
Aq. Moll. S.A., p. 9, No. 382.
Hab. — Port Phillip, relatively uncommon ; Western Port,
fairly common under rocks at low tide ; Anderson's Inlet and
Kilcunda (W. H. Ferguson).

Megatebennus trapezina, Sowerby.

1834. Fissurella trapezina, Sowerby. P.Z.S, Lond., p.
126.

Catalogue of Marine SJiells of Victoria. 183

Fissurella scutella, Gray. B.M. Cat., Fissurella,

No. 42.
1841. Fissurella scutelluin, 8owerhy. Conch. 111., p. 5,

No. 42, pi. 73, f. 34.
1849. Fissurella scutella, Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. vi.,

pi. 6, f. 33.
1866. Fissurellidaea scutella, Sowerby. Thes. Conch.,.

vol. iii., p. 203, pi. 244 (Genus, pi. 9), f. 207.
1878. Fissurella scutella, T. Woods. P.R.S. Tas., p. 44.
1890. Megatebennus trapezina, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man.

Conch., vol. xii., p. 188, pi. 62, f. 10-12.
1893. Fissurellidaea scutella, Adcock. Hand List Aq.

Moll. S.A., p. 9, No. 381.
1901. Fissurella (Megatebennus) scutella, Tate and May.

P.L.8. N.S.W., vol. xxvi., pt. 3, p. 408.
Hab. — Common Western Port; Sorrento to Portsea, Port
Phillip ; Kilcunda and Anderson's Inlet (W. H. Ferguson).

Genus Lucapinella, Pilsbry, 1890.

LucAPiNELLA NiORiTA, Sowerby.

1834. Fissurella nigrita, Sowerby. P.Z.S. Lend., p. 127.
1841. Fissurella nigrita, Sowerby. Conch. 111., p. 6,

No. 51, f. 47.
1849. Fissurella nigrita, Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. vi.,

pi. 6, f. 41.
1866. Fissurellidea nigrita, Sowerby. Thes. Conch., vol.

iii., p. 203, No. 7, pi. 243 (Genus, pi. 8), f. 196.
1878. Fissurella nigrita, T. Woods. P.R.S. Tas., p. 44.
1890. Megatebennus nigrita, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man.

Conch., vol. xii., p. 187, pi. 44, f. 97, 98.
1893. Fissurella nigrita, Adcock. Hand List Aq. Moll.

S.A., p. 9, No. 380.
1895. Lucapinella nigrita, Hedley. P.R.S. Vic, vol.

vii., U.S., pp. 197, 198, pi. 11, f. 1, 2, from

living specimen.
1897. Fissurella nigrita, Tate. T.R.S. S.A., vol. xxi.,

p. 43.
Hab. — Anderson's Inlet and Kilcunda (W. H. Ferguson),
Shoreham, West Head, Flinders, Western Port.

184 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

LucAPiNELLA pRiTCHARDi, Hedley.

1895. Lucapinella pritcharcH, Hedley. P.R.S. Vic, vol.
vii., n.s., pp. 198, 199, pi. 11, f. 3-7, shell,
auimal and radula.

Hab. — Port Phillip ; Western Port, alive under rocks at
■extreme low tide ; Kilcunda and Anderson's Inlet (W. H.
Ferguson).

Obs. — Professor Tate states, in a paper entitled " Critical
Remarks on some Australian Mollusca," in the Transactions of
the Royal Society of South Australia, 1897, Vol. XXI., p. 43,
that he regards this species as synonymic with F. nigrita, an
•opinion with which we cannot agree, for Hedley's shell is
consistently more elongate, apart from other distinctive features.
In the recent " Revised Census of the Marine Mollusca of
Tasmania," by Tate and May, 1901, the above is, however, not
included as a synonym of F. nigrita.

Mr. Hedley, in the course of correspondence, has stated that
lie thinks this species may be F. oblonga, Menke, Moll. Nov.
Holl., p. 33, No. 181 ; but, on the other hand, in Professor Tate's
paper in the Linnaean Society of New South Wales, Vol. VI.,
p. 401, on Menke's Australian Shells, that author republishes
Menke's original description and appends a note that F. oblonga
is probably F. scutella. Gray.

Genus MaCPOchisma, Swainson, 1840.

Macrochisma tasmaniae, Sowerby.

1841. Fissurella macroschisma, Sowerby. Conch. 111.,

p. 5, No. 45, pi. 73, f. 39, 39*.
1850. Fissurella macrochisma, Sowerby. P.Z.S. Lond.,

p. 202.
1866. Macrochisma tasmaniae, Sowerby. Thes. Conch.,

vol. iii., p. 206, pi. 244 (Genus, pi. 9), f. 223.

1876. Macroschisma tasmanica, T. Woods. P.R.S. Tas.,

p. 157.

1877. Macroschisma weldii, T. Woods. P.R.S. Tas., p.

156.
1890. Macroschisma tasmaniae, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man.
Conch., vol. xii., p. 191, pi. 59, f. 52, 53, 54.

Catalogue of Marine Shells of Victoria. 185

1890. Macroschisma weldii, Pilsbry. Tryon, Id., \A. 59,
f. 33, 34, 35.
Hab. — Portsea, Port Phillip ; Flinders to Balnarring, San
Remo, Western Port; Greelong (Nat. Mus.) ; Kilcunda and
Anderson's Inlet (W. H. Ferguson).

Macrochisma producta, a. Adams.

1850. Macrochisma producta, A. Adams. P.Z.S. Lond.,
p. 202.

1865. Macrochisma producta, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p.

185.

1866. Macrochisma producta, Sowerby. Thes. Conch.,

vol. iii., p. 205, No. 5, pi. 244 (Genus, pi. 9),
f. 224.
1890. Macroschisma producta, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man.
Conch., vol. xii., p. 194, pi. 59, f. 62.
Hab. — Front beach Sorrento, Port Phillip ; Flinders, Western
Port.

Genus Fissupidea, Swainson, 1840.

FissuRiDEA lineata, Sowerby.

1841. Fissurella lineata, Sowerby. Conch. 111., p. 7, pi.

78, £. 68.
1850. Fissurella incii. Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. vi., pi,

10, f. 69a, b.
1866. Fissurella lineata, Sowerby. Thes. Conch., vol.

iii., p. 195, No. 80, pi. 241, £. 134, 135.
1890. Glyphis lineata, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.,
vol. xii., p. 219, pi. 63, f. 29, 30, and pi. 38,
f. 63, 64.
1900. Fissuridea lineata, Hedley. P.L.S. N.S.W., vol.
XXV., pt. 1, p. 95, pi. 3, f. 11.
Hab. — Sandringham, Mornington, and Sorrento, Port Phillip ;
Kilcunda, Cape Patterson (W. H. Ferguson).

Obs. — This species used to be set out in the National Museum,
Melbourne, as Fissurella McCoyi, T. Woods, type from Brighton,
but, as is the case with some others of his species, we have been

unable to find any published figure or description.

7a

186 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Vietoria.

Genus Puncturella, Lowe, 1827.
PuNCTURELLA HARRissoNi, Beddome.

1883. Cemori harrissoni, Beddome. P.R.S. Tas., p. 168,.

No. 11.
1890. Puncturella harrissoni. Pilsbry. Try on, Man..

Conch., vol. xii., p. 294.
1894. Puncturella henniana, Brazier. P.L.S; N.S.W.,.

vol. ix., 2nd series, p. 177, pi. 14, f. 14.
1894. Puncturella harrisoni, Brazier. Id., p. 699,.
No. 11.
Hab. — ^Flinders, and dredged off Rhyll, Western Port.
Obs. — ^Brazier himself admits after examining Mr. Beddome's-
types that his species is identical.

Genus Emarginula, Lamarck, 1801.

Emarginula CANDIDA, A. Adanis.

1851. Emarginula Candida, A. Adams. P.Z.S. Lond.,.

p. 85, No. 30.
1863. Emarginula Candida, Sowerby. Thes. Conch., voL

iii., p. 213, pi. 11, f. 4.5, 46.

1873. Emarginula Candida, Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol.

xix., pi. 7, f. 45.
1890. Emarginula Candida, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.,
vol. xii., p. 258, pi. 28, f. 36.
Hab. — Fairly common in Port Phillip and Western Port ;.
Anderson's Inlet and Kilcunda (W. H. Ferguson); Cape Otvvay;.
Warrnambool ; Portland.

Obs. — Emarginula tenuicostata, Sowerby, in Thesaurus Conchy-
liorum, p. 215, figures 17 and 18, habitat unknown, appears to-
us as likely to represent a form of the above species.

Emarginula dilecta, A. Adams.

1851. Emarginula dilecta, A. Adams. P.Z.S. Lond.,.

p. 85, No. 28.
1863. Emarginula dilecta. Sowerby. Thes. Conch.,.

vol. iii., p. 211, pi. 11, f. 5.

1874. Emarginula dilecta. Reeve. Conch. Icon., voL

xix., pi. 4, f. 23,

•Catalogue of Marine SJiells of Victoria. 187

1890. Emarginula dilecta, Pilsbiy. Tryon, Man. Conch.,
vol. xii., p. 265, pi. 28, f. 17.
Hab. — Port Phillip; Western Port; Puebla Coast; Anderson's
Inlet (W. H. Ferguson).

Genus Subemarginula, Blaimiile, 1825.

SUBEMARGINULA EMARGINATA, BlaiuviUe.

1825. Emarginula emarginata, Blainville. Malac, p.

501, pi. 48 bis., f. 3.
1834. Emarginula australis, Quoy and Gaimard.
Astrolabe Zool., vol. iii., p. 328, pi. 68, f.
11-12.
1839. Emarginula emarginata, Lamarck. Anim. S.
Vert. (3rd ed. Deshayes and Edwards), vol.
iii., p. 215.
1863. Emarginula australis, Sowerby. Thes. Conch.,
vol. iii., p. 217, pi. 247, f. 67, and pi. 248,
f. 94.
1873. Emarginula australis. Reeve. Conch. Icon. vol.

xix., pi. 3, f. 19.
1890. Subemarginula emarginata, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man.

Conch., vol. xii., p. 276, pi. 64, f. 23-26.
1890. Subemarginula austi*alis, , Pilsbry. Id., p. 278,
pi. 29, f. 1-3.
Hab. — Western Port; Kilcunda and Anderson's Inlet (W. H.
Ferguson); Portland.

Obs. — We think it likely that E. tasmaniae, Sowerby, and E.
cumingii, Sowerby, should be included as synonyms of the above
species on account of the great amount of variation it usually
exhibits. It may be noted that figure 3 in Tryon is duplicated
on plate 64; in the explanation of the plate the figure of this
shell is referred to as 23, and again in the text as figure 3.

•Subemarginula rugosa, Quoy and Gaimard.

1834. Emarginula rugosa, Quoy and Gaimard. Astro-
labe Zool., vol. iii., p. 331, pi. 68, f. 17-18.

1836. Emarginula rugosa, Lamarck. Anim. S. Vert,
(ed. Desh.), vol. vii., p. 585, No. 7.

188 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

1837. Hemitonia rugosa, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p. 219.
1839. Emarginula rugosa, Lamarck, Anim. S. Vert.

(3rd ed. Deshayes and Edwards), vol. iii., p.

215, No. 7.
1842. Emarginula conoidea, Reeve. Conch. Syst., vol.

ii., p. 23, pi. 140, f. 7.
1851. Clypidina Candida, A. Adams. P.Z.S. Lond., No.

11, p. 88.
1863. Emarginula rugo.sa, Sowerby. Thes. Conch., vol.

iii., p. 58, pi. 248, £. 92, 93 and 95-97, 100-

102.

1874. Emarginula rugosa. Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol.

xix., pi. 1, f. 1.

1875. Emarginula (Hemitonia) rugosa, Woodward.

Man. Moll., p. 274, pi. 11, f. 7, 8.

1886. Emat'ginula (Hemitonia) rugosa, Watson. Chall.

Zool., vol. XV., p. 35.

1887. Emarginula (Subeuiarginula) rugosa, Fischer.

Man. Conch., p. 860, pi. 11, f. 7, 8.
1890. Subemarginula (Clypidina) rugosa, Pilsbry. Tryon^
Man. Conch., vol. xii., p. 278, pi. 64, f. 39-41,
and pi. 29, f. 10, 11.
Hab. — Anderson's Inlet and Kilcunda (W. H. Ferguson);.
Western Port ; Port Phillip ; Puebla Coast ; Airey's Inlet ;.
Cape Otway ; Warriiambool ; Portland.

Genus Scutus, Montfort, 1810.

ScUTUS ANATlNUS, Donovan.

1817. Parmophorus elongatus, de Blainville (uon

Lamarck). Bull. 8oc. Philom., Paris, p. 25.
1820. Patella anatina, Donovan. In Rees' Encycl., vol.
v., Nat. Hist, plates, Conchology, pi. 16.
Parmophorus elongatus, de Blainville. Diet. Sc.
Nat., vol. xxxvii., p. 557.
(?) 1825. Parmophorus elongatus, de Blainville. Malac.,.
pi. 48, f. 2, 2a.
1822. Parmophorus australis, Lamarck. Anim. S. Vert.,.
1st ed., vol. vi., pt. 2., p. 5.

Catalogue o) Marine SJtells of Victoria. 189

1834. Parmophorus australis, Quoy and Gaimard.

Astrolabe Zool., vol. iii., p, 321, pi. 69, f. 1-4.
1834. Parmophorus convexus, Quoy and Gaimard. Id.,

p. 322, pi. 69, f. 5-16.
1836. Parmophorus australis, Lamarck. Anim. S. Vert.,

2nd ed., vol. vii., p. 579.
1839. Parmophorus australis, Lamarck. Id. (3rd ed.

Deshayes and Edwards), vol. iii., p. 213,

No. 1.
1842. Parmophorus australis. Reeve. Conch. Syst., vol.

ii., pi. 139, f. 2, 3.
1851. Scutus unguis, A. Adams (non Linn.). P.Z.S.

Lond., p. 221.
1860. Parmophorus australis, Chenu. Man. Conch., vol.

i., p. 373, f. 2801.
1860. Parmophoius australis, Reeve. Elements of

Conch., vol. ii., p. 28, pi. M., f. 2.
1863. Scutus elongatus, Adams and Sowerby. Thes.

Conch., vol. iii., pt. 22, pi. 248, f. 1, 2.

1867. Scutus elongatus, Angas. P.Z.S, Lond., p. 219,

No. 212.

1868. Parmophorus australis, Hogg. Trans. Micro. Soc,

Lond., vol. xvi., pi. 12, f. 57 (the dentition).
1870. Scutus elongatus, Reeve., Conch. Icon., vol. xvii.,

pi. 1, f. la, \/>.
1875. Parmophorus australis, Woodward. Man. Moll.,.

p. 274, pi. 11, f. 9.
1879. Scutus anatinus, E. A. Smith. Jour. Conch., vol.

ii., Aug., p. 257.
1883. Parmophorus australis. Try on. Struct, and Syst.

Conch., vol. ii., p. 329, pi. 83, f. 21.

1886. Emargiiiula (Scutus) anatinus, Watson. Chalk

Zook, vol. XV., pp. 35, 36, No. 3.

1887. Scutum australe, Fischer. Man. de Conch., p.

861, f. 606, and pi. 11, f. 9.
1890. Scutus anatinus, Pilsbry in Tryon. Man. Conch.,
vol. xii., p. 288, pk 40, f. 1, 2, 3.
Hab. — Back Beach, Sorrento, to Cape Schanck and Flinders.
Common under rocks at low tide Western Port, in all stages ot

190 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

growth from less than a quarter of an inch in length up to i^
inches in length. Kilcunda and Anderson's Inlet (W. H.
Ferguson) ; Port Phillip.

Genus Tugalia, Gray, 1844.

TuGALlA PARMOPHOIDEA, Quoy and Gaimard.

1834. Emarginula parmophoidea, Quoy and Gaimard.

Astrolabe Zool., vol. iii., p. 325, pi. 68, f. 15,

16.
1836. Emarginula parmophoidea, Lamarck. Anim. S.

Vert. (2nd ed. Desh.), vol. vii., p. 583, sp. 3.
1839. Emarginula parmophoidea, Lamarck. Anim. S.

Vert. (3rd ed. Deshayes and Edwards), vol.

iii., p. 215, No. 3.
1842. Parmophorus intermedins, Eeeve. P.Z.S. Lond.,

p. 50.

1842. Parmophorus intermedius, Reeve. Conch. Syst.,

vol. ii., pi. 139, f. 5, 6.

1843. Tugalia elegans. Gray. DiefFenbach's IST.Z., vol.

ii., p. 240.
1851. Tugali parmophoroidea, A. Adams. P.Z.S. Lond.,

p. 89, No. 5.
1851. Tugali intermedia, A. Adams. Id., p. 88, No. 2.
1863. Tugalia parmophoridea, Sowerby. Thes. Conch.,

vol. iii., pt. 22, p. 221, sp. 1, pi. 248, or Gen.

15, f. 5, 11, 16.
1863. Tugalia ossea, Adams and Sowerby (non Gould).

Thes. Conch., vol. iii., p. 221, pi. 249, f. 18.
1863. Tugalia cinerea, Adams and Sowerby (non Gould).

Id., p. 221, pi. 249, f. 15, 17.
1865. Tugalia parmophoridea, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p.

^ 185, No. 194.
1870. Tugalia parmophoridea, Reeve. Conch. Icon., pi.

1, f. 4 fl, b.
1873. Tugalia parmaplioroides, Hutton. Cat. N.Z.

Moll., p. 43, No. 194.
1873. Emarginula (Tugalia) parmophoroides, von

Martens. Crit. List N.Z. Moll., p. 35.

Catalogue of Marine Shells of Victoria. 191

1877. Tugalia tasmanica, T. Woods. P.R.S. Tas., p.

156.

1878. Tugalia australis, T. Woods. Id., p. 44.

1880. Tugalia parmophoidea, Hutton. Man. N.Z. Moll.,

p. 106.
1883. Tugalia intermedia, Brazier. P.L.S. N.S.W.,

vol. viii., p. 227.
1886. Emarginula (Tugalia) parmophoidea, Watson.

Chall. Zool., vol. XV., p. 35, No. 1.
1890. Subemarginula (Tugalia) parmophoidea, Pilsbry.

Tryon, Man. Conch., vol. xii., p. 285, pi. 43,

f. 78-80.
1890. Subemarginula (Tugalia) intermedia, Pilsby. Id.,

f. 83, 84.
Hab. — Western Port ; Anderson's Inlet (W. H. Ferguson) ;
Port Phillip.

Family Patellidae.

Genus Patella, Linnaeus, 1757.

Patella tramoserica, Martyn.

1784. Patella tramoserica, Martyn. Univ. Conch., vol.

i., pi. 16.
1795. Patella tramoserica, Chemnitz. Conch. Cab., vol.

xi., p. 179, p. 197, f, 1912, 1913.
1836. Patella tramoserica, Lamarck. Anim. S. A^ert.

(2nd ed. Desh.), vol. vii., p. 542, sp. 47.
1839. Patella tramoserica, Lamarck, /d. (3rd ed. Des-

hayes and Edwards), vol. iii., p. 199, No. 47.
1848. Patella diemenensis, Philippi. Zeit., f. Malak., p,

162.
1852. Patella tramoserica, Gould. U.S. Expl. Exped.,

vol. xii., Mollusca, p. 343.
1854. Patella tramoserica, Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol.

viii., pi. 13, f. 27a.
1854. Patella variegata. Reeve. /d., pi. 16, f. 36^;, d, c.
1867. Patella tramoserica, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p. 221,

No. 222.
1873. Patella tramoserica, Hutton. Cat. N.Z. Moll., p.

44, No. 202.

192 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

1878. Patella tramoserica, T. Woods. P.R.S. Tas., p

45.

1879. Patella tramoserica, T. Woods. P.R.S. Tas., p.

45.

1880. Patella tramoserica, Hutton. Man. N.Z. MoU.^

p. 109.
1884. Patella tramoserica, Hutton. P.L.S. N.S.W., vol.

ix., p. 377.
1886. Patella tramoserica, Watson. Chall. Zool., vol.

XV., pp. 27, 28.
1891. Helcioniscus tramoserica, Pilsbry in Try on. Man.

Conch., vol. xiii., p. 142, pi. 70, f. 49-52.
1891. Helcioniscus melanostomus, Pilsbry. Id., p. 151,.

pi. 32, f. 67-69.
1891. Patella diemensis, Pilsbry. Id., p. 155.
1893. Helcionsiscus tramoserica, Brazier. P.L.S. N.S.W.,
vol. viii., 2nd ser., pt. 1, p. 119.
Hab.- — ^A very common species on the rocks at all parts of our
coast.

Obs. — This common form, though showing considerable varia-
tion in height, colour, and outline, is, nevertheless, easy of iden-
tification. The figures quoted by Reeve, viz., f. 27, a, b, c, we
cannot agree with, being only able to accept f. Tin as representing:
this species. Mr. Brazier in his paper to the Linnaean Society
of New South Wales, pp. 119, 120, discusses the various erron-
eous localities given by various authors for this species, and also-
discusses the probability of P. antipodum, E. A. Smith, being
identical.

Patella limbata, Philippi.

1819. Patella limbata, Philippi. Abbild. uud Besch,

Conch., vol. iii., p. 71, pi. 3, f. 2.
1854. Patella limbata. Reeve. Concli. Icon., vol. viii.,

pi. 13, f. 29^, 29/a
1865. Patella limbata, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p. 185.
1876. Patella limbata, T. Woods. P.R.S. Tas., p. 48.
1878. Patella limbata, T. Woods. Id., p. 45.
1891. Helcioniscus limbata, Pilsbry in Tryon. Man.

Conch., vol. xiii., p. 143, pi. 71, f. 53-56, and

pi. 17, f. 28, 29.
Hab.— Cape Otway (G.B.P.).

Catalogue of Marine Shells of Victoria. 193-

Patella ustulata, Reeve.

1855. Patella ustulata, Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. viii.,.
pi. 31, f. 88a, />.

1876. Patella tasmanica, T. Woods. P.R.S. Tas., p. 157.

1877. Patella ustulata, T. Woods. Id., p. 43.

1878. Patella ustulata, T. Woods. Id., p. 45.
1878. Patella tastnanica, T. Woods. Id., p. 45.

1891. Patella (Scutellastra) ustulata, Pilsbry in Tryon.

Man. Conch., vol. xiii., p. 101, pi. 22, f. 11,

12.

Hab. — Coast near Gellibrand River ; Otway Coast ; Back

Beach, vSorrento ; Kilcunda and Anderson's Inlet (W. H.

Ferguson) ; Western Port ; Port Phillip.

Patella aculeata. Reeve.

1855. Patella aculeata, Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. viii.,

pi. 32, f. 90.
1855. Patella squamifera. Reeve. Id., pi. 32, f. 94.
1867. Patella aculeata, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p. 221,

No. 224.
1867. Patella squamifera, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p. 221,.

No. 225.
1878. Patella aculeata, T. Woods. P.R.S. Tas., p. 45.
1883. Patella aculeata, Brazier. P.L.S. N.S.W., vol.

viii., p. 224.
1891. Patella (Scutellastra) aculeata, Pilsbry in Tryon.

Man. Conch., vol. xiii., p. 100, pi. 25, f. 20,

21, and pi. 62, f. 71-73.
Hab.— Otway Coast; Apollo Bay; Western Port ; Anderson's
Inlet (W. H. Ferguson) ; Back Beach, Sorrento.

Patella ciiapmani, T. Woods.

1876. Patella chapmani, T. Woods. P.R.S. Tas.. p. 157.

1877. Acmaea alba, T. Woods. Id., pp. 155, 156.
1891. Patella chapmani, Pilsbry in Tryon. Man. Conch.,.

vol. xiii., p. 101.
1891. Acmaea alba, Pilsbry. Id., p. 54, pi. 42, f. 76-78.
Hab. — Flinders, San Remo, Western Port ; Portsea, Port
Phillip.

194 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Obs. — Our commonest form is that described by T. Woods
■under the name of Acmaea alba, but we have been unable to
• distinguish this from Patella chapmani, except that the latter
shows a more striking development of the radial ribs, which
project over the margin and give the shell a more stellate appear-
ance, but with a good series of specimens there can be no doubt
about their connection.

Patella hepatica, Pritchard and Gatliff, nom. mut.

1891. Acmaea striata, Pilsbry (non Quoy and Gaimard).

Man. Conch., vol. xiii., p. 47, pi. 35, f. 27, 28,

29.

Hab. — Back Beach, Sorrento; Western Port, Flinders and

San Remo ; Anderson's Inlet and Kilcunda (W. H. Ferguson) ;

Apollo Bay.

Obs. — The shell as figured by Pilsbry agrees well with our
species, but we have Ijeen unable to see its identity with Acmaea
striata, Quoy and Gaimard, and we have not been able to make
out any other identification, so that it appeared to us necessary
to treat it in the above manner.

Patella perplexa, Pilsbry.

1891. Acmaea saccharina, var. perplexa, Pilsbry, Tryon.
Man. Conch., vol. xiii., p. 50, pi. 36, f. 69-71.
Hab.— Port Phillip.

Obs. — Our specimens agree well with Pilsbry's figui'e and
description and indicates a well-marked stellate form. There has
been some confusion of this form with P. saccharina, Lin., and
P. stellaris, Quoy and Gaimard, which we regard as quite distinct
from the above.

Family Acmaeidae,

Genus Acmaea, Eschscholtz, 1828.

Acmaea costata, Sowerby.

1839. Lottia costata, Sowerby. Beechey's voy., Zool.,

p. 147, pi. 39, f. 2.
1865. Patella alticostata, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p. 56,
pi. 2. f. 11.

Catalogue of Marine Shells of Victoria. 195

1867. Patella costata, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p. 221.

1877. Acmaea costata, T. Woods. P.R.S. Tas., p. .50.

1878. Acmaea costata, T. Woods. Id., p. 44, 45.
1891. Acmaea costata, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.,.

vol. xiii., p. 51, pi. 36, f. 72-77.
Hab. — A very common species along our coast generally,
usually the largest form of the genus obtained.

Acmaea conoidea, Quoy and Gaimard.

1834. Patelloida conoidea, Quoy and Gaimard. Astro-
labe ZooL, vol. iii., p. 355, pi. 71, f. 5, 7.
1839. Patelloida conoidea, Lamarck. Anim. S. Vert.
(3rd ed. Deshayes and Edwards), vol. iii., p.
203, No. 9.
1865. Acmaea conoidea, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p. 186.
1891. Acmaea conoidea, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.,
vol. xiii., p. 53, pi. 37, f. 84, 85.
Hab. — Barwon Heads ; Port Phillip ; Cape Otway.
Obs. — The above references might at first sight appear very
meagre, but we have purposely omitted a large number on
account of erroneous identifications. The above should serve to
enable this species to be clearly identified.

Acmaea septiformis, Quoy and Gaimard.

1834. Patelloida septiformis, Quoy and Gaimard. Astro-
labe ZooL, vol. iii., p. 362, pi. 71, f. 43, 44.
1839. Patelloida septiformi.s, Lamarck. Anim. S. Vert.

(3rd ed. Deshayes and Edwards), vol. iii., p.

202.
1855. Patella cantharus. Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. viii.,

pi. 40, f. 131.
1865. Acmaea scabrilirata, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p.

154, and p. 186, No. 201.
1867. Tectura septiformis, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p.

220, No. 219.
1877. Acmaea septiformis, T. Woods. P.R.S. Tas., p.

50.
1877. Acmaea petterdi, T. Woods. Id., p. 155.
1891. Acmaea petterdi, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.^

vol. xiii., p. 54.

J 96 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

1891. Acmaea septifoniiis, Pilsbry. Id., p. 55, pi. 37,

f. 93, 94.
1891. Acmaea cantharus, Pilsbry. Id., p 55, pi. 37. f.

1,2.
1891. Acmaea scabrilirata, Pilsbcy. Id., p. 56.
Hab. — Coast generally.

_AcMAEA FLAMMEA, Quoy and Gaimard.

1834. Patelloida flammea, Quoy and Gaimard. Astro-
labe Zool, vol. iii., p. 354, pi. 71, f. 15, 16.
1839. Patelloida flammea, Lamarck. Anim. S. Vert.

(3rd ed. Deshayes and Edwards), vol. iii., p.

203.
1855. Patella mixta. Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. viii., pi.

39, f. 129.7, 129^.
1855. Patella jaok.soniensis. Reeve (non Lesson). Id.,

pi. 39, f. 127rt, 127^
1865. Acmaea subundulata, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p.

155, and p. 186, No. 202.
1867. Tectura subundulata, Angas. Id., p. 220, No.

218.
1867. Tectura jacksoniensis, Angas. Id., p. 220.

1877. Acmaea crucis, T. Woods. P.R.S. Tas., p. 52.

1878. Acmaea crucis, T. Woods. Id., p. 53.

1891. Acmaea flammea, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.,

vol. xiii., p. 57, pi. 37, f. 78-83.
1891. Acmaea jacksoniensis, Pilsbry. Id., p. 58, pi. 42,

f. 71-75.
1891. Acmaea jacksoniensis, var. mixta, Pilsbry. Id.,

p. 58, pi. 35, f. 32, 33.
1891. Acmaea crucis, Pilsbry. Id., p. 58, pi. 37, f. 12,
13, and 17-19.
Hab. — Sandringham, Port Phillip ; Western Port ; Cape
•^Otway.

Obs. — This species has apparently been made out to be Acmaea
cruciata, Lin., by Professor Tate and Mr. May, but upon what
basis we do not know. Pilsbry says of Patella cruciata, Lin.,
that it is a brown shell with a white cross, and he figures a shell
of this character, but there is also a remark apparently to be

Catalogue of Marine Sliells of Victoria. 197

attributed to Hanley, that when the shell is worn it is white
with a brown cross. We are unable to i*econcile these remarks
and fail to see that such changes would take place. Our shell is
white, with usually a well-marked brown cross, and wear, if
anything, only tends to intensify the contrast. Perhaps ifc is
synonymy or supposed synonymy that is responsible for the
identification of A. cruciata, for Pilsbry says that Patella insignis,
Menke, is probably only a synonym of that species. Menke,
however, was not of that opinion, for he distinctly notes the
affinity of his species to the Linnaean neglected species P.
cruciata. Whether Menke's species may or may not come in as
a synonym of A. flammea, Quoy and Gaimard is not quite certain,
but we think it not unlikely.

AcMAEA CALAMUS, Crosse and Fischer.

1864. Patella calamus, Crosse and Fischer. Jour. d.

Conch., p. 348.

1865. Patella calamus, Crosse and Fischer, Id., p. 42,

pi. 3, f. 7, 8.
1865. Acmaea calamus, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p. 186.
1891. Acmaea calamus, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.,

vol. xiii., p. 54, pi. 37, f. 3, 4.
Hab.— Port Phillip ; Western Port.

Acmaea gealei, Angas.

1865. Patella gealei, Angas. P.Z.S. Lend., p. 57, and

p. 186, No. 198.
1865. Patella latistrigata, Angas. Id., p. 154, and 186,

No. 196fl.

1876. Acmaea marmorata, T, Woods. P.R.S. Tas., pp.

156, 157.

1877. Acmaea marmorata, T. Woods. Id., p. 53.
1891. Acamea marmorata, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man.

Conch., vol. xiii., p. 52. pi. 42, f. 66-70.

Hab. — Sandringham, Sorrento, Portsea, Port Phillip; Back
Beach, Sorrento, and Cape Schanck ; Cape Otway ; Kilcunda
to Cape Patterson (W. H. Ferguson).

Obs. — We have to thank Mr. E. Ashby for assistance in the
loan of South Australian specimens of Angas' species, which have
enabled us to arrive at the above conclusion.

198 Proceedings of ihe Royal Society of Victoria.

Order POLYPLACOPHORA.

Family Lkpidopleuridae.

Genus Lepidopleurus, Risso, 1826.

Lepidoplburus inquinatus, Reeve.

1847. Chiton inquinatus, Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. iv.,

pi. 23, f. 154.
1864. Lepidopleurus liratus, Adams and Angas. P.Z S.

Lond., p. 192.

1892. Ischnochiton inquinatus, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man.

Conch., vol xiv., p. 90, pi. 18, f. 49, .50.

1893. Lepidopleurus liratus, Pilsbry. Id.^ vol. xv., p.

101.

1896. Lepidopleurus inquinatus, Sykes. Malac' Soc.

Lond., vol. ii.. No. 2, p. 86, pi. 6, f. 4.

1897. Lepidopleurus inquinatus, Bednall. P. Malac. Soc,

Lond., vol. ii., No. 4, p. 141.

1898. Lepidopleurus inquinatus, Suter. Trans. N.Z.

Inst., vol. xxxi., p. 60.

Hab.— Port Phillip ; Port Phillip Heads (J. B. Wilson) ;
Ocean Beach, Phillip Island ; Hobson's Bay (W. T. Bednall).

Obs. — Reeve's type originally came from Tasmania, and Mr.
Sykes when dealing with a collection of our Port Phillip Poly-
placophora mentions that he had the opportunity of handling
Reeve's specimens, and so had no doubt about the identification.
Bednall in his paper on the South Australian Polyplacophora
mentions a specimen which, by comparison with the types, proved
to be conspecific with Reeve's C. inquinatus, after having been
submitted to Mr. Pilsbry.

Family Ischnochitoxidae.
Genus Callochiton, Gray, 1847.

Callochiton platessa, Gould.

1846. Chiton platessa, Gould. Proc. Best. Soc, N.H.,

vol. ii., p. 143.

1847. Chiton crocinus, Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. iv.,

pi. 22, f. 146.

Catalogue of Marine Shells of Victoria. 199

1852. Chiton versicolor, A. Adams. P.Z.S. Lorid., p,
92, pi. 16, f. 5.

1856. Chiton platessa, Gould. U.S. Explor. Exped., p.
320, atlas, pi. 431.

1862. Lepidopleura platessa, Gould. Otia Conch. (Rec-
tifications), p. 242.

1867. Leptochiton versicolor, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p.
223.

1886. Callochiton platessa, Haddon. Chall. Zool., vol.
XV., p. 15.

1892. Callochiton platessa, Pilsbry. Tryon Man. Conch.,
vol. xiv., pp. 49, 50, pi. 10, f. 1-5.

1892. Callochiton crocinus, Pilsbry. /d., p. 50, pi. 10,

f. 7.

1893. Callochiton crocinus, Pilsbry. Id., vol. xv., p. 67.

1894. Callochiton platessa, Pilsbry. P. Acad. Nat. Sci.

Philad., p. 71.

1896. Callochiton platessa, Sykes. P. Malac. Soc. Lond.,

vol. ii.. No. 2, p. 86.

1897. Callochiton platessa, Bednall. Id., vol. ii.. No. 4,.

p. 141.

1898. Callochiton platessa, Suter. Trans. N.Z. Inst.,.

vol. xxxi., p. 60.

Hab.— Port Phillip Heads (J. B. Wilson).

Obs. — Mr. Sykes states that from his examination of the
specimens in the British Museum, he can make no specific
distinction between C. platessa, Gould, and C. ci'ocinus, Reeve.
This also was Pilsbry 's first opinion, but subsequently he appears
to regard C. crocinus as a good species. Some erroneous refer-
ences have been made to the plate in Gould's Exploring Expedi-
tion, and, as Pilsbry notes, the plate is wrongly numbered in
that work, it should be 431 and not 434.

Lepidopleurus empleurus, Hutton, is included in the synonymy
by Mr. Sykes, but on the other hand Mr. Suter regards this as a
good species on account of the presence of " a I'ow of deep longi-
tudinal pits in front of lateral areas," and as the types are acces-
sible to him he should be best able to judge.

200 rroceedlngs of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Genus Ischnochiton, Gray, 1847.

IscHNOCHlTON JULOIDES, Adams and Angas.

1864. Stenochiton juloides, Adams and Angas. P.Z.S.

Lond., p. 193.

1865. Stenochiton juloides, Adams and Angas. /d., p.

58, pi. 11, f. 15.
1865. Stenochiton juloides, Angas. Id., p. 188.
1892. Ischnochiton (Stenochiton) juloides, Pilsbry.

Tryon, Man. Conch., vol. xiv., p. 55, pi. 16, f.

6-8.

1896. Ischnochiton (Stenochiton) juloides, Sykes. P.

Malac. Soc. Lond., vol. ii., No. 2, pp. 86, 87.

1897. Ischnochiton (Stenochiton) juloides, Bednall. Jd.,

vol. ii., No. 4, p. 142, pi. xii., f. 1, a, b, c, d,
also figured in text.
Hab.— Port Phillip Heads (J. B. Wilson).

Ischnochiton cariosus, Pilsbry.

1892. Ischnochiton (Heterozona) cariosus, Pilsbry.

Tryon, Man. Conch., vol. xiv., p. 65, pi. 24,
f. 20-23.

1893. Ischnochiton (Heterozona) cariosus, Pilsbry. Id.,

vol. XV., p. 82, pi. 14, f. 8.

1896. Ischnochiton (Heterozona) cariosus, Sykes. P.

Malac. Soc. Lond., vol. ii., No. 2, p. 87.

1897. Ischnochiton (Heterozona) cariosus, Bednall, Id.,

vol. ii.. No. 4, p. 143.

Hab.— Port Phillip Heads (J. B. Wilson) ; Flinders, Western
Port ; Port Fairy (W. T. Bednall).

Obs. — Mr. Bednall, in his paper on the South Australian
Polyplacophora, appears to have overlooked Mr. Sykes' previous
record of this species from Port Phillip Heads, but records it
from Port Fairy, where he notes that the species "attains a
large size."

Ischnochiton cbispus. Reeve.

1847. Chiton cri-spus, Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. iv., pi.
19, f. 120.

Catalogue of Marine Shells of Victoria. 201

1892. Ischnochiton crispus, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man.

Conch., vol. xiv., p. 89, pi. 24, f. 98, 99.
1892. Ischnochiton haddoni, Pilsbry. Id., p. 88, pi. 22,

f. 67-73.

1894. Ischnochiton haddoni, Pilsbry. P. Acad. Nat.

Sci. Philad., p. 71.

1895. Ischnochiton crispus, Pilsbry, Nautilus, vol. viii.,

p. 129.

1896. Ischnochiton crispus, Sykes. P. Malac. Soc,

Lond., vol. ii., No. 2, p. 87.

1897. Ischnochiton crispus, Bednall. Id., vol. ii., No. 4,

p. 145.

Hab. — Port Phillip Heads (J. B. Wilson); very common on
the rocks at low tide in Port Phillip and Western Port generally;
Port Fairy (W. T. Bednall).

Obs. — This is an extremely variable form, especially in colour
markings, Mr. Sykes has proposed the varietal name of decorata
for one of the extreme forms. This species has been confused
by several authors with Ischnochiton longicymba, Blainville,
from New Zealand, but it is quite distinct from that form. Mr.
Bednall mentions some of the main points of diiference between
these two species in his paper above quoted.

Ischnochiton tateanus, Bednall.

1896. Ischnochiton tateanus, Sykes. P. Malac. Soc.

Lond., vol. ii.. No. 2, p. 87.

1897. Ischnochiton tateanus, Bednall. Id., vol. ii., No.

4, pp. 147, 148, pi. 12, f. 3, a, b, c, d, also
figured in text.
Hab.— Port Phillip Heads (J. B. Wilson).

Ischnochiton contractus, Reeve.

1847. Chiton contractus. Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. iv.,

pi. 15, f. 78.
1847. Chiton pallidus. Reeve. Id., pi. 16, f. 92.
1892. Ischnochiton contractus, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man.

Conch., vol. xiv., p. 93, pi. 23, f. 81, 82.
1892. Ischnochiton pallidus, Pilsbry. Id., p. 89, pi. 23,

f. 91.

Sa

202 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

1895. Ischnochiton contractus, Pilsbry. Nautilus, voL

viii., p. 129.

1896. Ischnochiton contractus, Sykes. P. Malac. See.

Lond., vol. ii., No. 2, pp. 87, 88.

1897. Ischnochiton contractus, Bednall. Id., vol. ii.,.

No. 4, pp. 145, 146.

Hab. — A nice series from Port Phillip Heads (J. B. Wilson) -
Port Fairy (\V. T. Bednall) ; Western Port.

Obs. — Mr. Bednall mentions some difficulty in running I.
contractus and I. pallidus together, but in view of Mr. Sykes*^
clear statement — " I have carefully compared the original tablets
in the British Museum, and am unable to separate I. contractus
and I pallidus" — which was accepted by Mr. Pilsbry, there
should be no doubt about the matter.

Ischnochiton ustulatus, Reeve.

1847. Chiton ustulatus, Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. iv.,.

pi. 17, f. 102.
1867. Lepidopleurus ustulatus, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond.,

p. 222.
1892. Ischnochiton ustulatus, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man.

Conch., vol. xiv., p. 96, pi. 24, f. 100, 1-4,.

11, 12.

1896. Ischnochiton ustulatus, Sykes. P. Malac. Soc

Lond., vol. ii., No. 2, p. 88.

1897. Ischnochiton ustulatus, Bednall. Id., vol. ii.. No.

4, p. 144.
Hab.— Port Phillip Heads (J. B. Wilson).

Ischnochiton pura, Sykes.

1896. Ischnochiton (Haploplax) pura, Sykes. P. Malac.
Soc. Lond., vol. ii.. No. 2, p. 88, pi. 6, f. 3, 3a.
Hab.— Port Phillip Heads (J. B. Wilson).

Ischnochiton wilsoni, Sykes.

1896. Ischnochiton wilsoni, Sykes. P. Malac. Soc.
Lond., vol. ii.. No. 2, p. 89, pi. 6, f. 1, \a.
Hab. — Port Phillip Heads (J. B. Wilson).

Catalogue of Marine SJiells of Victoria. 203

ISCHNICHTON PTYCHIUS, Pilsbry.

1895. Ischnochiton ptychius, Pilsbry. Nautilus, vol.

viii., p. 53.
1897. Ischnochiton ptychius, Bednall. P. Malac. Soc,

Lond., vol. ii., No. 4, p. 147.
Hab. — Western Port.

Ischnochiton virgatus, Reeve.

1848. Chiton virgatus, Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. iv.,
pi. 28, f. 192.

1892. Ischnochiton virgatus, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man.

Conch., vol. xiv., p. 78, pi. 8, f. 72, 73.

1893. Ischnochiton virgatus, Pilsbry. Id., vol. xv., p,

82.
1897. Ischnochiton virgatus, Bednall. P. Malac. Soc.
Lond., vol. ii.. No. 4, pp. 148, 149.
Hab. — Ocean Beach, Phillip Island.

Obs. — Mr. Bednall gives full additional particulars of the
■colour characteristics and variations of this species.

Ischnochiton australis, Sowerby.

1840. Chiton australLs, Sowerby. Mag. Nat. Hist., n.s.,

vol. iv., p. 290.

1841. Chiton australis, Sowerby. Conch. 111., p. 2, No.

19, pi. 139, f. 46.
1847. Chiton australis. Reeve. Conch. Icon., pi. 2, f. 10.
1847. Chiton metallicus, Reeve. Id., pi. 17, f. 104.
1859. Chiton (Lophyrus) lugubris, Gould. P. Bost.

Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. vii., p. 163.
1867. Lophyrus australis, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p. 221.
1878. Lepidoradsia australis, Dall. U.S. Nat. Mus.,

pp. 79, 113, 115, pi. 2, f. 19 (dentition).
1886. Lepidoradsia australis, Haddon. Chall. Zool., vol.

XV., p. 19 (Polyplacophora).

1892. Ischnochiton (Ischnoradsia) australis, Pilsbry.

Tryon, Man. Conch., vol. xiv., p. 144, pi. 18,
f. 57, 59.

1893. Ischnochiton (Ischnoradsia) australis, Pilsbry.

Id, vol. XV., p. 87, pi. 17, f. 68, 69.

204 Proceedings of ihe Royal Society of Victoria.

1894. Ischnochiton (Ischnoradsia) australis, Pilsbry.
P. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., p. 72.

1896. Ischnochiton (Ischnoradsia) australis, Sykes. P.

Malac. Soc. Lond., vol. ii., No. 2, pp. 89, 90.

Hab. — Oommon along the coast generally.

Obs. — Mr. Sykes confirms Mr. Pilsbry's inclusion of C.
metallicus. Reeve, in the synonymy of the above on an exami-
nation of the types. Mr. Pilsbry also includes C. evanidus,.
Sowerby, as a synonym, but with regard to this we are not in a
position to speak.

Ischnochiton novaehollandiae. Reeve.

1847. Chiton novaehollandiae. Reeve. Conch. Icon.,^

sp. 142.
1892. Ischnochiton (Ischnoradsia) novaehollandiae,

Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch., vol. xiv., p.

145, pi. 19, f. 67-69.

1897. Ischnochiton (Ischnoradsia) novaehollandiae,

Bednall. P. Malac. Soc. Lond., vol. ii., No.
4, p. 150.
Hab. — Wilson's Promontory.

Obs. — This is a good species, though it has frequently been
unnecessarily confounded with the foregoing, and fui'ther
references might rather tend to perpetuate the confusion than to
clear the ground.

Family jNIopaliidae.
Genus Plaxiphora, Gray, 1847.

Plaxiphora petholata, Sowerby.

1840. Chiton petholatus, Sowerby. Mag. Nat. Hist.,.

n.s., vol. iv., p. 289.

1841. Chiton petholatus, Sowerby. Conch. 111., f. 64,

65, and var. porphyrius, f. 59.
1847. Chiton petholatus. Reeve. Conch. Icon., pi. 14,

f. 74.
1892. Plaxiphora petholata, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man.

Conch., vol. xiv., p. 323, pi. 68, f. 62-67.

Catalogue of Marine SJtells of Victoria. 205

1894. Plaxiphora petholata, Pilsbiy. P. Acad. Nat.
Sci. Philad., p. 74.

1896. Plaxiphora petholata, Sykes. P. Malac. Soc.

Lond., vol. ii., No. 2, p. 90.

1897. Plaxiphora petholata, Bednall. Id., vol. ii., No.

4, p. 154.

Hab. — A very common and large species on all rocky parts of
our coast line.

Obs. — Mr. Sykes enters fully into considerable synonymy for
this species, but we have not been in a position to follow many
of his views, reference should therefore be made to his paper.

Plaxiphora conspersa, Adams and Angas.

1864. Chsetopleura conspersa, Adams and Angas. P.Z.S.

Lond., p. 193.
1892. Plaxiphora petholata, var. conspersa, Pilsbry.

Tryon, Man. Conch., vol. xiv., p. 324.
1897. Plaxiphora conspersa, Bednall. P. Malac. Soc.
Lond., vol. ii.. No. 4, p. 1-54.
Hab. — Under i-ocks Western Port; Airey's Inlet.
Obs. — Mr. Bednall draws attention to many points of value in
distinguishing this species from the foregoing, and we agree with
him in his treatment.

Family Acanthochitidae.

Genus Acanthochites, Risso, 1826.

Acanthochites bednalli, Pilsbry.

1894. Acanthochites bednalli, Pilsbry. P. Acad. Nat.
Sci. Philad., p. 81, pi. 2, f. 7-11.

1896. Acanthochites bednalli, Sykes. P. Malac. Soc.

Lond., vol. ii.. No. 2, p. 91.

1897. Acanthochites bednalli, Bednall. Id., vol. ii.. No.

4. p. 155.
Hab.— Port Phillip Heads (J. B. Wilson).

Acanthochites pilsbryi, Sykes.

1896. Acanthochites pilsbryi, Sykes. P. Malac. Soc.
Lond., vol. ii., No. 2, p. 91, pi. 6, f. 6, 6a.
Hab.— Port Phillip Heads (J. B. Wilson).

206 Proceedings of tlie Royal Society of Victoria.

AcANTHOCHiTES sPECiosus, H. Aclams.

1861. Cryptoplax (Notoplax) speciosus, H. Aclams.

P.Z.S. Lond., p. 385.
1892. Acanthochites (Notoplax) speciosus, Pilsbry,

Tryon, Man. Conch., vol. xiv., p. 32, pi. 1, f.

23-26.
1894. Acanthochites (Notoplax) speciosus, Pilsbry. P.

Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., p. 83, pi. 4, f. 31,

33.

1896. Acanthochites (Notoplax) speciosus, Sykes. P.

Malac. Soc, Lond., vol. ii., No. 2, p. 91.

1897. Acanthochites speciosus, Bednall. Id., vol. ii.,

No. 4, p. 156.

Hab.— Port Phillip Heads (J. B. Wilson) ; Portland.

Obs. — In T. Woods' Census of Tasmanian Shells, he gives
Cryptoplax spinosa, H. Adams, apparently an erroneous
quotation, as the reference given refers to C. speciosa. Messrs.
Tate and May in their revised census refer on p. 445 to
Cryptoplax spinosa, A. Adams, and put it down as a variety of
Cryptoplax striatus.

Acanthochites matthewsi, Bednall and Pilsbry.

1894. Acanthochites (Notoplax) matthewsi, Bednall and
Pilsbry. Nautilus, vol. vii., p. 120.

1894. Acanthochites (Notoplax?) matthewsi, Pilsbry.
P. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., p. 83, pi. 4, f.
27-30.

1896. Acanthochites (Notoplax) matthewsi, Sykes. P.

Malac. Soc. Lond., vol. ii.. No. 2, p. 91.

1897. Acanthochites (Notoplax) matthewsi, Bednall.

Id., vol. ii., No. 4, p. 156.
Hab.— Port Phillip Heads (J. B. Wilson).

Acanthochites glyptus, Sykes.

1896. Acanthochites (Notoplax) glyptus, Sykes. P.
Malac. Soc. Lond., vol. ii., No. 2, p. 92, pi. 6,
f. 5, 5a.
Hab.— Port Phillip Heads (J. 11 Wilson).

Catalogue of Marine Shells of Victoria. 207

AcANTHOCHlTES wiLSONi, Sykes.

1896. Acaiithochites (Notoplax) wilsoni, Sykes. P.

Make. Soc. Lond., vol. ii., No. 2, p. 92, pi. 6,
f. 2, 2a.
Hab.— Port Phillip Heads (J. B. Wilson).

ACANTHOCHITES ASBESTOIDES, E. A. Smith.

1884. Chiton (Acanthochiton) asbestoides, E. A. Smith.
Alert Zool., p. 83, pi. 6, f. G.

1893. Acanthochites asbestoides, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man.

Conch., vol. XV., p. 17, pi. 2, f. 55.

1894. Acanthochites asbestoides, Pilsbry. P. Acad.

Nat. Sci. Philad., p. 79, pi. 3, f. 16-20.

1897. Acanthochites asbestoides, Bednall. P. Malac.

Soc. Lond., vol. ii., No. 4, p. 155.
Hab. — Mr. Bednall records this species from Hobson's Bay.

Acanthochites granostriatus, Pilsbry.

1894. Acanthochites granostriatus, Pilsbry. Nautilus,

vol. vii., p. 119.
1894. Acanthochites granostriatus, Pilsbry. P. Acad.
Nat. Sci. Philad., p. 81, pi. 2, f. 1-6, and pi. 4,
f. 37.
1897. Acanthochites granostriatus, Bednall. P. Malac.
Soc. Lond., vol. ii.. No. 4, pp. 155, 156.
Hab. — Black Rock, Sandringham, Port Phillip.
Note. — In addition to the above we have four species of the
genus Acanthochites as yet unidentified.

Family Cryptoplacidae.

Genus Cryptoplax, Blainville, 1818.

Cryptoplax striatus, Lamarck.

1819. Chitonellus striatus, Lamarck. Anim. S. Vert.,

vol. vi., p. 317.
1836. Chitonellus striatus, Lamarck. Id. (ed. Deshayes),

vol. vii., p. 481.
1841. Chitonellus striatus, Sowerby. Conch. 111., p. 7,

No. 85, f. 62.

208 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

1842. Chitonellus striatus, Reeve. Conch. Syst., vol. ii.,.

pi. 135, f. 1.
1847. Chitonellus striatus, Reeve. Conch. Icon., f. 4a, d.
1886. Cryptoplax striatus, Haddon. Chall. Zool., vol.

XV., Polyplacophora, p. 39, pi. 1, f. 9, and pi.

3, f. 9.Z-9W.

1893. Cryptoplax striatus, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.,

vol. XV., p. 53, pi. 9, f. 11-15, and pi. 11., f.
37-39.

1894. Cryptoplax striatus, Pilsbry. P. Acad. Nat. Sci.

Philad., p. 85.
1896. Cryptoplax striatus, Sykes. P. Malac. Soc. Lond.,

vol. ii.. No. 2, p. 93.
1901. Cryptoplax striatus, Pilsbry. Id., vol. iv., No. 4,

pp. 152, 153, 155, 157, pi. 15, f. 20-23.
Hab.— Port Phillip Heads (J. B. Wilson) ; Port Phillip and
Western Port ; very large specimens to be obtained at low tide
from the rocks on the back beach, Williamstown.

Obs. — The morphology of this and allied species is very fully
and lucidly dealt with by Dr. Pilsbry in his recent contribution
to the Malacological Society of London, and our best thanks are
due to him for having cleared up many of our difficulties in such
a satisfactory manner. He regards C. gunnii. Reeve, as a distinct
species ; it has so frequently been lumped with C. striatus that
this change may take some by surprise, but we can readily confirni
the points made out, and have no difficulty whatever in separating
the two forms. Dr. Pilsbry mentions " that C. striatus occurs as
far south as Port Jackson, while C. gunnii replaces it in South.
Australian waters ;" he also mentions Mr. Sykes' Victorian
record of C. striatus, but because C. gunnii was included in the
synonymy, he was naturally in doubt as to which form was meant.
We can now definitely extend the range of C. striatus, Lam., to
Port Phillip, and we are also in a position to assert that we have
C. gunnii. Reeve, i-ather more commonly represented along our
shores, while the South Australian representatives, according to
Mr. Bednall, are the 0. gunnii type alone.

Cryptoplax gunnii. Reeve.

1847. Chitonellus gunnii. Reeve. Conch. Icon., pi. 1,
f. 5.

Catalogue of Marine Shells of Victoria. 209'

1893. Cryptoplax striatus, var gunnii, Pilsbry. Tryon,

Man. Conch., vol. xv., p. 54, pi. 8, f. 14.
1897. Cryptoplax striatus, var gunnii, Bednall. P.

Malac. Soc. Lond., vol. ii., No. 4, p. 157.
1901. Cryptoplax gunnii, Pilsbry. Id., vol. iv., No. 4,
pp. 152, 153, and 156, 157, pi. 15, f. 17-19,
and 24-26.
Hab. — Common in Port Phillip and Western Port.
Note. — We have one specimen of what appears to be a small
but distinctive species of Cryptoplax, as yet undetermined.

Family Chitonidae.
Genus Chiton, Linnaeus, 1758.

Chiton bednalli, Pilsbry.

1895. Chiton bednalli, Pilsbry. Nautilus, vol. ix., p. 90.

1896. Chiton bednalli, Sykes. P. Malac. Soc. Lond.,.

vol. ii.. No 2, p. 93.

1897. Chiton bednalli, Bednall. Id., vol. ii., No. 4, p.

153.
Hab.— Port Phillip Heads (J. B. Wilson).

CuiTON LlMANS, Sykes.

1854. Chiton rauricatus, A. Adams (non Tilesius).

P.Z.S. Lond., p. 91, pi. 13, f. 6, 1852. [May,

1854].
1865. Lophyrus muricatus, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p.

186.
1867. Lophyrus muricatus, Angas. Id., p. 222.
1892. Chiton muricatus, Pihsbry (non Tilesius). Tryon,

Man. Conch., vol. xiv., p. 175, pi. 37, f. 12,.

13.
1896. Chiton limans, Sykes. P. Malac. Soc. Lond., vol.

ii., No. 2, p. 93.
Hab.— Port Phillip Heads (J. B. Wilson).

Chiton tricostalis, Pilsbry.

1894. Chiton tricostalis, Pilsbry. Nautilus, vol. viii.,.
p. 54.

210 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

1897. Chiton tricostalis, Bednall. P. Malac. Soc. Lond.,
vol. ii., No. 4, p. 151.
Hab. — Port Fairy.

'^Chiton jugosus, Gould.

1846. Chiton jugosus, Gould. P. Boston Soc. Nat.

Hist., vol. ii., p. 142.

1847. Chiton concentricus, Reeve. Conch. Icon., pi. 16,

No. 95.
1852. Chiton jugosus, Gould. Wilkes' Expl. Exped.,

Moll., vol. xii., p. 317, pi. 28, f. 430.
1862. Lophyrus jugosus, Gould. Otia Conch., pp. 3,

242.
1867. Lophyrus concentricus, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p.

221, No. 228.
1867. Lophyrus jugosus, Angas. Id., p. 222, No. 231.
1884. Chiton jugosus, E. A. Smith. Alert Zool., p. 78.
1886. Chiton jugosus, Haddon. Chall. Zool., vol. xv.,

Polyplacophora, p. 22.
1892. Chiton jugosus, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.,

vol. xiv., p. 178, pi. 36, f. 91-95.
1897. Chiton jugosus, Bednall. P. Malac. Soc. Lond.,

vol, ii., No. 4, p. 151.
Hab. — Port Fairy.

Genus Lorica, H. and A. Adams, 1852.

LoRiCA VOLVOX, Reeve.

1847. Chiton volvox, Reeve. Conch. Icon., sp. 31.

1847. Chiton cimolius. Reeve. Id., sp. 141.

1852. Lorica cimolia, H. and A. Adams. A.M.N.H., 2

series, vol. ix., p. 355.
1867. Lorica cimolia, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p. 224.
1871. Lorica cimolia, Angas. Id., p. 97.
1892. Lorica volvox, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Concli., vol.

xiv., p. 237, pi. 52, f. 14-21.
1897. Lorica volvox, Bednall. P. Malac. Soc. Loud.,

vol. ii.. No. 4, p. 153.
jHab. — Back Beach, Williamstown.

Catalogue of Marine Shells of Victoria. 211

Obs. — The specimens from the above locality are usually very
large, of a uniform dark colour, and in excellent condition.

Genus LoPicella, Pilsbry, 1894.

LoRiCELLA ANGASi, Adauis and Angas.

1864. Lorica angasi, H. Adams and Angas. P.Z.S.

Lond., p. 193.

1865. Lorica angasi, Angas. Id., p. 187.
1871. Lorica angasi, Angas. Id., p. 97.

1892. Lorica (Loricella) angasi, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man.

Conch., vol. xiv., p. 238, pi. 51, f. 9-13.
1894. Loricella angasi, Pilsbry. P. Acad. Nat. Sci.

Philad., p. 87.
1897. Loricella angasi, Bednall. P. Malac. Soc, Lond.,
vol. ii.. No. 4, p. 153.
Hab. — Dredged off" Rhyll in about six fathoms, Western Port.
Note. — In addition to those enumerated above, we have at
least seven other chitons as yet unidentified.

Order OPLSTHOBRANCHIATA.

Family Actaeonidae.
Genus Actaeon, Montfort, 1810.

ACTAEON AUSTRINUS, WatSOn.

1886. Actaeon austrinus, Watson. Chall. Zool., vol xv.,.
p. 628, No. 6, pi. 47, f. 2.

1893. Actaeon austrinus, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.,.

voh XV., p. 149, pi. 20, f. 24-26.

Hab. — Off East Moncoeur Island, Bass Straits, 38 to 40
fathoms, sand and shells.

Obs. — This is not a good species, and should go into the
synonymy of Turbonilla (Ondina) casta, A. Adams. There is
obviously some mistake in the Challenger references to the
figures of this shell as figure 3 is given in the text, but this-
really represents A. affinis, Adams, and the reference should be
to tigui'e 2.

'212 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

In addition to the above, we would also note that Fossarus
bulimoides, T. Woods, P.R.S. Tas., 1877, p. 148, and Tate and
May, P.L.S. N.S.W., 1901, pt. 3, p. 390, pi. 26, f. 66, is another
synonym of Turbonilla (Ondina) casta, A. Adams.

Family Tornatinidae.
Genus To mat in a, A. Adams, 1850.

TORNATINA FUSIFORMIS, A. AdamS.

1854. Bulla (Tornatina) fusiformis, A. Adams. Thes.

Conch., vol. ii., p. 570, pi. 121, f. 37.
1867. Tornatina fusiformis, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p. 226.
1877. Tornatina fusiformis. Brazier. P.L.S. N.S.W.,

vol. ii., p. 82.
1877. Tornatina mariae, T. Woods. P.R.S. Tas., p. 155.
1893. Tornatina fusiformis, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man.

Conch., vol. XV., p. 194, pi. 22, f. 27.
1893. Tornatina mariae, Pilsbry. Id., p. 198.
Hab. — Port Phillip, Sandringham, Sorrento, Portsea ; Western
Port, Balnarring, Shoreham, Flinders.

Tornatina brenchleyi, Angas.

1877. Tornatina brenchleyi, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., pp.

40, 189, pi. 5, f. 20.
1893. Tornatina brenchleyi, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man.
Conch., vol. XV., p. 202, pi. 22, f. 35, 36.
Hab.— Portsea, Port Phillip.

Tornatina hofmani, Angas.

1877. Tornatina hofmani, Angas. P.Z.S. Loud., pp. 39,

189, pi. 5, f. 19.
1893. Tornatina hofmani, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.,
vol. XV., p. 203, pi. 22, f. 37, 38.
Hab.— Western Port.

Genus Retusa, Brown, 1827.
Retusa eumicra, Crosse and Fischer.

1865. Bulla eumicra, Crosse and Fischer. Jour. d.
Conch., p. 40, pi. 2, f. 7.

Catalogue of Marine SJwlls of Victoria. 213

1865. Utriculus euraicrus, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p. 188.
1893. lietusa eumicra, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.,
vol. XV., p. 227, pi. 23, f. 43, 44.
Hab. — Sorrento, Port Phillip ; Shoreham, Western Port.

Retusa apiculata, Tate.

1879. Uti'iculus apiculatus, Tate. Trans. Phil. Soc.

Adelaide, p. 138, pi. 5, f. 3.
1893. Retusa apiculata, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.,
vol. XV., p. 227, pi. 23, f. 45.
Hab. — Sorrento and Portsea, Port Phillip.

Genus Volvulella, Newton, 1891.

VOLVULELLA ROSTRATA, A. AdamS.

1854. Bulla rostrata, A. Adams. Thes. Conch., vol. ii.,

p. 596, pi. 125, f. 154.
1893. Volvula rostrata, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.,

vol. XV., p. 241, pi. 26, f. 60.
1901. Volvulella rostrata, Tate and May. P.L.S.

N.S.W., vol. XX vi., pt. 3, p. 416.
Hab. — San Remo, Western Port.

Family Scapiiandridae.

Genus Roxania, Leach, 1847.

RoxANiA EXIGUA, A. Adarns.

1854. Bulla (Atys) exigua, A. Adams. Thes. Conch.,

vol. ii., p. 589, pi. 125, f. 129.
1869. Atys exigua, Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. xvii., pi.

4, f. 19.
1878. Bulla (Atys) exigua, A. Adams. P.Z.S. Lond.,

p. 869.
1893. Atys exigua, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch., vol.
XV., p. 270, pi. 28, f. 24.
Hab. — Dredged in Western Port, off Rhyll, Phillip Island ;
Sorrento, Port Phillip.

214 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Genus Bullinella, Newton, 1891.

BuLLlNELLA ARACHis, Quoy and Gaimard.

1833. Bulla arachis, Quoy and Gaiixiard. Astrolabe

Zool., vol. ii., p. 361, pi. 26, f. 28-30.
1854. Bulla (Cylichna) arachis, Adams. Thes. Conch.,.

vol. ii., p. 590, pi. 125, £. 133, 134.
1867. Cylichna arachis, Angas. P.Z.S. Loud., p. 226,

No. 255.
1884. Cylichna arachis, E. A. Smith. Alert Zool.,.

p. 86, No. 121.
1886. Cylichna arachis, Watson. Chall. Zool., vol. xv.,

p. 662, No. 2.
1893. Cylichna arachis, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.,

vol. XV., p. 318, pi. 27, f. 92, 93.
1896. Cylichna arachis, Kobelt. Conch. Cab., p. 37, pL
7, f. 10, 11.
Hab. — Port Phillip generally and Western Port; in fine con-
dition and of very large dimensions from 8helly Beach, near
Shoreham.

BULLINELLA PYGMAEA, A. Adams.

1854. Bulla (Cylichna) pygmaea, A. Adams. Thes.

Conch., vol. ii., p. 595, pi. 125, f. 150.
1876. Cylichna atkinsoni, T. Woods. P.R.S Tas., p.

156.
1893. Cylichna atkinsoni, Pilsbry. Tiyon, Man. Conch. ,^

vol. XV., p. 318.
1893. Cylichna pygmaea, Pilsbry. Id., p. 319, pi. 59, f. 9.
1896. Cylichna pygmaea, Kobelt. Conch. Cab., p. 60, pi.

11, f. 14.
Hab. — Sorrento, Portsea and Clifton Springs, Port Phillip :
Western Port.

Family Bullidae.

Genus Bulla, Linnaeus, 1758.

Bulla australis, Gray.

1825. Bulla australis, Gray. Annals of Philosophy,
n.s., vol. ix., p. 408.

Catalogue of Marine Shells of Victoria. 215

1827. Bulla australis, Gray. King's Survey of Austra-
lia, vol. ii., appendix, p. 490, No. 92.

1833. Bulla australis, Quoy and Gaimard. Astrolabe
Zool., vol. ii., p. 357, pi. 26, f. 38, 39.

1836. Bulla australis, Lamarck. Anim. S. Vert. (2nd
ed. Deshayes), vol. vii., p. 673.

1839. Bulla australis, Lamarck. Id. (3rd ed Deshayes
and Edwards), vol. iii., p. 248, No. 12.

1843. Bulla australis. Gray. Dieffenbach's New

Zealand, vol. ii., p. 243, No. 114.

1854. Bulla oblonga, A. Adams. Thes. Conch., vol. ii.,
p. 577, No. 50, pi. 123, f. 74

1854. Bulla australis, A. Adams. Id., p. 576, sp. 45,
pi. 122, f. 64-66.

1854. Bulla oblonga, H. and A. Adams. Genera, vol.
ii., p. 16.

1859. Bulla australis, Chenu. Man. de Conch., pt. 1,
p. 389, f. 2938.

1859. Bulla oblonga, Chenu. Id., f. 2940.

1865. Bulla australis, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p. 188.

1867. Bulla oblonga, Angas. Id., p. 226.

1868. Bulla oblonga. Reeve. Conch. Icon., pi. 3, sp. 9,

f. a, b, c.
1873. Bulla oblonga, Hutton. Cat. Moll. N.Z., p. 52.
1873. Bulla australis, von. Martens. Critical List of

N.Z. Moll., p. 38.
1877. Bulla oblonga, T. Woods. P.R.S. Tas., p. 47.
1880. Bulla oblonga, Hutton. Man. N.Z. Moll., p. 121.

1885. Bulla australis. Brazier. P.L.S. N.S.W., vol. x.,

pt. 1, pp. 89-92.

1886. Bulla australis, Watson. Chall. Zool., vol. xv.,

p. 638, No. 2.
1893. Bulla australis, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.,
vol. XV., p. 346, pi. 35, f. 12, 13, 14, and 17,
18.
1896. Bulla australis, Kobelt. Conch. Gab., p. 74, pi.
8, f. 1, 2.
Hab. — Extremely abundant in Corio Bay and Outer Geelong
Harbour to Portarlington, also Werribee to Altona Bay. Less

216 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

abundant on the eastern shores of Port Phillip ; Western Port;
common near Whitehaven, Phillip Island ; Kilcunda and
Anderson's Inlet (W. H. Ferguson).

Ohs. — Mr. Brazier, in his paper on four of Dr. Gray's species
above quoted, deals very fully with this species, pointing out
many of the erroneous figures and localities given by various
authors. Mr. Watson in his Challenger report includes Bulla
quoyi, A. Adams, as a synonym of the above, but with this we
cannot agree, for our own examination of New Zealand examples
of that species, received from and identified by Mr. H. Suter,
lead us to conclude that it is a good species.

In the Manual of Conchology there appears to be some con-
fusion in the treatment of this species, for although all the
figures on plate 35 are given as Bulla australis in the reference
to the plate, yet we note that figures 15, 16, 19, 20 are referred
to in the text as Bulla adamsi, Menke. We are more inclined to
agree with the latter reading.

Family Akeridae.

Genus Haminea, Leach, 1847.

Haminea brevis, Quoy and Gaimard.

1833. Bulla brevis, Quoy and Gaimard. Astrolabe

Zool., vol. ii., p. 358, pi. 26, f. 36, 37.
1839. Bulla brevis, Lamarck. Anim. S. Vert. (3rd ed.

Deshayes and Edwards), vol. iii., p. 249,

No. 19.
1843. Bulla (Scaphander) ovoidea, Menke (non Quoy

and Gaimard). Moll. Nov. Holl., p. 6, No. 7.
1854. Bulla brevis, Adams. Thes. Conch., vol. ii., p.

581, pi. 124, f. 93.
1868. Haminea brevis, Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. xvi.,

pi. 3, f. 15«, />.
1865. Haminea brevis, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p. 188.
1867. Haminea brevis, Angas. Id., p. 227, No. 261.
1893. Haminea brevis, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.,

vol. XV., p. 373, pi. 40, f. 9, 10, 96.
1896. Haminea brevis, Kobelt. Conch. Cab., p. 114, pi.

16, f. 14, 15.

Catalogue of Marine Shells of Victoria. 217

Hab. — Common in Port Phillip and Western Port. Dredged

off Frankston, 2 to 3 fathoms, sand.

Haminea cuticulifera, Smith.

1872. Haminea cuticulifera, E. A. Smith. A.M.N.H.,

ser. 4, vol. ix., p. 350.
1884. Haminea cuticulifera, E. A. Smith. Alert Zool.,

p. 87, pi. 6, f. H.
1877. Haminea cuticulifera, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p

189.
1886. Cylichna cuticulifera, Watson. Chall. Zool., vol.

XV., p. 663.
1893. Haminea cuticulifera, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man.

Conch., vol. XV., p. 372, pi. 41, f. 13.
1896. Haminea cuticulifera, Kobelt. Conch. Cab., p.

117, No. 33, pi. 16, f. 22.
Hab. — Sorrento and Portsea, Port Phillip.

Haminea tenera, A. Adams.

1850. Bulla (Haminea) tenera, A. Adams. Thes. Conch.,

vol. ii., p. 583, pi. 124, f. 103.
1868. Haminea tenera. Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. xvi.,

pi. 1, f. 3.
1893. Haminea teuera, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.,

vol. XV., p. 371, pi. 40, f. 82.
1896. Haminea tenera, Kobelt. Conch. Cab., p. 116,
No. 30, pi. 16, f. 19.
Hab. — Common in Port Phillip and Western Port.
Obs. — This shell has been very commonly known as H. cymba-
lum, Quoy and Gaimard, but on looking up that species, though
there is some resemblance to our form, it is quite distinct.

Genus Cylindpobulla, Fischer, 1856.

Cylindrobulla fisciieri, Adams and Angas.

1864. Cylindrobulla fischeri, Adams and Angas. P.Z.S.

Lond., p. 37.

1865. Cylindrobulla fischeri, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p.

189.
1871. Cylindrobulla fischeri, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p. 98.

9a

218 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

1893, Cylindrobulla fischeri, Pilsbry. Try on, Man.
Conch., vol. XV , p. 381.
Hab.— Port Phillip Heads.

Genus LobigeP, Krohn, 1847.

LOBIGER WILSONI, Tate.

1889. Lobiger wilsoni, Tate. T.R.S. S.A., vol. xi., p.
66, pi. 11, f. 12.
Hab. — Lower end of South Channel, Port Phillip, 7-16
fathoms (J. B. Wilson).

Pamily Ringiculidae.
Genus Ringicula, Deshayes, 1838.

RiNGICULA AUSTRALIS, Hinds.

1844. Ringicula australis. Hinds. P.Z.S. Lond., p. 97.
1865. Ringicula australis, Crosse and Fischer. Jour, d.

Conch., p. 44, pi. 2, f. 5.
1893. Ringicula australis, Pilsbry. Tryon, Man. Conch.,.

vol. XV., p. 410, pi. 47, f. 80, 81.
1878. Ringicula australis, Morlet. Jour. d. Conch., p,

125, pi. 5, f. 10.
1878. Ringicula angasi, Brazier. P.L.S. N.S. W., vol. ii.,

p. 78.
Hab. — Western Port.

Fan)ily Philinidae.

Genus Philine, Ascanius, 1772'.

Philine angasi, Crosse.

1865. Bullaea angasi, Crosse. Jour. d. Conch., p. 38,.

pi. 2, f. 8.
1865. Philine angasi, Angas. P.Z.S Lond., p. 189, No.

222.
1867. Philine angasi, Angas. M, p. 227, No. 263.
1878. Philine angasi. Brazier. Chevert Exped. P.L.S.

N.S.W., vol. ii., p. 88, No. 54.

•Catalogue of Marine Shells of Victoria. 219

1870. Philiue anwasii, Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. xviii.,

pi. 1, fig. 4.
1886. Philine angasi, Watson. Chall. Zool., vol. xv.,

p. 671, No. 1.
1896. Philine angasi, Kobelt. Conch. Cab., p. 152, No.
21, pi. 19, f. 21.
Hab. — Port Phillip (common) ; Western Port ; Polwarth
Coast.

Obs. — We do not regard this species as synonymous with P.
aperta, Lin., and though the shells of these two species are
frequently very much alike, yet there are points which serve for
distinction even with such a relatively characterless form.

Family Aplysiidae.

Genus Aplysia, Linnaeus, 1767.

Aplysia concava, Sowerby.

1822. Aplysia concava, Sowerby. Genera, vol. ii., 6th

pi., f. 3, No. 39.
1869. Aplysia concava, Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. xvii.,

pi. 6, f. 24 a, b.
1898. Aplysia concava, Kiister. Conch. Cab., p. 18, No.
37, pi. 7, f. 12, 13.
Hab. — Western Port.

Aplysia tigrina. Rang.

Aplysia tigrina, Rang. Hist. Nat. Apl., p. 57,
pi. 11.
1869. Aplysia tigrina. Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. xvii.,

pi. 2, f. 5 a, b.
1898. Aplysia tigrina, Kiister. Conch. Cab., p. 8, pi. 4,
f. 1, 2.
Hab. — Portland (Maplestone).

Family Pleurobranchidae.
Genus Pleurobranchus, Cuvier, 1805.
Pleurobranchus angasi, E. a. Smith.

1884. Pleurobranchus angasi, E. A. Smith. Alert
Zool., p. 88, pi. 6, f. KKi.
Hab.— Port Phillip.

220 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Pleurobranchus maculatus, Quoy.

1832. Pleurobrauchidium raaculatum, Quoy. Astrolabe

ZooL, vol. ii., p. 301, pi. 22, f. 11-14.
Hab.— Victoria (Prof. R. Tate).

Family Umbrellidae.

Genus Umbrella, Lamarck, 1812.

Umbrella corticalis, Tate.

1889. Umbrella corticalis, Tate. T.R.S. S.A., vol. xi.,.
pp. 65, 66, pi. 11, f. 11.
Hab.— Port Phillip Heads.

Family Siphonariidae.
Genus Siphonaria, Sowerby, 1824,

Siphonaria diemknensis, Quoy and Gaimard.

1833. Siphonaria diemenensis, Quoy and Gaimard,

Astrolabe ZooL, vol. ii., p. 327, pi. 25, f. 1-12,
1833. Siphonaria denticulata, Quoy and Gaimard. /d.,.

p. 340, pi. 25, f. 19, 20.
1856. Siphonaria diemenensis. Reeve. Conch. Icon.,.

vol. ix., pi. 1, f. 1.
1856. Siphonaria scabra, Reeve. Id., pi. 1, f. 2.
1856. Siphonaria denticulata, Reeve. Id., pi. 1, f. 4r.
1877. Siphonaria diemenensis, T. Woods. P.R.S. Tas.»

pp. 56-58.

1877. Siphonaria denticulata, T. Woods. Id., pp. 54-56..

1878. Siphonaria diemenensis, T. Woods. Id., p. 46.
1878. Siphonaria denticulata, T. Woods. Id., p. 47.
1901. Siphonaria diemenensis, Tate and May. P,L.S»

N.S.W., vol. xxvi., pt. 3, p. 418.
Hab. — Very common at and above high tide mark along all
rocky portions of our coast.

Siphonaria funiculata. Reeve.

1856. Siphonaria funiculata, Reeve. Conch. Icon., voh
ix., pi. 2, f. 6.

Catalogue of Marine Shells of Victoria. 221

1867. Siphonaria funiculata, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p.
232, No. 31.3.

1877. Siphonaria funiculata, T. Woods. P.R.S. Tas.,

p. 58.
1901. Siphonaria funiculata, Tate and May. P.L.S.
N.S.W., vol. xxvi., pt. 3, p. 419.
Hab. — Usually an associate of the foregoing species, but much
less common. Hobson's Bay (Nat. Mus.).

Siphonaria baconi, Reeve.

1856. Siphonaria baconi. Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. ix.,
pi. 6, f. 30.

1878. Siphonaria albida, Angas. P.Z.S. Lond., p. 314^

pi. 18, f. 14, 15.
1893. Siphonaria albida, Adcock. Hand List Aquat.

Moll. S.A., p. 11, No. 456.
1901. Siphonaria albida, Tate and May. P.L.S. N.S.W.,
vol. xxvi., pt. 3, p. 419.
Hab. — Back Beach, Sorrento, to Cape Schanck ; Western
Port ; Point Addis ; Airey's Inlet ; Anderson's Inlet ( W. H.
Ferguson).

Siphonaria zonata, T. Woods.

1877. Siphonaria denticulata, var. tasmanica, T. Woods.

P.R.S. Tas., p. 54.

1878. Siphonaria zonata, T. Woods. P.R.S. Tas., p. 99.
1878. Siphonaria zonata, T. Woods. /^., p. 47 (name

only).
1901. Siphonaria tristensis, Tate and May (non Sowerby).
P.L.S. N.S.W., vol. xxvi., pt. 3, p. 419.
Hab. — Port Phillip ; Corio Bay ; Western Port ; Anderson's
Inlet and Kilcunda (W. H. Ferguson) ; Back Beach, Sorrento ;
Spring Creek to Cape Otway.

Obs. — The type of this species is in the National Museum,,
Melbourne.

Mr. May has informed one of us that the inclusion of this,
species in the Tasmanian Census was a mistake and refers to S.
zonata, T. Woods.

222 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victo7'ia.

Family Gadiniidae.
Genus Gadinia, Gray, 1824.

Gadinia angasi, Dall.

1867. Gadinia conica, Angas. P.Z.S. Loncl., pp. 115
and 220, pi. 13, f. 27.

1870. Gadinia angasi, Dall. Amer. Jour. Conch., vol.

vi., p. 11.
Hab. — Portsea, Port Phillip ; Western Port.

Class SCAPHOPODA.

Family Dentaliidae.

Genus Dentalium, Linnaeus, 1758.

Dentalium lubricatum, Sowerby.

1860. Dentalium lubricatum, Sowerby. Thes. Conch.,

vol. iii., p. 97, No. 3, pi. 3, f. 56.
1872. Dentalium lubricatum. Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol.

xviii., pi. 7, f. 55.
1896. Dentalium lubricatum. Lesson. Conch. Cab. (ed.
Kiister), p. 14, No. 22, pi. 4, f. 3.
Hab.— Cowes, Phillip Island, Western Port (T. S. Hall).
Obs. — We have to thank Mr. C. Hedley for the identification
of this species.

Genus Cad U I us, Phillipi, 1841.

Cadulus acumixatus, Tate.

1871. Cadulus acuminatus (Deshayes, MS.), Angas.

P.Z.S. Lond., p. 97.
1878. Cadulus acuminatus, Angas. Id., p. 868.
1887. Cadulus acuminatus, Tate. T.R.S. S. A., vol. ix.,

p. 194, pi. 20, f. 10.
1890. Cadulus acuminatus (Deshayes), Whitelegge.

P.R.S. N.S.W., p. 117 in reprint.
1893. Cadulus acuminatus (Deshayes), Adcock. Hand

List Aquat. Moll. S.A., p. 10.
1898. Cadulus acuminatus, Pilsbry and Sharp. Tryon,

Man. Conch., vol. xvii., p. 183, pi. 32, f. 47-49.

Catalogue of Marine Shells of Victoria. 223

1899. Cadulus acuniinatus, Tate. T.R.S. S.A., vol.

xxiii., p. 266, pi. 8, f. 11.
1901. Cadulus petterdi (Brazier), Lodder. List of Tas.

Shells, etc., P.R.S. Tas., p. 15 in reprint.
1901. Cadulus acuminatus, Tate and May. P.L.S.
N.S.W., vol. xxvi., pt. 3, p. 420.
Hab. — Western Port ; Port Albert (T. Worcester).
Obs. — This species has been distributed amongst collectors
under the name of C. petterdi. Brazier, and C. petterdi, T.
Woods, but neither of these gentlemen figured or de.scribed such
a. species. There has also been some confusion as to the author
of the species, many referring to Deshayes, but this fog is
apparently cleared up by Professor Tate's remarks in his 1899
paper, where he states : — " I borrowed the name after Deshayes,
who, on the authority of Angas, had so attached his MS. name
to New South Wales specimens in the British Museum, and
Angas so listed the species for South Australia on the testimony
•of exaujples forwarded by me."

Art. XX. — TJie Phyllopoda of Australia, including
descriptions of some new Genera and Species.

By O. a. SAYCE.

(With Plates XXVII.-XXXVI.).

[Read 11th December, 1902.]

The earliest descriptions of Australian Phyllopoda are those of
the Rev. R. L. King, published in the Proceedings of the Royal
Society of Van Diemen's Land for 1855. Since then the list
has been considerably added to by various workers ; ^ but
frequently the want of figures and more detailed descriptions
than have been given, makes it almost impossible to accurately
identify the species.

Our thanks are especially due to Prof. G. O. Sars for his very
careful rede.scriptions and figures of old species, as well as for
his care in presenting new ones. Besides describing some spirit
specimens he has received dried mud from different parts of the
continent and successfully hatched out in Norway a considerable
number of species, and given valuable information of the life-
history of several.

The imporcant treatise of Messrs. Baldwin Spencer and Hall
on the Phyllopoda of Central Australia in the Report of the
Horn Expedition should also be mentioned here, wherein, besides
descriptions and figures of new species, records of their distribu-
tion and some interesting biological observations are made.

My aim in this paper has been to present a complete catalogue
of the Australian Phyllopoda, including bibliographical references,
and redescribing and figuring more amply those that appeared
to need it, and of which I had specimens ; also giving sufficient
descriptive detail for a fairly accurate identification of each of
the others. Unfortunately the material to hand of the several

1 In the Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1886, Prof. Brady gives a list of species, not only of
the Phyllopoda, but all the Entomostraca known at that time.

Phyllopoda of Australia. 225-

species has been generally insufficient in numbers and often too
badly preserved to do justice to them. In most of the groups,
particularly the Conchostraca, there is considerable variability
of form, and it is difficult to Hnd constantly reliable features,
also, what is constant in one genus may be inconstant in another,
and throughout the whole order sexually matured species often
alter very considerably before reaching the true adult size ; so
that a considerable sum of characters must be taken into account,
and larger and smaller forms examined, before laying down a
good diagnosis.

For material I am specially indebted to Prof. Baldwin Spencer,.
M.A., F.R.S., and Mr. T. S. Hall, M.A., of the Melbourne
University, and to the authorities of the South Australian
Museum ; also to several other persons duly mentioned hereafter.
I desire further to acknowledge my obligation to Professor
Spencer, in his capacity of Director of our National Museum, for
affording me the opportunity of consulting certain literature and^
examining some foreign specimens.

I have considered it necessary to institute two new genera,
viz. : Parartemia and Branchinella, and have described six new
species, as well as redescribed and figured several others ; while-
the list has been somewhat shortened by the cutting out of a few
apparent synonyms.

Our present knowledge of the group, however, must not be
considered as exhausting tlie Australian Continent; very many
localities, apparently, have not been searched. It is hoped that
further attention will be given to them by field workers, and
those possessing collections.

The nomenclature is in conformity with that of Prof. Sars,
except as regards the endites of the branchial legs. In these
appendages, for the sake of uniformity throughout the group,
the so called coxal lobe of the Limnadiidae is considered as the
first endite ; allowing by this means the normal number, which
is six, each to bear a constant morphological relationship-
throughout.

226 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

List of Species atid their distribution in accordance with the
zoological areas instituted by Prof. Baldwin Spencer."^

Each area is denoted by its first letter, and one letter placed
above another denotes the borderland of two areas.

Branchipodidae.

PAGE.

E.

1. Artemia australis (sp. nov.) r~ " ' " ^^9

2. „ westraliensis (sp. nov.), E. - - - 230

3. ,, proxima B. - - - 231

E,

4. Parartemia zietziana (gen. et sp. nov.), ^ - - 231

5. Branchinella australiensis (gen. nov.), T.B.E. - 233

6. ,, eyrensis (sp. nov.), E. - - - 239

7. Streptocephalus archeri, T. - - - 240

Apodidae.

8. Apus australiensis, E. ----- - 241

'9. Lepidurus viridis, E.B., also New Zealand - - 242

Limnadiidae.

10. Eulimnadia dahli, T.E. 244

11. „ sordida, B. - - - - - 245

12. „ rivolensis, B.E. 245

13. „ victoriensis (sp. nov.), B. - - - 246

14. Paralimnadia stanleyana, B., also India ? - - 248

15. Limnadopsis birchii, E. - - - - - 249

16. „ tatei, E. 250

17. „ brunneus, T. 250

18. Estheria packardi, E.B., also India? - - - 250

19. „ elliptica, E. 252

20. ,, sarsii (sp. nov.), E. 252

21. „ lutraria, E. 254

1 These areas are named and defined as follows:—!, Northern and north-eastern coastal,
■extending as far south as about the Clarence River, and including also New Guinea—
Torresian. 2, Southern-eastern coastal area, including: Southern Victoria and Tasmania—
Bassian. 3, The whole of the interior, together with West Australia and almost all South
Australia— EjTean. Sea Rep. Horn Kxped. Sununary, pp. 196-199.

Phyllopoda of Australia. 227

PAGE..

22. Estheria dictyon, E. 255

23. Cyclestheria hislopi, T., and India - - - 256

Lynceidae.

24. Lynceus macleayana, B.E. - - . - _ 258

25. „ tatei, B. - - - - - 258

26. „ eremia, E. - - - - - 258

Sub-order Phyllopoda.

Entomostraca of various shapes, with or without a carapace or
shell ; the possessors either having it fashioned as a dorsal
shield, or in the form of two large valves enveloping the entire
animal. Eyes sometimes pedunculated, sometimes sessile-
Ocellus (simple eye) present. All the appendages placed behind
the mouth parts respiratory, of approximately uniforna structure-
and leaf-like form ; their number very variable, 10-63-. (This-
description does not include the Cladocera).

Re/narks. — Prof. G. O. Sars has divided this sub-order into
three groups. They are of widely separated types, those without
any carapace or shell (Anosti'aca), those with a large chitinoua
shield arching over the back, which in outline is of horseshoe
shape (Notostraca), and those with the body surrounded by a
large chitinous bivalve shell, connected dorsally, and capable of
being opened or shut by the aid of powerful adductor muscles,
so that the animal may be entirely enclosed. — (Conchostraca).

None are marine inhabitants, and, with the exception of but
very few forms which live in salt inland waters, are only found
in fresh water, and usually in quiet shallow lakes or pools (often
less than a yard acro.ss), which completely dry up periodically.
They range in length from a quarter inch to three inches.

Their growth is often surprisingly rapid ; Messrs. Spencer and
Hall mention in the Report of the Horn Expedition to Central
Australia that in only a few days after a fall of rain numberless
specimens of Apus, measuring 2\ inches in length, were seen
swimming about the rain pools which could only have come from
eggs. Probably the high temperature of the water is a stimulus,
for this strikingly rapid development.

:228 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Tribe 1 — Afiostraca (Naked Phyllopods).

Body long, very soft and flexible, and without any trace of
•carapace or shell. Eyes distinctly pedunculated. First pair of
antennae small and filiform ; second pair in the male formed into
a clasping organ ; in the female of a simple character.

Family 1 — Branchipodidae.

Body narrow, cylindrical, somewhat thicker in front, with the
tail well developed, and distinctly segmented in both sexes,
terminating in two bristle-beset caudal rami. Prehensile antennae
of male distinctly segmented, and usually furnished with a rudi-
mentary sub-branch. Frontal appendages present in the male or
wanting. Eleven pairs of branchial feet present, all having a
single serrated external covering plate. Marsupium of the female
-distinctly sac-formed, directed backwards, and issuing from the
two foremost caudal segments. — (Sars).

Synopsis of Local Genera.

(A) Tail with eight segments —

1. Male claspers with 2nd joint flat and triangular;

caudal rami very small. — Artemia.

2. Male claspers with 2nd joint claw-shaped ; immov-

able spiniform projection on frontal area of 1st
joint, caudal rami very small. — Parartemia.

■»(B) Tail with nine seginents —

3. Frontal appendages simple, spinulose, united proxim-

ally, varying greatly in length ; claspers quite
simple, 2nd joint claw-shaped, not angularly
bent near the tip ; 2nd antennae of female very
long and ribbon-like ; ovisac stout, pear-shaped.
— Branchinella.

4. Frontal appendages long, variously lobed, and spinu-

lose ; claspers with 2nd joint possessing a sharp
basal spur; ovisac short and broad, eggs large,
and few in number. — Ciiirocephalus.
-5. Second joint of male claspers long, twisted, and
forked irregularly ; ovisac long and slender. —
Streptocephalus.

Phyllopoda of Australia. 229

Genus 1 — Aptemia.
1. Artemia australis, sp. uov. (PI. XXVIL).

Description of Female. — Body normally slender; tail of eight
segments, equal in length to cephalon and trunk combined,
terminal segment as long as the two preceding ones combined ;
caudal I'ami narrow-lanceolate, about half the length of the
terminal segment, not articulated to it. Eyes large and
prominent.

First antennae relatively long. Second antennae lanceolate, a
little shorter than the first pair, gradually tapering from about
the middle of the length to an acute tip, but not drawn out.
Branchial feet each possessing the normal number of divisions.
First pair very small, rather smaller than the last. Each with
distal lobe of endopodite very broad, much broader than the
length of the exopodite, except in the last pair, where it is of
aV)Out equal length ; in each it is lateially produced considerably
beyond the level of the upper endites, with the margin evenly
curved, and merging into the distal margin, which runs in an
almost straight line to the proximal end of the exopodite. In each
pair of feet except the last, the second endite, as usual, is scarcely
marked off from the first one, and at its origin there is a little
tubercle ; in the last pair it is much smaller but more conspicuous,
and from its edge arise three much larger setae than those on the
first endite. In each of the other legs the two first endites are
uniformly fringed with feathered setae, curving upwards. The
third endite bears one very long, stout spiniform setae and one
shorter one, the former twice as long as the latter ; the fourth
endite has two and the fifth one stout setae, similar to the
shorter one on the third endite. The exopodite is about twice as
long as its greatest breadth, and bluntly pointed at the end.

Ovisac, very stout, fully as broad as its length, the anterior
part much swollen and possessing two lateral subconical lobes.
On the deeply convex ventral surface there are two acute
tubercles, set one on each side of the mid axis. The neck is
short and extends to about the end of the fourth tail segment.

Length. — 9.5 mm., exclusive of caudal rami.

230 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Locality. — Brackish-water, Sandhills, Glenelg, coastal district
of South Australia. (S.A. Museum, collected by Mr. Becker,
1890).

Remarks. — Of this species I have received about 100 speci-
mens, all of which are females and several bearing eggs, but
the greatest number are young forms not fully matured, and
probably of parthenogenetic origin. It is to be regretted that
there are no males amongst them, but I think there is little
doubt as to their being a normal Artemia.

2. Artemia westraliensis, sp. nov. (PI. XXVIIL,
Figs. Al and 2).

Description of Female. — Body of normal form ; tail of eight
segments, about equal in length to cephalon and trunk combined,
terminal segment only about one-third longer than the preceding
one, caudal rami narrow-lanceolate, very long for the genus,
being of sub-equal length to the terminal segment, and thickly
fringed with feathered setae. Eyes smaller and scarcely so
prominent as those of A. australis.

First antennae short and slender, subequal in length to the
eye and its stalk. Second antennae short, slightly longer than
the first pair, broad-lanceolate, apically gradually tapering to an
acute point. Branchial legs agreeing closely in shape to A.
australis.

Ovisac differing proportionately in shape from A. australis,
due to the lateral lobes being very much more developed (in this
species swelling out on each side to enormous saccular distentions),
and a correspondingly smaller neck ; also there are no acute
tubercles on the ventral face. It is considerably broader than
long, and does not extend as far as the end of the third tail
segment.

Length. — 11 mm., exclusive of caudal rami.

Locality. — -Lake Aurean, Murchison, West Australia. (Collected
by Mr. J. T. Markes, January, 1896).

Remarks. — I have but two female specimens of this species,
both are of similar size, and well preserved. It may be that it is
congeneric with the following species, but without the male it is
impossible to say.

1

Phyllopoda of Australia. 231

I am informed by a resident of Murchison that the water of
Lake Aurean, from whicli this species was taken, is always more
or less brackish, but never very salt. During the rainy season it
is quite lit for cattle to drink. In the same bottle as contained
the specimens there was a specimen of Apus australiensis and a
new species of Estheria, described later in this paper, all, accord-
ing to the label, collected from the same place at the same time.

Unrecognisable Species.
Aptemia ppoxima, King.

J^ef. — Proc. Royal Soc. Van Diemen's Land, 1855, p. 70.
Trans. Entom. Soc. New South Wales, I., p. 162, pi. xi.

No figure except a branchial leg of the fifth pair has been
published, and the few words of description are quite meaning-
less. The specimens were collected from salt pans at Newington,
near Sydney.

Genus 2 — Paraptemia, nov.

Body slender ; tail slender and elongated, of eight segments,
the terminal one long ; caudal rami not articulated to the
terminal segment, of flattened form and very short.

Prehensile antennae of male large ; first joint short and very
stout, directed obliquely outwards, inner margins definitely
formed, so that the pair together fit closely over the back of the
female during copulation, also on the frontal face of each an
immovable spiniform process, presumably homologous with the
frontal appendages of other genera ; second joint quite simple,
claw-shaped, incurved, slender, and of firm consistency.

Branchial feet with the normal number of parts ; distal lobe
of endopodite, short and rather broad, produced somewhat
laterally, but apparently not so much as in Artemia ; exopodite
narrow. Last pair without covering plate or gill.

Ovisac of female very short and broad, of trilobate form, due
to two very large lateral saccular lobes narrowly united ventrally,
and medianly therefrom abruptly arising a short and stout neck.

Re /narks. — This new genus is formed to receive the following
new species. It agrees in many respects with Artemia, but

10

232 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

differs from it materially in the shape of the prehensile antennae
of the male, and the ovisac of the female, and also in some other
characters.

Parartemia zietziana, sp. nov. (Plates XXVIIT., Fig. B,
and XXIX.).

Body slender ; tail greatly elongated, about one-third longer
than the cephalon and trunk combined, terminal segment fully
twice as long as the preceding one. Cephalon large, as long as
tirst four segments of trunk combined. Eyes small and
prominent.

First antennae short. Prehensile antennae of male, as usual,
•directed downwards ; first joint with bases coalesced to each
other, short, stout, fleshy, subquadangular in frontal outline and
widely divergent, so that the distail ends face obliquely outwards,
to which are articulated the second joints. These are twice as
long as the first joint, of firm consistency and slender cylindric
shape, curving but a little inwards, gradually tapering from the
base to a finely pointed extremity, and the surface unbroken by
a,ny ridges or spines. From the middle of the anterior surface
of each basal joint, and directed antei'iorly, arises a prominent
immovable spineform process, while from the inner side which
faces directly downwards, there is projected a definite ridge
■extending nearly to the distal end of the joint, having the margin
concave. The pair of ridges are only separated medianly by a
very narrow fissure, and together form a concave space which
fits over the back of the female during copulation. The distal
angle of each ridge is narrowly rounded and a little produced
towards the end of the joint.

Second antennae of female about the length of the head,
obliquely truncated at the end with the inner angle drawn out to
an acute point.

Branchial feet of shape normal to the genus, no difference in
the two sexes ; covering plates rather small, gills of about
similar size. Endopodite with terminal lobe broad and laterally
expanded more or less, those pairs of about the middle area being
very much so, side margin meeting the distal end in a broad even
curve, and fringed with spiniform setae, the end being only a

Phyllopoda of Australia. 233

little curved, and bearing longer and finer bristles. The tJrsfc
endite is of usual shape, that of the first pair bearing at about
the middle of the length a particularly stout, long, and acutely
pointed spine directed upwards and slightly curved, and bearing
on the distal half many minute barbs. The second endite is
about one-third of the length of the first. The third, fourth and,
fifth small and subconical, each gradually becoming smaller and
bearing several of the usual long feathered setae, also one long
finely feathered spine and one very short one, that of the third
being very long. The exopodite is long, rather narrow, and
apically bluntly pointed. The last pair of feet have no basal
plate, nor gill, and is smaller in size than the first pair.

Penes double, wide at the base, hind margin straight, front, in the
middle, having a wide and deep sinus, defined above by a right,
angle, and below by a conical pointed projection. Ovisac scarcely
extending beyond the second tail segment, lateral lobes very large,
widely divergent, and extending dorsally far beyond the level of
the back, ventrally narrowly united, not bulging at all outwards,
neck very short and thick, and pointing directly outwards.

Caudal rami less than one-third the length of the ultimate
segment, of flattened form, with the extremity broadly rounded,
and the edges thickly fringed with feathered setae.

Length. — $ 23 mm. $ 18 mm.

Locality. — Brackish-water swamp near Lake Alexandrina,
South Australia. (S.A. Museum, collected November, 1890).

Remarks. — Of the specimens received about 20 are males of
pretty uniform size, and only one female of rather smaller size.
It is named in compliment to Mr. A. Zietz, F.L.S., Assistant
Director of the South Australian Museum.

Genus 3 — Branchinella, nov.

Characters. — In general appearance like Branchipus ; body
stout, tail of nine segments besides the caudal rami, the latter
well developed and articulated to the terminal segment. Cepha-
lon large. Eyes large and prominent. Prehensile antennae of
male without any spur or accessory branch other than the frontal
appendages, basal joint stout and fleshy and of cylindric form,
second joint very much narrower, quite simple, firm and chiti-

10a

234 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

nous, curved evenly inwards, not at all angularly bent near the
tip, inner surface usually bearing transverse ridges. Frontal
appendages simple, spinulose, minute to very long and flexuose,
proximally coalescent and united to the frontal base of the
claspers.

Second antennae in the female very long, flattened, flexuose,
apically tapering to a point ; in fully matured forms often extend-
ing as far back as the limit of the trunk.

Branchial feet possessed with the usual parts ; covering
lamellae large ; exopodite large, broadly ovoid ; distal lobe of
endopodite well extended, ventral margin distinctly emarginated,
inner margin substraight, scarcely or not at all produced beyond
the level of the endites ; endites clearly marked oS" from the
stem.

Ovisac large and stout, of pyriform shape, posteriorly tapei'ing
to a rather long neck. Eggs numerous, generally marked with
facets bordered by raised ridges.

Male with a pair of penes, each lying introverted within a
simple unnotched sheath protruding a little from the segment ;
when everted, of subcylindrical shape, long and spinulose.

Remarks. — This new genus is instituted to receive the two
following Branchipods. From Branchipus, with which they
accord closely in very many respects, they differ in the male
claspers being without any accessory branch or spine, and the
terminal joint not being at all angularly bent near the tip ; also
in the long and ribbon-like second antennae in the female, and
apparently in the peculiarly characterised penes of the male.
From Ohirocephalus, with which the second species might be
placed if we relied on the frontal appendages, there are other
differences of more generic importance which appear to separate
it from that genus.

1. Branchinella austral iensis, Richters.
(Plate XXX.)

Branchipus australiensis, Dr. F. Richters, Journal de Museum
Godeff"roy, xii., 1876, pp. 43, 44, pi. 3.

Specific Characters. — Body stout, cephalon of about equal
length to the first four segments of trunk, trunk of equal length

Phyllopoda of Australia. 235

to the tail. Branchial feet each with covering plate very large,
distal lobe of endopodite (6th endite) rather short, broadly
rounded in average sized sexually matured specimens, but in
larger ones much longer, and narrower distally, often produced
considerably beyond the end of the exopodite. Distal margin
emarginate.

In each of above characters the two sexes agree. Male of
smaller size than female, and antennules longer. Claspers large
and powerful, basal joint with inner surface clothed with minute
teeth, second joint longer than the first, inner surface possessing
transverse ridges. Frontal appendages minute, simple, curled
inwards and downwards, their inner margin minutely spinulose,
united proximally, and attached to frontal base of antennae.
Caudal rami at least as long as the last four segments of tail
combined, (in female somewhat shorter). Sheath of penes not
notched, penes, when everted, stout, bent outsvards and hind-
wards in the shape of a sickle, distal half thickly clothed with
short recurved spines, proximal half possessing large, stout,
acute spines pointing proximally.

Fetnale. — Second antennae very long, flattened, flexuose,
gradually narrowing to a somewhat drawn-out, pointed end ;
sometimes they extend as far back as the end of the trunk, but
in younger although sexually mature forms often very much
shorter. The ovisac large, pear shaped, with apex elongated,
and furnished on the ventral surface, in a line with the extremity
of the first segment of the tail, with a small protruding trans-
verse ridge or lip. In forms bearing eggs the ovisac varies in
size, extending in some to the end of the fourth, and in others to
the sixth segment of the tail. Eggs sculptured with irregular
hexagonal facets bounded by conspicuous ridges.

Length of largest $ exclusive of caudal rami, 30 mm. Length
of largest $ exclusive of CRudal rami, 40 m.m.

Colour. — Translucent, caudal rami vivid reddish-orange, ovisac
flecked with patches of sky blue.

Distribution. — Queensland, inland area (Dr. Richters) ; El wood
and Rosstown, Southern Victoria (collected by Mr. R. Cummins,
B.Sc.) ; Goornong, near Bendigo (collected by Mr. Alex. Purdie),
St. Arnaud (collected by Mr. C. J. Gabriel), both Northern
Victoria ; coastal area of South Australia and Central Australia
(S.A. Museum).

236 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Remarks. — This large and handsome Branchipod has not
previously been recorded outside of Queensland. Besides other
localities it is quite common near Melbourne (Elwood and Ross-
town), except when the little rain pools in which they live dry
up, such being the case for several months every year. I have
never known them to live in the lai-ger swamps that contain
water all the year round.

The original paper of Dr. Richters describing this species from
Queensland has apparently been entirely overlooked, for in Pro-
fessor Packard's important monograph of the Phyllopods of
North America, published seven years later than the above
paper,^ in which he gives a list of known species of the family, it
is not included, and he remarks that no Branchipodidae occur in
Australia, which misstatement has been made since. Sars also
has missed the above record in his list of Australian Phyllopoda.^

My thanks are due to Mr. T. S. Hall, M.A., for bringing under
my notice Richters' paper, and I have no doubt from comparison
with his figures and description that the Victorian form speci-
fically agrees with it. I have, however, thought it advisable to
more fully describe it. The foregoing description and following
supplementary remarks have been made after an examination of
numerous living specimens.

Supple/iientary Description. — The males and females li\'e in
about equal proportion. They are of graceful form, and, like
other Branchipods, swim on their back by the aid of eleven pairs
of large, leaf-like appendages, which, as is well known, serve also
for respiration, and are kept in rhythmic undulation. When
occasion warrants they are able to propel themselves rapidly by
strong jerks with their long tail, which is provided at the end
with a pair of large feathered appendages. By the movement of
the branchial feet a current of water is formed that flows from
behind forwards between the two rows of feet, and in this way
the food reaches the mouth.

The trunk or mesosome is somewhat broader than the cephalon,
and is formed of eleven segments which are of subequal length
and breadth. The tail, or metasome, is formed of nine segments.

1 Twelfth Annual Report of U.S. Geol. and Geog'. Survey for the year 1878, part i. (1883).

2 Arch, for Math, og Naturvid, Christiania, xvii., No. 2.

i

Pli Ijllopoda of Audralla. 237

the first two (genital segments) are partly coalescent and bear on
the ventral surface the two penes and ovisac of the respective
sex, the remaining seven gradually become narrower landwards.
The cephalon is divided into an anterior part and a so-called
cervical segment ; the anterior part is broadest posteriorly, the
stalked eyes are lai'ge and prominent, the ocellus, or simple eye,
minute, the antennules long and filiform, and extending in the
males to about the end of the basal joint of the claspers. In the
females they are relatively slightly shorter.

The labrum, or anterior lip, is large and curves below, where
it covers the lower part of the powerful mandibles. Viewed from
below it is of the visual triangular shape, with the apex pointed
hindwards.

The branchial limbs are borne by the eleven segments of the
trunk, anrl gradually increase in size towards the middle, then
gradually become smaller posteriorly. They are of normal form
and size, the covering plates very large and their outer margins
seirated, the gills much smaller and of ovoid shape, the exopodite
broadly ovoidal, with outer margin almost straight, inner strongly
and evenly curved from the proximal to the distal extremity.
The distal lobe of endopodite (6th endite) is short and broad in
average sized specimens (Fig. 7), in larger ones longer and pro-
portionately narrower. The inner side is never produced beyond
the level of the endites above, and the distal margin is distinctly
excavated, most noticeable in the limbs of the middle area; inner
margin more or less strongly curved (least so in matured forms),
and evenly merged into the distal margin. There is no funda-
mental difference in the two sexes.

The terminal segment is short, and from it the caudal rami
extend posteriorly and somewhat divergent, and are rather longer
in the males than females ; they are dorso-ventrally fi.attened, and
taper gradually from the base to the narrowly rounded extremity,
the lateral margins and end being fringed with long feathered
setse.

In mature females the ovisac is pear-shaped, with the apex
elongated, but is subject to considerable dilFerences of size and,
ill a lesser degree, shape. I have found ripe eggs in forms where
its distal extremity only extended to slightly below the end of
the third segment of the metasome (Fig. 1), and others, but

238 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

larger forms, where it extended to the end of the sixtli segment
(Fig. 3), and in these the shape was more conical. The opening
at the end of the ovisac is guarded by two somewhat protuberant
lips, the dorsal one somewhat overlapping the ventral one. • On
the ventral surface in the mid axis, towards the anterior end, the
wall of the ovisac projects to form a prominent and somewhat
narrow I'idge, or lip ; this possibly is of use during copulation.

In males the testes (Fig. 4) of each side mostly lie near the
surface in the first segment of the metasome, which is somewhat
swollen, and this portion of them is very much coiled, and plainly
to be seen from the outside. From this segment they extend into
the third segment, but run further from the surface in a straight
line on each side of the intestine, and are only to be seen on
careful dissection. On this account it may be that Dr. Richters'
description is due to a mistake, for he says that this species is
peculiar to the genus in that the testes are only situated in the
first segment of the tail.

The vas deferens of each side runs directly into the second
segment, and protrudes outwards for a short distance; this portion,
which I refer to in this paper as the sheath of the penis, is partly
guarded by an angular projection of the wall of the segment.
Several specimens were noticed with two long and comparatively
stout cylindical processes, the penes, comparable to the cirri of
some writers, which were bent outwards and landwards in the
form of a sickle (Figs. 5 and 6). These have the distal half of
the surface facing inwards very rugose, while more proximally
there are several stout spines. The outer surface has the distal
half thickly studded with minute spines, and along the whole
length of each side there is a longitudinal row of stout, acute,
re-curved spines, with swollen bases, which increase in size
proximally.

On dissecting a specimen in which the penes were not project-
ing outwards it was found that each were lying reflected back-
wards (introverted) within the lumen of their respective siieath,
with the distal extremity extending to almost as far back as the
testes. It is clear, therefore, that the contents of each testis ar«
forced outwards by muscular contraction, and each penis becomes
pushed outwards (everted) in consequence of the pressure of the
seminal fluid behind, so that what was the innermost wall of the

Phyllopoda of Australia. 239

penis when lying within the lumen of the sheath becomes the
outermost, and each penis Ijecomes inflated with seminal fluid.
When one or both of the penes enter the ovisac it would seem on
structural grounds as if they were prevented from being with-
drawn in consequence of the large recurved spines, and must
perforce be left beliind after copulation. I have, however, never
found any remains of them in the ovisac bearing mature eggs.
When once the penes are everted, there do not appear to be
any muscles to enable them to be again introverted.

2. Branchinella eyrensis, sp. nov. (Pi. XXXI.).

Body of normal form, tail, exclusive of caudal rami, about
one-fourth shorter than the cephalon and trunk combined.
Caudal rami in the male as long as the four terminal
segments combined. Frontal appendages very long and ribbon-
like, extending much beyond the limit of the claspers,
united proximally for aljout one-third of their length and
bearing stout spines only. Claspers of normal form, second
joint evenly curving inwards, of similar length to first joint,
inner surface with very strongly marked transverse ridges.
Second antennae of f'-male apparently similar to those of B.
australiensis (incomplete in my specimens).

Branchial feet with distal lobe of endopodite narrower and
longer than in B. australiensis, those of the middle area in
specimens of about 3.3 mm. in length, with the inner and outer
margins converging to a narrow apex, which is emarginated in
the middle. Gills subcircular in outline.

Ovisac without any projecting lip or ridge on ventral surface.
Penes when everted from their sheaths of very great length,
extending as far back as the penultimate tail segment, normally
spin u lose.

Leno^th. — Male, exclusive of caudal rami, 33 nnn. ; female a
little longer, but one specimen, locality unknown, fully 50 mm.

Distribution.— ^i\X.^v holes, Upper Onkaringa Creek, Central
Australia (S.A. Museum, collected during Elder expedition, May,
1891). One female, Wintinoriua, near Lake Eyre (collected by
Mr. H. J. Grayson).

Remarks. — Five specimens were received, and all of about
similar size. In general appearance they .are very like B.

240 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

australiensis, but are conspicuously characterised in the male by
the very much greater length of the frontal appendages and
penes, and in the female l)y no lip existing on the ventral surface
of the ovisac. The feet also of the middle area have the terminal
lobe of the endopodite considerably narrower distally.

Genus 4— Stpeptocephalus, Baird, 1854.

Streptocephalus (?) archeri, G. 0. Sars. Arch, for Math.

og Naturvid, Christiania, xviii., No. 8, pp. 4-13, pi. 1.

This species was descril)ed from a single female specimen that
had been raised from dried mud from a waterhole, salt at high
tide, 20 miles from Rockhampton. On account of the sex its
generic position is uncertain. The following is an abreviation of
of Sars' description.

Female. — Body very slender, with the trunk about the length
of the tail (excluding the caudal rami). Head exhibiting on the
dorsal face a small, but well-defined, rounded quadrangular and
somewhat elevated area. Eyes comparatively large. Antennnlae
narrow and elongated. Antennae about the length of the anten-
nulae, applanted, foliaceous, not compressed, and having at the
obtusely rounded tip a very short pointed projection. Legs
apparently of the usual structure, outer part of endopodite
broadly rounded, exopodite lamelliform, much smaller on the
first than on the succeeding pairs, basal plate minutely and
I'egularly serrated. Ovisac rather short and narrow, scarcely
reaching beyond the second caudal segment ; enclosed ova of a
very peculiar shape, being each surrounded by a tetrahedric shell.
Caudal rnmi very much elongated, being about half the length of
tail proper, and rather narrow, tapering distally, and fringed all
round with strong plumose setae. Body, in the living state of
the animal, highly pellucid, nearly colourless, cauilul rami, how-
ever, tinged with a vivid reddish-orange. Length of adult
female, 9 mm.

Unrecognisablk Speciks.

Chirocephalus, sp.
Mr. T. Whitelegge says in his list of Invertebrate Fauna
(Journal Royal Soc. N.S.W., xxiii., 1889, p. 318) that there are

Phylloj)oda of Australia. 241

three examples in the Australian Museum, which were collected
from near Yass, N.S.W., that are distinct from the European
species.

Tribe 2. — Notostraca.

Phyllopods with body more or less covered above by a broad
vaulted carapace, which is united anteriorly with the head.

Family Apodidae.

Carapace broadly i-ounded in front, slightly vaulted and
indented behind, with a distinct transverse cervical furrow
defining the head posteriorly ; the latter shovel-formed and
exhibiting a crescent-shaped ventral duplicature, behind which
the antennae and oval parts are situated. Hind part of the body
projecting more or less behind the carapace, and divided into
numerous segments, encircled by tine spikes. Caudal filaments
very much elongated. Males very rare, considerably smaller
than the females, and without special prehensile organs. (G. O.
Sars, in part).

Remarks. — This family contains only two genera, which are
closely allied, and have a world-wide distribution. Each is repre-
sented in Australia.

Synopsis op the Genera.

1. Last caudal segment not prolonged between the caudal
filaments to a lamellar expansion. — Apus.

3. Last caudal segment bearing a lamellar expansion. — -
Lepidurus.

Genus 1 — Apus, Schaeffer, 1756.

Apus austPaliensis, Spencer and Hall.

References. — Spencer and Hall, Victorian Naturalist, vol. xi.
(1895), p. 16L Spencer and Hall, Report Horn Expedition to
Central Australia, part ii., Zoology, pp. 231-234, pi. 20, figs. 1-3.
Sars, Arch, for Math, og Naturvid, Christiania, xix.. No. 1, pp.
5-12, pi. i. and ii.

■242 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Distribution. — West Australia, South Australia, inland area of
New South Wales, and northern area of Victoria.

Genus 2 — LepidUPUS, Leach.
Lepidupus viridis, Baird.

1850. Lepidurus viridis, Baird. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lend.,

p. 254, fig. 1.
1866. Lepidurus angasii, Baird. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond.,

p. 122, tig. 1.
1878. Lepidurus kirkii, G. M. Thomson. Trans. New

Zealand Inst., xi., p. 260, pi. ii., fig. E4.

1878. Lepidurus compressus, G. M. Thomson. Trans.

New Zealand Inst., xi., p. 260, pi. ii., fig. E5.

1879. Lepidurus viridulus, Tate. Proc. Royal Soc. South

Australia, 1878-9, p. 136.
(?) 1894. Lepidurus angasii, G. O. Sars. Arch. Naturv.,
Christiania, xii., pt. 2, No. 7, pp. 4-13, pi. i.,
fig. 1-15.
1896. Lepidurus viridis, Spencer and Hall. Report Horn
Expedition to Central Australia, pt. ii.. Zoology,
p. 233.
This species is by no means uncommon in rain-water pools in
the neighbourhood of Melbourne, and also inland.

Distribution. — Inland and coastal areas of N.S.W. ; northern
and southern areas of Victoria ; southern area of South Australia ;
Tasmania ; and New Zealand.

Tribe 3 — Cotichostraca.

Characters. — -Phyllopoda, with body surrounded by a large
ibivalved shell, so that the animal may be completely enclosed.
Often bearing a striking resemblance to certain bivalved
Mollusca.

Family 1 — Limnadiidae.

Characters. — Shell generally compressed and furnished, in the
full-grown animal, with a varying number of lines of growth.
Head of medium size, an<l only slightly diffin-ent in the two sexes.

Phyllopoda of Australia. 243-

Trunk elongated and very movable ; caudal part well developed,
curved downwards, forming posteriorly two juxtaposed dentated
lamellae, and terminating in two movable claws. First pair of
antennae more or less elongated, and generally lobed in one
margin ; second pair with slender rami, considerably longer than
the scape. Masticatory part of the mandibles without distinct
teeth. Legs numerous (16-28 pairs), with comparatively short
endites ; dorsal lobe of exopodite in the female elongated, in two
or three of the middle pairs, into filiform appendages, supporting
the egg-mass. (G. O. Sars).

Synopsis op Local Genera.

(A) Head possessing a frontal clavate process ("haft" or "affix-
ing" organ). First two pairs of legs in male prehensile.

1. Shell much compressed, thin, ovoidal, pellucid, lines of

growth inconspicuous, few ; no trace of umbones.
Animal not crowded within the shell ; about 18 pairs
of feet. Bisexual. — Eulimnadia.

2. Shell much compressed, parchment-like, dorsum possessing

a longitudinal series of spiny processes ; lines of
growtli conspicuous ridges ; umbones minute. Feet
numerous, 26-32 pairs. — Limnadopsis.

3. Shell compressed, rather thin, ■ male differing very con-

siderably from female in form ; lines of growth
inconspicuous, very numerous ; umbones large and
prominent. Otherwise like Eulimnadia. — Para-

LIMNADIA.

(B) Head without a frontal appendage. Shell with more or
less prominent umbones.

4. Shell orbicular, thin, smooth, lines of growth few (about

7). Antennulae simple; only first pair of legs in
male prehensile. — Cyclestheria.

5. Shell oval, more or less globose, generally brownish in

colour, lines of growth conspicuous, numerous (about
10-20). Antennulae lobed. First two pairs of legs,
prehensile in the male. — Estheria.

244 Froceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Genus 1— Eulimnadia, Packard, 1874. (P]. XXXIV.,
Figs, la, b, c).

1. Eulimnadia dahli. G. O. Sars.

Reference. — Arch, for Math, og Xaturvid, Christiania, xviii.,
Xo. 8, pp. 14-30, pis. ii.-vi.

Specific Characters. — Shell in both sexes of same appearance,
very thin and pellucid, without any trace of umbones ; seen
laterally, of a rather regular elliptical shape, with the height but
little more than two-thii'ds of the length, dorsal margin evenly
vaulted, and having its greatest convexity somewhat in front of
the middle, ventral margin forming a perfectly even curve, and
joining the anterior and posterior edges without any intervening
angle, both extremities nearly equal, obtusely rounded at the tip,
and having above a distinct angle ; seen from above, narrow
fusiform, the greatest width in front of the middle. Maximum
number of lines of growth only four pairs. Head having in both
^exes the frontal part considerably produced ; rostrum in female
very short and obtuse, being only defined in front by a slight
sinus ; that of male considerably more prominent, terminating in
an acute point. Antennae and oral parts of the usual structure,
■excepting that the posterior maxillae are quite rudimentary.
Legs, 20 pairs, having the epipodites of considerable size ; the
two anterior pairs in male very strong, subchelate. Tail with
two short, juxtaposed dentiform projections in front of the caudal
■claws, the latter, throughout the greater part of their length,
fringed posteriorly with long ciliated setae, caudal plates termi-
nating below in a very acute, straight corner, and having the
posterior edge divided into 12-16 small denticles; dorsal spines
present only in a single distinctly developed pair.

Length of shell in female attaining 7 mm.; in male, 5.50 mm.
<G. O. Sars).

Locality. — Neighbourhood of Port Darwin, Northern Australia
(Sars) ; Charlotte Waters, Central Australia (collected by P. M.
Byrne, Esq., March, 1896).

Ronarks. — A considerable number of specimens that I have
from Charlotte Waters are undoubtedly this species. They agree
very closely with Sars' description and figures in all respects

Fhyllopocla of Australia. 245

except in not possessing a rudimentary joint to the fifth endite
of the fourth pair of legs in the male; also the shells of the
female are frequently considerably more vaulted, but except for
this, which appears to be a variable feature in other species of
this genus, the shape is in exact agreement.

2. Eulimnadia sordida, King.

Limnadia sordida, King. Proc. Royal Soc. Van Diemen's
Land, 1855, p. 70.

King gives no figure, and the only description i.s — " Branchial
legs as in Limnadia stanleyana, 3rd finger of tridactyle feet,
three-jointed; last segment of the body with 19 or 20 spines on
each side. This species is larger than L. stanleyana, and bears
considerable resemblance to L. mauritiana (Grevin)."

Locality. — Pond near Botany Bay, N.S.W. (King) ; Moore
Park, near Sydney, N.S.W. (Whitelegge).

Remarks. — I am inclined to regard E. rivolensis, Brady, as a
synonym of this species, but without examining specimens from
the original locality it is impossible to say ; it is certainly con-
generic with it. The subapical process of the two first pairs of
legs are tliree-jointed ; also it agrees in the number of dorsal
denticles of the tail.

3. Eulimnadia rivolensis, Brady. (PI. XXXIL).

Brady, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1886, p. 87, fig. D. ; Spencer
and Hall, Report Horn Expedition, pt. ii., p. 238.

Description. — Shell greatly compressed, thin, smooth, and
parchment-like, without any trace of umbones, lines of growth
scarcely discernable without staining, comparatively numerous,
crowded very closely together for a short distance at the margin
(number about 6), afterwards abruptly nmch wider apart (about
5) ; none on the umbonal region nor for some distance surround-
ing it ; all meeting closely together at the antero-dorsal angle.
Male in lateral view rather narrowly ovoidal in fully matured
specimens, but in younger ones shorter and relatively broader
behind ; back evenly arched, varying considerably in degree of
convexity ; greatest convexity a little in front of the middle ; front
deep and boldly rounded, curving a little beyond the end of the

246 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

hinge without any definite angle, thence receding in a bold curve
to join tlie ventral margin ; the latter almost straight, posteriorly
ascending somewhat and merging into an evenly rounded tip.
FetJiale of similar shape, but with back more vaulted.

Head with rostral expansion in female short and generally
acute at the tip, but sometimes obtuse like E. dahli ; in the male,
compared with that species, very much longer, and not acutely,
but bluntly, pointed.

Legs, 20 pairs. Male with two first pairs of legs subchelate,
subapical appendage long, three-jointed ; hands in lateral view
subquadrate, inner margin above the thumb-like projection with
an angular prominence. Fourth leg not having a rudimentary
joint to fifth endite as in E. dahli, remaining pairs as in the
female, except that in the latter the ninth and tenth pairs have
the proximal lobe of the exopodite with a long thread-like
appendage. Tail long, with the two longitudinal dorsal ridges
almost straight, each possessing very many (about 20) acute little
denticles, also from 3-5 pairs in front of the anal setae only
slightly larger than the others. Movable caudal claws evenly
curved upwards, and not more than the proximal half bearing
feathered setae ; in E. dahli they are much straighter, and the
greater part of their length bears feathered setae.

Size. — ^?, length about 9 mm., width variable; $ , rather less
in length and proportionately narrower.

Distribution. — Neighbourhood of Rivoli Bay, South Australia
(Brady) ; Upper Onkaringa Creek, Central Australia (S. and H.);
Cheltenham, Southern Victoria ; and, if my supposition of its
being synonymous with E. sordida. King, is correct, also New
South Wales.

Remarks. — I have been enabled to examine specimens of this
species collected from the same neighbourhood as the types came
from, also a few specimens fi'om Victoria. The latter agree in
all respects with the former except that the shape of the shell
posteriorly is deeper and more broadly rounded. As in other
species of Eulimnadia males occur in much fewer numbers than
females.

4. Eulimnadia victoriensis, sp. nov. (PI. XXXITL).

Description. — Shell smooth, very thin and translucent, much
compressed, without any umbones ; lines of growth inconspicuous,

Phyllopoda of Australia. 247

maximum number four, meeting closely together at antero-dorsal
angle. In male, seen from the side of oblong shape, back evenly
aj'ched, front deep, not produced in the least beyond the antero-
doi'sal angle, subtruncated, then receding in a bold even curve,
and merging into the ventral margin ; posterior considerably
narrower than anterior margin, and merging into the ventral
margin in a wide, even sweep. That of female agreeing with
the male, except that the back is more vaulted, often very much
more so, the width being sometimes fully three-quarters of the
length ; its greatest convexity a little in front of the middle.

Male with two first pairs of legs having hands rather slender,
a little longer than broad, gradually widening distally, only a
barely perceptible rounded prominence above the thumb on the
inner margin ; subapical appendage two-jointed, that of second
not very much longer than in the first pair. Third legs with
fifth endite short and broad, and its cylindric appendage rather
short ; exopodite comparatively long, and extending not far short
of the extremity of the cylindric appendage. Fourth legs with-
out any rudimentary joint on the fifth endite. Remaining pairs
without any apparent difference from E. rivolensis. Each of the
legs in the female also similar to that species. Rostrum of
female short, generally acute, but sometimes obtuse ; that of
male vai-ying in length, rarely so long as in E. rivolensis, and
mostly more pointed. Tail-piece with dorsal plates fringed with
about 16 subequal little denticles, and anterior to the setae
generally three slender and relatively long curved ones, gradually
increasing in length anteriorly. Caudal claws and terminal teeth
of dorsal plates slender, the former with inner margin feathered
for not more than half their length.

Length of largest female in my collection, 9.5 mm.; that of
male, which are much fewer in numbers, 8.25.

Locality. — Elwood, southern area of Victoria.

Synopsis of Local Species.

Anterior and posterior edges of shell nearly equal, and
narrowly rounded, lines of growth about four, not meeting
closely together at the antero-dorsal angle ; end of tail, below, at
the articulation of caudal claws, with a pair of conspicuous acute

11

248 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

processes ; caudal claws almost straight, and feathered for most
of their length. Male with rostrum short and acute ; suhapical
cylindric appendage to hands two-jointed. — dahli.

Sha|)e of shell rather like preceding species, although deeper
and snbtruncated in front, never produced in front of the
anterior end of the hinge as in following species, back of female
generally greatly vaulted ; lines of growth about four, meeting
closely together at antero-dorsal angle ; caudal claws slender,
feathered for not more than half their length.- — vicioriensis.

Shell in front produced in a broadly rounded curve somewhat
beyond the level of the end of the hinge, never immediately
receding therefrom ; rostral expansion of male very long and
usually bluntly rounded ; subapical cylindric appendage of hands
three-j ointed. — rivolensis.

This species may be a synonym of sordida.

Genus 2 — Papalimnadia, G. O. Sars.

This genus has been suggested by Sars for the following
species, but so far is undefined by a description.

Paralimnadia stanleyana, King. (PI. XXXIV., Fig. 2 a, b).

Limnadia stanleyana, King. Proc. Roy. Soc. Van Diemen's
Land, 1855.

Limnadia stanleyana. King. Trans. Entom. Soc. N. S. Wales,
vol. i., p. 162, pi. xi.

Limnadia stanleyana, Glaus. Ueber den Korperbau einer
australischen Limnadia und iiber das Mannchen derselben.
Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Zoologie, Bd. 22, 1872, p. 355, pi. xxix.
and XXX.

Eulimnadia stanleyana, Sars. Arch, for Math, og Naturvid,
Christiania, xvii., pt. 2, No. 7, pp. 16-28, pis. 2 and 3.

Paralimnadia stanleyana, Sars. Id., xviii.. No. 8, p. 15.

Specific Characters. — Shell much compressed, and, seen from
the side, in fully grown females, subtriangular in form, umbones
very prominent and occurring much nearer the anterior than
posterior extremity, dorsal margin obliquely declining, ventral
margin strongly curved in the middle, anterior extremity short,

Phyllopoda of Australia. 249

rounded, anterior rather produced and obtusely truncated at the
tip ; shell in young specimens more regularly oval or elliptical in
form, with the umbones not at all projecting. Shell in adult
male much narrower than in female, seen from the side, oblong
oval in form, umbones not very prominent, dorsal margin nearly
horizontal, posterior extremity broadly expanded. Valves rather
thin, and provided in fully grown specimens with numerous lines
of growth, in young ones, as usual, with a much smaller number
of such lines. Head triangular, with the frontal part narrowly
produced, and having the usual affixing organ ; rostral expansion
in female much shorter and blunter than in male, and in both
sexes defined from the frontal part by an obtuseangular notch.
Legs, 17 pairs in female, 18 pairs in male ; epipodites, or gills,
not particularly large. The two anterior pairs of legs in male
subsimilar, prehensile ; hand rather expanded, with a triangular
projection inside ; claw very strong, and tipped by a small suck-
ing disk, thumb obtuse, densely clothed with curved spinules and
carrying a small setous lobe, subapical appendage biarticulate.
Tail with about ten denticles on each side.

Length of adult female 10 mm., of male 11 mm. (G. O. Sars).

Remarks. — Professor Sars refers with doubt as a synonym
Estheria compressa, Baird, from India, and also says Eulimnadia
sordida. King, from N.S.W., may be specifically identical. I
think it more likely, however, as previously stated, that the
latter agrees with E. rivolensis, which I have had an opportunity
of examining and Sars had not.

Distribution. — Coogee, N. S.Wales (King) ; near Sydney (Sars) ;
and, if Baird's Estheria compressa is really a synonym, also in
India.

Genus 3— Limnadopsis, Spencer and Hall, 1896.
1. Limnadopsis birchii (Baird).

Estheria birchii, Baird. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1860, p.
392, pi. Ixxii., fig. 1 a-e.

Limnadopsis squirei, Spencer and Hall. Report Horn Expe-
dition, ii., p. 239, figs. 15-19.

Messrs. Spencer and Hall agree with me that their L. squirei
is in specific agreement with Baird's Estheria birchii^ — which,
however, is a normal Limnadopsis.

250 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

The species has been well described and figured by Spencer
and Hall.

Distribution. — Namoi River, N. S. Wales, in error originally
printed Wamoi River, South Australia (Baird) ; Alice Springs
country between Oodnadatta and Charlotte Waters, Central
Australia (S. and H).

2. Limnadopsis tatei, S. and H.

Reference. — Loc. cit., p. 241, figs. 20-27.

Distribution.- — Between Oodnadatta and Charlotte Waters.
Central Australia (S. and H.) ; Wintinorina, near Lake Eyre
(collected by Mr. H. J. Grayson).

2. Limnadopsis brunneus, S. and H.

Reference. — Loc. cit., p. 2-43, figs. 28, 29.

Locality. — Near Port Darwin, Northern Territory of South
Australia.

Synopsis op Species (partly after S. and H.)

L Dorsum of shell vvell arched. Length over 20 mm. Legs,.
32 pairs. Telson with dorsal spines numerous and
about equal in size. Carapace very minutely pitted.
Maximum number of ridges, 15. — birchii.

2. Dorsum generally straight. Length less than 15 mm. Legs,.

26 pairs. Telson with dorsal spines few and very
irregular in size. Maximum number of ridges, 13.
— tatei.

3. Shape subequal to preceding, but dorsal spines regular and

very small. Carapace pustulate. Ridges about 34.
Colour, rich brown. — bru?ineus.

Genus 4— Esther! a, Ruppell.

1. Estheria packardi, Brady. (PI. XXXIV., Figs. 3 a, b, c).

Brady, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1886, p. 85, fig, C. Sars,
Arch, for Math, og Naturvid, Christiania, xvii., pt. 2, No. 7, pp.
28-35, pi. 4, 5. Sars, Development from ova, op. cit., xviii., No..

Phyllopoda of Australia. 251

2, pp. 1-17, pis. 1-4. Spencer and Hall, Repoi't Horn Expedi-
tion, Zoology, ii., p. 236, figs. 9-14.

Synonym 1 E. boysii, Baird.

Specific Characters. — Shell tumid, seen from the side ovoidal,
vaiying somewhat in shape, of firm consistency. Umbones well
defined, occuring much nearer anterior than posterior end.
Ridges numerous, vaiying in number in diiTerent varieties.
Sculpture between ridges formed by more or less radiating lines.
Dorsal tail-plates thickly fringed with small acute denticles.
Segments of trunk dorsally with many spines. Distal dorsal
limit of head always distinctly produced backwards as a lappet
to overlie the following cervical segment. Scarcely swollen in
front of eyes.

Distribution. — Lake Bonney, near River Murray, and Fowler's
Bay, both in southern area of South Australia (Brady, typical
variety). Common in waterholes along the Finke and its tribu-
taries, also in the Macumba and Stevenson Rivers, Central
Australia (S. and H., three varieties) ; Hay, N. S. Wales (Sars,
typical variety). Typical variety common in many places in
Northern and Southern Victoria ; and if Sars is right in thinking
E. boysii specifically identical, also India.

The following four varieties have been determined by Spencer
and Hall : —

Estheria packardi., var. typica.

Length of adult shell about 9 mm. Spirit specimens dark
brown. Ridges, about 24 ; sculpture, well defined radial straight
lines, with their inner ends branching.

Estheria packardi, var. cancellata.

Shell more tumid than the preceding variety, but about similar
in size. Ridges, 30-40, crowded towards the margin ; sculpture
strongly marked, towards the margin with the crowded I'idges
cancellated, and their inner edge moniliform.

Estheria packardi., var. minor.

Shell moderately tumid, smaller than above (about 4 mm.).
Dorsum declining posteriorly behind the umbones. Umbones
very prominent. Ridges very numerous (about 30), beset with

252 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

long white setae ; sculpture not so strongly marked as in the
preceding variety and without any nioniliform appearance.

2. Esthepia elliptica, G. O. Sars. (PI. XXXVI. Fig. B).

Arch, for Math, og Naturvid, Christiania, xix., No. 1, pp. 12-
17, pi. 2.

Specific Characters, Female. — Shell, seen laterally, of a rather
regularly elliptical form, anything but equilateral, the umbones
placed far in front, dorsal margin behind the umbones nearly
straight, and not angular behind, free edges of valves evenly
curved throughout, both extremities being rounded and nearly
equal, though the anterior one appears a little more obtuse than
the posterior ; seen from above, rather tumid, greatest width in
front of the middle, posterior extremity more pointed than the
anterior. Valves of rather firm consistency, with 14 very
strongly marked and elevated, ridge-like, concentric lines of
growth, each provided in their posterior part with short, stout
bristles, surface between the lines finely and irregularly reticulate,
marginal area rather broad, and furnished with numerous densely
crowded concentric striae, which are not at all raised. Upper
surface of head bent at nearly a right angle close to cervical
impression, rostrum somewhat blunted at the tip. Number of
legs, 22-23 pairs. Tail of usual shape, with a single pair of
dentiform projections at the base dorsally, caudal plates produced
beneath into strong unguiform processes, and each having along
the dorsal edge numerous (from 20-30) denticles of unequal size,
caudal claws slender, without any setae at the base, but having
their outer part distinctly denticulated along the concave edge.
Colour, dark reddish brown. Lengtli of adult female scarcely
exceeding 5 mm. (G. O. Sars).

Locality. — Near Roebuck Bay, West Australia (G. O. Sars).

3. Estheria sarsii, sp. nov. (PI. XXXV., Figs. 1 a-f).

Description of Male. — Shell moderately tumid, of firm consis-
tency, seen from the side ovoidal, umbones much nearer the
anterior than posterior margin, very wide, and extending very
much above the dorsal line. Dorsal hinge considerably longer

Phyllopoda of Australia. 253

than half the length of the shell, terminating posteriorly in a
distinct obtuse angle, thence declining obliquely hindwards, and
later merging into ventral margin in a narrow curve. Front deep,
leaving dorsal line without any angle, thence forming a regular
broad curve, set vertically. Ventral margin evenly convex.
Lines of growth, about ten ridges, each fringed with short, thick
bristles ; sculpture reticulate near the margin, becoming irregu-
larly hexagonal more distally.

The animal is crowded within the shell, and quite normal to
the genus. It is characterised by a very prominent rounded
area in front of the confluent eyes, and the upper posterior limit
of the head segment projects backwards a little, but not nearly
so marked as in E. packardi.

The branchial feet, compared with E. packardi, are consider-
ably broader, and the stylet produced from the fifth endite
(calling the coxal lobe the first) is only one — not two — jointed.
The hands of the two first pairs of legs are subquadrate, being
wider proximally than E. packardi ; the margin of the outer
side is almost straight, the inner straight for half its distance,
when it is abruptly cut inwards, forming a right-angled projec-
tion. This marks the origin of the thumb, which is half the
length of the hand, and is directed directly downwards, not
deflected outwards as in E. packardi ; also in that species the
inner margin gradually widens from the proximal to the distal
end, unbroken by any angular projection.

The last few segments of tlie trunk have no spines, or only
minute ones, but more anteriorly they have a transverse series of
slender ones gradually increasing in size and number (about 10)^
but these are not set on such prominent elevated projections, nor
are they quite so numerous, as in E. packardi.

The tail segment is short and deeply concave al)ove ; in front of
the anal setae there is a single pair of short, straight denticles, broad
at the base and acutely pointed. The paired ridges bear but a
few very small irregularly set denticles, and terminate in a stout
upturned and curved one of normal size, that of each plate being,
as is usual in the genus, deflected at different angles. The
movable claws are comparatively short, and the inner margins,
clothed with feathered setae for about half their length.

Size. — Length of shell, 8 mm.; depth, 5 mm.

254 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Locality. — Lake Aurean, Murchison,West Australia, in associa-
tion with Artemia westraliensis (collected by J. T. Markes, Esq.,
January, 1896).

Re7narks. — I have but one example of this species, a male. It
differs materially from E. elliptica, another West Australian
species (of which only the female has been described), in the
shape of the shell, and, although of much larger size, in a rather
less number of ridges, also by not possessing the numerous
secondary lines of growth near the outer margins. It is named
in compliment to Professor G. O. Sars, the renowned carcinologist.

4. Estheria lutraria, Brady. (PI. XXXV., Fig. 2 a-e).

Brady, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1885, p. 85, tig. B; Spencer
and Hall, Report Horn Expedition, Zoology, ii., p. 234, figs. 4, 5.

Shell very large, reaching 14 mm. in length, and moderately
tumid. Dorsum straight for almost its total length, abruptly
curving into posterior margin without any angle, thence obliquely
receding anteriorly. Umbones small, narrowly pointed, and
very near the anterior limit. Front broadly and evenly rounded,
meeting the dorsum in an obtuse angle. Ridges equidistant, 12-
16, sometimes with fine bristles, sculpture between irregularly
reticulate. Mature forms with tail very short, dorsal lamellae
deeply concave (younger forms longer and not so concave),
denticles small, few (about 5), one pair in front of anal setae
straight and comparatively short, caudal claws thickly clothed
on inner margin for half their distance with feathered setae.
Dorsum of last few trunk segments without spines, or sometimes
very minute ones. Distal dorsal limit of head meeting the hind
margin in a right angle. Eyes confluent, area in front con-
spicuously swollen. Third pair of legs in male with fourth
endite having the lower angle produced downwards as a definite
little finger-like process tipped with a few setae ; articulated
stylet of fifth endite one-jointed.

Length of largest shell seen by me, 14 mm.

Distribution. — Tnnamincka, Central Australia (Brady); valley
of Stevenson River, and head of the Anna Creek, Central
Australia (S. and H).

Phyllopoda of Australia. 255

5. Estheria dictyon, S. and H. (PI. XXXVL, Fig. A).

Report Horn Expedition, Zoology, ii., p. 236, figs. 6-8.

Shell much smaller (about 8 mm.) than E. lutraria, more
compressed, of a thinner consistency, but quite similar in lateral
outline to E. lutraria. Ridges equidistant (about 10), bearing
stout bristles, sculpture forming irregularly hexagonal spaces.
Dorsal plates bearing about eight long, slender denticles, anterior
pair in front of anal setae very long, slender, and curved hind-
wards. Dorsum of last few segments of trunk each with a stout
spine, mox'e anteriorly with four transversely set ones ; caudal
claws unclothed, or bearing but few feathered setae. Head
agreeing with E. lutraria, but eyes not confluent, separated by a
narrow line.

Locality. — Palm Creek, in the James Range, Central Australia
(S. and H).

Remarks. — I am inclined to regard this as but a young form
of E. lutraria ; the specimens I have are rather macerated, and
scarcely well enough preserved to allow of the dissection of the
animal ; also there are no males for comparison.

Synopsis op Local Species.

1. Shell more or less tumid, umbones well defined and placed
far in front ; ridges comparatively very many, sculpture,
radiating lines variously formed. Upper distal ex-
tremity of head produced to a distinct linguiform
projection overlying the distal part of cervical segment.
Dorsal denticles of tail-piece small, very numerous, and
unequal in size. — packardi.

^. Shell seen laterally of a ratlier regular elliptical form, ridges
about 14 in number and near the margin many
secondary lines of growth, sculpture irregularly reticu-
late. Upper distal extremity of head, seen laterally,
bent at nearly a right angle ; rather prominent in front
of eye ; tail similar in shape and armature to previous
species, caudal claws rather slender, without any
feathered setae at the base, their outer part distinctly
denticulated. — elliptica.

256 Proceedings oj the Royal Society of Victoria.

3. Dorsal line terminating posteriorly in a distinct angle,

margin thence declining obliquely ; front deep and
boldly curved, umbones very large and prominent,
ridges about 12, equidistant; sculpture reticulate near
the margin, becoming irregularly hexagonal more dis-
tally. Head in lateral view with upper distal
extremity produced hindwards a little, forming an
acute angle with the apex rounded off; very prominent
in front of eyes. Tail possessing very few irregularly
placed little denticles. — sarsii.

4. Shell large, long, and tumid, back straight for almost its

total length, umbones very small and quite near the
anterior limit, ridges equidistant, 12-16, sculpture irregu-
larly reticulate. Head in lateral view sharply bent at
a right angle and projecting considerably beyond the
level of the cervical segment ; a little prominent in
front of the confluent eyes. Tail-piece with dorsal
denticles small, few (about 5), only one comparatively
short pair in front of anal setae. — lutraria.

5. Lateral outline of shell quite similar to above, but more

compressed, of thinner consistency and smaller size :
ridges equidistant, about 10, sculpture well defined irreg-
ularly hexagonal spaces. Eyes separated by a narrow
space. Tail-piece bearing about eight long slender den-
ticles, one pair in front of anal setae very long, slender,
curved hindwards. Caudal claws with none or very few
feathered setae at the base. — dictyon.

Genus— Cyclesthepia, G. 0. Sars, 1887.
Cyclestheria hislopi (liai.d). (PI. XXXVL, Fig. C 1, 2).

Estheria hislopi, Baird. Proc. Roy. Soc. London, xxlvii.
(1859), pi. Ixiii., fig. 1.

Limnadia hislopi, Brady. Journal Linn. Soc, xix., p. 294, pi.
xxxvii., figs. 1-3.

Cyclestheria hislopi, Sars. Vid. Selsk. For., Christiania, 1888,
No. 1, jip. 6-60, pis. i-viii.

Shell somewhat tumid, with the valves rather thin and pellucid,
irregularly rounded, dorsal line in adult females very strongly

Phyltopoda of Australia. 257

curved and sometimes almost angular in the middle, umbones
close to the anterior extremity, rather prominent lines of growth,
in adult specimens, 6-7. Cephalic crest evenly curved dorsally,
rostral part obtusely rounded and finely serrated above. Ocellus
nearly as large as eye. Antennae with both branches seven-
jointed, scape provided at the end above with two or three
expansions, densely supplied with recurved spines. Caudal plate
with 7-8 pairs of dorsal spines, besides the slender terminal claws,
last pair largest, and armed at base with a row of about 10 small
secondary denticles. Colour, clear yellowish or corneous, more
or less tinged with green.

Size. — Length of shell in adult ? attaining 5 mm., height
nearly the same. (Sars).

Distribution. — Near Rockhampton, Queensland (Sars); Nagpur,,
India (Baird) ; Ceylon (Brady) ; Celebes, East Africa, Brazil
(Sars).

Family 2 — Lynceidne.^

Characters. — Shell very tumid ; the valves without lines of
growth, and connected dorsally by an imperfect hinge. Head of
enormous size, ending in a downward-curved rostrum of a
different form in the two sexes. Trunk comparatively short
and massive; tail rudimentary. Number of legs not exceeding
12 pairs, only the first pair in the male prehensile. (Abbreviated
from Sars).

Genus — Lynceus, Miiller, 1785.

Syn. — Limnetis, Loven ; Hede-ssa, Lievin.

Generic Characters. — Shell more or less spherical, smooth, and'
without distinct umbones. Head carinated medially, and pro-
duced in the female to a more or less pointed rostrum, in the
male to one abruptly truncated ; at the .sides of the head a well-
developed arcuate fornix. Caudal part very small, not bent
downwards, and without dentated lamellae, but covered beneath
by an opercular lamella. Twelve pairs of legs in the female, in
the male ten. (Abbreviated from Sars).

1 1 have followed the Rev. T. R. R. Stebbing, who, by the law of priority, restores the
genus Lynceus in place of Limnetis. — The Zoologist, ilar., 1902.

258 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

1. Lynceus macleayana (King). (PI. XXXVL, Fig.
D 1, 2, 3).

Limnetis macleayana, King, Proc. Roy. Soc. Van Diemen's
Land, 1855, p. 70. Trans. Ent. Soc. N. S. Wales, vol. i., p. 161,
pi. xi. Sars, Archiv. for Math, og Naturvid, Christiania, xvii.,
No. 2, pp. 35-43, pis. 6-7.

1 have collected this species from swamps at Elwood,
Southern Victoria, and have also identified it in a collection of
Entomostraca received frotn Mr. C. Gabriel from St. Arnaud,
Northern Victoria. The specimens are without any differences
•either in form or size from Professor Sars' very careful drawings
and descriptions. King's specimens came from near Sydney, and
those of Sars' from Hay, N. S. Wales.

Length of adult female, 7 mm.; male about the same.

2. Lynceus tatei (Brady). (Pi. XXXVL, Fig. E, 1, 2, 3).

Limnetis tatei, Brady, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1886, p. 84.
Sars, Archiv. for Math, og Naturvid, Christiania xvii., No. 2,
pp. 43-46, pi. 8.

Specimens collected by me at Rosstown and Elwood, Southern
Victoria, diifer in no fundamental features from Sars' description,
Taut many were much larger, the females reaching the length of
6.3 mm. and males 5.75 mm.

Brady's specimens came from near Rivoli Bay, South Australia,
and Sars' from near Sydney, New South Wales.

3. Lynceus epemia (S. and H). (PL XXXVL, Fig. F,

1, 2, 3).

Limnetis eremia, Report Horn Expedition, Central Australia,
pt. ii., 1896, p. 244, tigs. 30, 31, 32.

Locality. — Cooper's Creek, Central Australia (S. and H.).

Synopsis op Local Spkcies.

1. Shell very tumid, nearly globose, seen from tlie side some-
what irregularly rounded, greatest height not nearly
attaining the lenuth and occurrinij in front of the

Phyllopoda of Australia. 259-

middle, dorsal margin boldly curved anteriorly, almost
straight and obliquely declining behind, venti'al margin
evenly curved and passing into the anterior and pos-
terior edge without any intervening angle, anterior
extremity broader than the posterior. Female with
rostral expansion in front view very bi'oad, obtusely
rounded at the extremity, without any lateral projec-
tions ; that in the male transversely truncated, lateral
corners scarcely produced. — mackayana.

2. Shell less tumid than preceding species, in lateral view

subcircular, nearly as high as it is long, dorsal margin
sloping rather steeply behind, anterior extremity very
broad and blunted, posterior narrow and rounded.
Rostral expansion in female much produced, frontal
view, narrow linguiform, with a distinct notch on each
side of the obtusely rounded tip ; in the male with
distal lateral edges projecting beyond the apical face. —
tatei.

3. Form of shell resembling the preceding one, but with

posterior extremity much more narrowly rounded.
Rostral expansion in both sexes shorter and more
constricted in the middle than either of the former
species ; that of the female notched on each side near
the apex ; in the male rapidly expanding distally,.
lateral edges not projecting beyond the face. — ereinta.

TERMINOLOGY AND EXPLANATION OF PLATES,
XXVII.-XXXVI.

Divisions of Body :

C. Cephalon (1. Head segment. 2. Cervical Segment).
Ms. Mesosome or Trunk. T Metasome or Tail.

Appendages of Cephalon :

A^ Antennulae or first antennae. A". Antennae or second
antennae. F. A. Frontal appendages of Branchipodidae.

260 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

H. Affixing on Haft organ of certain Limnadiidae.
Lp. Lip. M. Mandibles. M^ M'' First and second
Maxillae. (Eyes and ocellus).

Appendages of Mesosome :

L. Branchial legs with respective number added. (CP.
Covei'ing-plate. G. gill. E. exopodite. En^ — En^
endites).

Appendages of Metasome :

C.R. Caudal rami and Caudal claws. In Branchipodidae the
two first segments (genital segments) bearing Ov. ovary,
or P. penes, in respective sex. E. egg.

Plate XXVII.
Artemia australis ?.

Plate XXVIII.
A. Artemia westraliensis $ . B. Parartemia zietziana ? .

Plate XXIX.
Parartemia zietziana 3'.

Plate XXX.

Branchinella australiensis (Richters). 1. Small ovigerous
female, side view. \a. Extremity of second antennae.
2. Head and appendages of male. 2b. Armature of
inner surface of first joint of claspers. 2a. Right hand
branch of frontal appendage. 3. Portion of tail show-
ing ovary of large sized female. 4. Portion of tail of
male showing internal generative organs of one side,
with sheath of penis protruding outwards. 5. Similar
to preceding but with the two penes everted from their
sheaths. 6. Penis of left side more highly magnified.
7. Fifth branchial leg of small sized male.

Plate XXXI.
Branchinella eyrensis.

i

i

Phyllopoda of Australia. 261

Plate XXXII.
Eulimnadia rivolensis.

Plate XXXIII.
Eulimnadia victoriensis.

Plate XXXIV.

1. Eulimnadia dalili, after Sars. 2. Paralimnadia stanleyana,
after Sars. 3. Estheria packardi.

Plate XXXV.
1. Estheria sarsii. 2. Estheria lutraria.

Plate XXXVI.

A. Tail-piece of Estheria dictyon. B. Estheria elliptica. C.
Cyclestheria hislopi. D. Lynceus macleayana, lateral
view of shell, and front view of head of male and
female. E. Lynceus tatei. F. Lynceus eremia. (B, C,
D and E drawn after Sars, F after Spencer and Hall).

P)-o<\ R.S. Victoria, 1902. riatc XXVll.

AiriKMlA AUSTHALIS $.

Pror. R.N. Vu'torla, 1902. Plate XXVIIl.

A. ArTEMIA WESTHALIK.NSIS. B. Pa KAHI'KMIA ZIKTZIANA.

Prnr. U.S. Virtoria, I'.io-J. J'lale A'.V/X

PAHAin'KMIA ZlirrZIAN'A (?.

(3)

I'lUir. U.S. Vlrli>ri,i. niO:'. I'hiie XXX.

])HANrillM:iJ.A Al'srUALI KNSIS.

Proc. R.S. Victoria, 1902. Plate XXXI.

Branchinklla eyrensis.

I'rnr. R.H. Virtoriii, l<)()-2. Flat,; XXXII.

EULIMXADIA KIVOLHN'SIS,

Pror. R.S. Virt„riii, I'.Xr^. Haf>' XXXIII.

EULIMNADIA VICTOKIKNSI.S.

(i)

I'rur. R.S. Victoria, 1002. Plate XXXIV.

OAX^

1. EULIMXADIA DAIILI. 2. 1 'A K ALl MX AUIA STANLKVAXA.

3. EsTUKKIA PACKAKDI.

Proc. R.S. Victoria, 1902. Plate XXXV.

1. ESTHERIA SARSII.

2. E. LUTRARIA.

I'nir. R.S. Victoria, 1902. Plate XXXVI.

A. ESTHERIA DTCTYON.
C. Cyclksthkria HISLOPI.
E. L. TATKI.

B. E. ELLIPTICA.

D. Lynceus MA(^LEAYANA.

F, L. EREMIA.

ANNUAL REPORT OF THE COUNCIL

FOR THE YEAR 1901.

The Council of the Royal Society herewith presents to the
Members of the Society the Annual Report and Balance Sheet
for the year 1901.

The following Meetings were held : —

March 14. — Paper read: "On the Formation of the Coal
Seams of Gippsland," by W. H. Ferguson.

April 11. — Dr. W. R. Fox delivered a Lectnre with Experi-
ments, entitled "The Influence of the X-Rays on the Develop-
ment of Induction Apparatus."

May 16. — Papers: 1. "A Revision of the Genus Gymnorhina,"
by Robt. Hall. 2. " Some Geological Sections on the Mornington
Peninsula," by T. S. Hall and G. B. Pritchard. 3. "Contribu-
tions to the Palaeontology of the Older Tertiary of Victoria,
Lamellibranchs, Part IT.," by G. B. Pritchard.

June 13. — Papers: 1. "Further Notes on the Igneous Rocks
of South-western Victoria," by J. Dennant, F.G.S. 2. " Growth
Stages in Modern Trigonias belonging to the section Pectinatae,"
by T. S. Hall, M.A. Exhibits: A series of Skins of species of
the Genus Gymnorhina, by R. Hall.

July \\.— -Papers: 1. "The Geology of Mount Macedon," by
Professor J. W. Gregory, D.Sc, F.R.S. 2. "Some Remains of
an Extinct Kangaroo in the Dune Rock of the Sorrento
Peninsula," by Professor J. W. Gregory, D.Sc, F.R.S. Exhibits:
A series of Typical Minerals from Mount Lyell, by E. G. Hogg,
M.A. The series was explained by H. C. Jenkins, A.R.S.M.

August 8. — Paper: "Some little-known Victorian Decapod
Crustacea, with Descriptions of a New Species," by S. W. Fulton
and F. E. Grant. Professor W. C. Kernot exhibited and
described Elliott's Simplex Steam Engine Indicator. Mr.
P. de J. Grut showed a set of " Napier's Bones." Mr. P.
Baracchi showed the Gravity Pendulums constructed for use
on the Antarctic Expedition.

264 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

September 12. — Papers: 1. "Remarks on Nipher's Reversed
Photography," by Professor T. R. Lyle, M.A. 2. "Further
Descriptions of Tertiary Polyzoa of Victoria, Part VII.," by
C. M. Maplestone. Exhibits: A large series of Tasmanian
Rocks, by A. E. Kitson, F.G.S.

October 10. — Papers : 1. "A Suggested Nomenclature for the
Tertiaries of Southern Australia," by T. S. Hall and G. B.
Pritchard. 2. " Newer Pliocene Strata in the Moorabool
Valley," by J. F. Mulder. Mr. C. W. G. Officer exhibited and
described a large series of ethnological specimens collected by
himself on the Solomon Islands.

November 14. — Papers: 1. "Catalogue of Victorian Mollusca,
Part v.," by G. B. Pritchard and J. H. Gathff. 2. " A New
Oenus of the Phreatoicidae," by O. A. Sayce. The Secretary
read a note on the Society's Library, discussing its contents and
its needs. Mr. H. K. Rusden described a peculiar rainbow.

December 12. — Papers: 1. "Some electrical effects produced
by various interruptions when used with a Rhumkorff's Coil : {a)
The Motor interrupter, [b) The Wehuelt interruptor, {c) The
Caldwell interrupter," by Dr. W. R. Fox. The paper was
illustrated by a large series of experiments. 2. "The Fossil
Contents of the Eocene Clays of the Altona Coal Shaft," by
E. O. Thiele and F. E. Grant. 3. " On Some New Species of
Victorian Mollusca, Part V.," by G. B. Pritchard and J. H.
Gatliff. 4. "Geological Observations on Mount Mary and the
Lower Werribee Valley," by A. E. Kitson, F.G.S. 5. "Some
Features of the Ordovician Rocks at Daylesford, with a com-
parison with similar occurrences elsewhere," by T. S. Hart,
M.A., B.C.E. Exhibits: Mr. H. Bullen showed sections of
Fossil Casuarina from beneath the basalt of the Collingwood
Quarries. Mr. H. K. Rusden showed a series of Boomerangs
made by himself.

A Smoke Concert was held by the members at the Masonic
Hall, on 26th July, and a pleasant evening was passed.

During the year the building was repaired, and all the outside
woodwork was painted. It is intended to have the interior
painted and coloured at an early date.

During the year two members, two country member-s, and five
associates have been elected, and one member and three associates

Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria. 265

have resigned. The Hon. Sir J. W. Agnew, K.C.M.G., M.C.E.,
M.D., an Honorary Member, Sizar Elliott, a Life Member, and
J. S. Gotch, and John Danks, Ordinary Members have died.

The following publications have been issued : " Proceedings,"
Vol. XXIII., Pt. 2 ; Vol. XIV., Pt. 1.

The Librarian reports that 1285 additions have been made to
the Library during the year, and that the shelves are rapidly
becoming crowded. Fair progress was made with binding, but
still the arrears are mounting up. No fewer than 28 additions
have been made to the exchange list during the year.

12a

266 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

^

^
^

to

^

OONOOOO'-iOOi-iOCOCSr-iO-^CO

rH r-( r-l 1—1

XIM00i-lO00O0^«5t^a>Ol>Q0iO»»

i-HrHi-l T-HiHi-li-li— I 1— li— I i-H

0>1>»0J>W>-ItJ<OC<J>0050503C0-*Q0
O Ivl rH r-l rH J>-

l-H (M

o

r?. <

Q

Q

a 3

2 ^

o ■&

pq

« i5 O S

cl o) ci :S bjD -iJ ^

cS bB

fi 4>!l

4J M c3 ?? O

a r!3 CO (1)

'q «tH '3

iH cp 3

pq P4 ►S

&D O)

c» fq

O O O O O CO CD
QO t- iM O O CO 1-1

fH

O

p< a

S o !»

a 09 sh

i-i <a t< LL CJ ■;" '-

cb

" 6D ^

'*-' art

o „ § §

■S -S -fl o

a o o -

a> o M a

« W H <J

Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria. 267

fi
o

<

fi

I— I
hJ
CO

o o

o

tr4

o o

o

&

1-H

O N

N

o

o

^

5?

: -*^

ce §

1 8

-^ <J

u

■*^ n

EC es

S ^

^ §

=M S

o i5

-« o

fl -is

fl &

•rt a)

CO fl

O cS

^ h

1— 1 CO

xed
tere

S 5

!>i

pq

o o

o

o o

o

1— 1

1—1

O M

IM

o

o

rH

CfJ

<^ 1

r« :

c^

fq

^

_-4J :

'm

O

ft

9

Q "S

-* 2

» s

X -tJ

^

o

H

1

m

Eh

P^

H

m

h^

S

m

P^

w

O

O

«2

S

H
g

W

ft

a

o
O

1902

patron :

HIS EXCELLENCY SIR GEORGE SYDENHAM CLARKE, K.C.M.G., F.R.S., Etc.
E. J. WHITE, F.R.A.S.

?3icE-^resttiEnta :

J. DENNANT, F.G.S., F.C.S.
PROF. BALDWIN SPENCER, M.A., F.R.S., C.M.Z.S., Etc.

"S^on. fIrEnauvrr :
P. DE JERSEY GRUT.

Ilfon. ^ecretaiu :

T. S. HALL, M.A.

gijon. '5'ilji-nrinn :
R. H. WALCOTT, F.G.S.

Of/Ointril

E. J. DUNN, F.G.S.

R. L. J. ELLERY, C.M.G., F.R.S.,

F.R.A.S.
PROF. J. W. GREGORY, D.Sc, F.R.S.
JAMES JAMIESON, M.D.
H. C. JENKINS, A.R.S.M.
PROF. W. C. KERNOT, M.A., M.C.E.

J. A. KERSHAW, F.E.S.

K. F. J LOVE, M.A., F.R.A.S.

PROF. T. R. LYLE, M.A.

J. SHEPHARD.

G. SWEET, F.G.S.

W. P. WILKINSON.

Committees of tlje d^ounnl

^jottsc Committet :

THE PRESIDENT.

THE HON. TREASURER (Convbnbr).

J. DENNANT, F.G.S., F.C.S.

PROF. KERNOT, M.A., M.C.E.

G. SWEET, F.G.S.

^ttblicatioit Committtc :

THE HON. TREASURER.

THE HON. SECRETARY (Convbnbr).

PROF. GREGORY, D.Sc, F.R.S.

H. MOORS.

J. E. GILBERT.

gtjottorarg Architect

W. A. il. BLACKETT.

LIST OF MEMBERS,

WITH THEIR YEAR OF JOINING.

Patron.
His Excellency Sir G. S. Clarke, K.C.M.G., F.R.S. ... 1902

Honorary Members.
Porrest, The Hon. Sir J., K.C.M.G., West Australia ... 1888

Hector, Sir James, K.C.M.G., M.D., F.R.S., Wellington, 1888
N.Z.

Liversidge, Professor A., LL.D., F.R.S., University, 1892
Sydney, N.S.W.

Neumayer, Prof. George, Ph.D., Hamburg, Germany ... 1857

Russell, H. C, B.A., F.R.S., F.R.A.S., Observatory, 1888
Sydney, N.S.W.

Scott, Rev. W., M.A., Kurrajong Heights, N.S.W. ... 1855
Selwyn, Dr., A. R. C, 1374 Broughton-street, Vancou- 1897
ver, B.C.

Todd, Sir Charles, K.C.M.G., F.R.S., Adelaide, S.A. ... 1856

Verbeek, Dr. R. D. M., Buitenzorg, Batavia, Java ... 1866

Life Membebs.

Butters, J. S., F.R.G.S., Empire Buildings, Collins-street 1860
west

Eaton, H. F 1857

Elliott, T. S., "Fernleigh," Park Place, South Yarra ... 1856

Fowler, Thos. W., M.C.E., University, Melbourne ... 1879

272 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Gibbons, Sydney, F.C.S., 31 Gipps street, East Mel- 1854

bourne.
Gilbert, J. E., "Melrose," Glenferrie-road, Kew ... 1872

Love, E. F. J., M.A., F.R.A.S., 213 Victoria Terrace, 1888
Royal Park

Nicholas, William, F.G.S., Coolgardie, Western Aus- 1864
tralia

Rusden, H. K., "Ockley," Bay and St. Kilda streets, 1866
Brighton

Selby, G. W., 99 Queen Street, Melbourne 1881

White, E. J., F.R.A.S., Observatory, Melbourne ... 1868

Ordinary Members.

Balfour, Lewis, B.A., M.B., B.S., Collins-street, Mel- 189?

bourne

Barrachi, Pietro, F.R.A.S., Observatory, Melbourne ... 1887

Barnes, Benjamin, Queen's Terrace, South Melbourne ... 1866

Barrett, J. W., M.D., M.S., F.R.C.S., 127 Collins-street 1891

east, Melbourne

Berry, Wm., "Kasouka," Trafalgar Road, Camberwell 1898

Boese, C. H. E., 2 Jolimont Terrace, Jolimont ... ... 1895

Campbell, F. A., M.C.E., Working Men's College, 1879

Latrobe-street, Melbourne

Cherry, T., M.D., M.S., University, Melbourne ... 1893

Cohen, Joseph B., A.R.I. B.A., Public Works Depart- 1877

ment, Melbourne

Chapman, F., A.L.S., National Musuem, Melbourne ... 1902

Dennant, John, F.G.S., F.C.S., Stanhope-grove, Cam- 1886

berwell
Dunn, E J., F.G.S., "Roseneath," Pakington-street, 1893

Kew

Edwards, Thomas Elford, "Kaleno," Mont Albert-road, 1896

Balwyn, Victoria
Ellery, R. L. J., C.M.G., F.R.S., F.R.A.S., Observa- 1856

tory, Melbourne

List of Members. 273

Fox, Dr. W. R., L.R.C.S., L.R.C.P., "York House," 1899

Brunswick-street, North Fitzroy.

Fryett, A. G., care Dr. F. Bird, Melbourne 1900

Gault, Dr. E. L., M.A., M.B., B.S., Collins-street, Mel- 1899

bourne

Gregory, Prof. J. W., D.Sc, F.R.S., University, Mel- 190Q

bourne

Grut, P. de Jersey, 160 Toorak Road, South Yarra ... 1901

Hake, C. N., F.C.S., Melbourne Club, Melbourne ... 1890'

Hall, T. S., M.A., University, Melbourne 1890

Hartnell, W. A., "Irrewarra, Burke Road, Camber- 1900

well

Harvey, J. H., A.R.V.I.A., 128 Powlett street, East 1895

Melbourne

Heffernan, E. B., M.D., B.S., 10 Brunswick-street, Fitz- 1879

roy

Hogg, E. G., M.A 1890

Howitt, A. W., F.G.S., "Clovelly," Metung 1877

Jamieson, James, M.D., 96 Exhibition-street, Mel- 1877

bourne

Jenkins, H. C, A.R.S.M., Victoria Avenue, Canterbury 1899

Kernot, Professor W. C, M.A., M.C.E., University, 1870

Melbourne

Kershaw, J. A., National Museum, Swanston-street ... 1900

Lyle, Prof. T. R., M.A., University, Melbourne ... 1889

Loughrey, B., M.A., M.D., Ch.B., M.C.E., 1 Elgin- 1880
street. Hawthorn

Martin, C. J., M.S., D.Sc, F.R.S., University, 1897

Melbourne

Masson, Professor Orme, M.A., D.Sc, University, 1887

Melbourne

Michell, J. H., M.A.. University, Melbourne 1900

Moors, H., 498 Punt Road, South Yarra 1875

Muntz, T. B., C.E., Trustees Buildings, Collins-street, 1873

Melbourne.

Nanson, Prof. E. T., M.A., University, Melbourne ... 1875

Oliver, C. E., M.C.E., Metropolitan Board of Works, 187&
Melbourne

274 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Parker, A., Footscray ... ... ... ... ... 1897

Resales, Henry, F.G.S., Alta Mira," Grandview 1880
Grove, Armadale

Sargood, Sir Frederick, K.C.M.G., M.L.C., Elsternwick 1883

Shephard, John, 135 City Road, South Melbourne ... 1894

Spencer, Prof. W. Baldwin, M.A., F.R.S., University, 1887

Melbourne

Steiner, Maurice, care Frederick Grose and Co., Collins- 1899

street

Sugden, Rev. E. H., M.A., B.Sc, Queen's College, 1899

Carlton

Sweet, George, F.G.S., Wilson-street, Brunswick ... 1887

Sutton, E. H., "Claremont," The Avenue, Windsor ... 1902

Walcott, R. H., F.G.S., Technological Museum

Swanston-street
Ware, S., M.A., Education Department, Melbourne ..
Wilkinson, W. Percy, Govt. Analyst's Laboratory

Swanston-street, Melbourne
Wisewould, F., 408 Collins-street, Melbourne ...

1897

1901
1894

1902

Country Members.

Adcock, G. H., F.L.S., F.R.H.S., Gertrude-street, 1898

Geelong

Archibald, J., Wendoixree, Ballarat ... ... ... 1901

Beaumont, E. K., Central Mine, Broken Hill, N.S.W. ... 1901

Brittlebank, C. C, "Dunbar," Myrniong, Victoria ... 1898

Cameron, A. McL., F.C.S., School of Mines, Castlemaine 1897

Clark, Donald, B.C.E., School of Mines, Bairnsdale, 1892
Victoria

Desmond, J., R.V.S., G.M.V.C, Central Board of 1901
Health, Adelaide, S.A.

Pennelly, Richard, A.M.I. C.E., Kilmore, Victoria ... 1895

Hart, T. S., M.A., B.C.E., School of Mines, Ballarat ... 1894

Hill, W. H. F., "Glenrowan," Dandenong-road, Windsor 1894

Hogg, H. R., M.A., 6 Clanricarde Gardens, Notting Hill 1890
Gate, London W.

List of Members. 275-

Maplestone, C. M., Eltham, Victoria 1898

Martell, F. J., School of Mines, Ballarat 1897

McDougall, Duncan, Maryborough, Victoria ... ... 1897

Mennell, F. P., Rhodesian Museum, Buluwayo, South 1902
Africa

Oddie, James, Dana-street, Ballarat, Victoria ... ... 1882

Officer, C. G. W., B.Sc, "Kallara," Bourke, N.S.W. ... 1890

Officer, Sidney, Maryvale, Edenhope 1890

Potts, H. W., F.C.S., Hawkesbury Agricultural College, 1899

New South Wales

Powell, Walter D. T., Cape Moreton Lighthouse, Bris 1886-

bane, Queensland

Tipping, Isaac, C.E., Ballarat, Victoria ... ... 1892

Corresponding Members.

Bailey, F. M., F.L.S., Government Botanist, Brisbane, 1880-
Queensland

Dendy, Professor Arthur, D.Sc. F.L.S., Canterbury 1888
College, Christchurch, N.Z.

Etheridge, Robert, Junr., Australian Museum, Sydney, 1877

N.S.W.

Howes, Professor G. B., LL.D., F.R.S., Royal College 1898
of Science, S. Kensington, England

Lucas, A. H. S., M.A., B.Sc, Sydney Grammar School, 1895
Sydney, N.S.W.

Stirton, James, M.D., F.L.S., 15 Newton-street, Glasgow 1880'

Associates.

Adney, T. W., 1 Victor Terrace, St. Kilda Road ... 1899'

Aronson, L. A., Williams Road, Toorak 1901

Baker, Thomas, Bond-street, Abbotsford, Victoria ... 1889*

Bale, W. M., F.R.M.S., Walpole-street, Hyde Park, 1887

Kew, Victoria

Bennetts, W. R., 184 Brunswick-street, Fitzroy, Victoria 1894

276 Proceedings of tlie Royal Society of Victoria.

Benson, Wm., Grandview Grove, Hawthorn ... ... 1899

Booth, John, M.C.E., 62 Drummond street, Carlton ... 1872

Bullen, Hugh, 5 Mary-street, Grace Park, Hawthorn ... 1898

Brown, A. A., 124 Liardet-street, Port Melbourne ... 1902

Cifcsswell, Rev. A. W., M.A., St. John's Parsonage, 1887
Camberwell, Victoria

Danks, A. T., 391 Bourke-street west, Melbourne ... 1883

Ferguson, W. H., 23 Service Crescent, Albert Park ... 1894

Finney, W. H., 40 Merton-street, Albert Park 1881

Fison, Rev. Lorimer, M.A., Essendon, Victoria ... 1889

Fulton, S. W., 369 Collins-street, Melbourne 1900

Gabriel, J., Victoria-street, Abbotsford, Victoria ... 1887

Gatliff, J. H., Commercial Bank of Australasia, Lygon- 1898

street, Carlton

Goodwin, A. J., 43 St. George's Road, N. Fitzroy ... 1900

Grant, F. E., Union Bank, Collins-street 1898

Green, W. Heber, B.Sc, University, Melbourne ... 1896

Grayson, H. J., University, Melbourne ... ... ... 1902

Hall, Robt., Elgar Road, Box Hill ... 1900

Herman, Hyman, B.C.E., Department of Mines, Melb. 1897

Holmes, W. A., Telegraph Engineer's Office, Railway 1879
Department, Melbourne

Ingamells, F. N., Observatory, Melbourne ... ... 1889

Jobbins, G. G., Electric Lighting Coy., 31 Queen-street, 1902

City

Jutson, J. T., Normanby Avenue, Northcote ... ... 1902

Kenyon, A. S., Heidelberg 1901

Kernot, Frederick A., 66 Russell-street, Melbourne ... 1881

Kitson, A. E., F.G.S., Mining Department, Melbourne 1894

Lambert, Thomas, Bank of New South Wales, Collins- 1890
street, Melbourne

Le Souef, D., C.M.Z.S., Royal Park, Melbourne 1894

Lidgey, E. A., 41 Burke Crescent, Geelong ... ... 1894

Luly, W. H., Department of Lands, Treasury, Melbourne 1896

Maclean, C. W., "Bronte," Strand, Williamstown ... 1879

Mahony, D. J., "Laremont," Bruce-street, Toorak ... 1901

List of Members.

277

Mathew, Rev. John, M.A., B.D., Coburg 1890

McEwan, John, 70 Swanston-street ... ... ... 1898

Melville, A. G., Mullen's Library, Collins-street east, 1889

Melbourne

Menz, R., Electric Lighting Co., 31 Queen Street ... 1902

Murray, Stuart, C.E., Department of Water Supply, 1874

Melbourne

Phillips, A. E., Box 396, G.P.O., Melbourne 1883

Pritchard, G. B., Mantell-street, Moonee Ponds, Victoria 1892

Rosenhain, Walter ...

1896

Sayce, O. A., Harcourt-street, Hawthorn
Schafei', R., Union-street, Windsor, Victoria ...
Shaw, Alfred C, Bond-street, Abbotsford, Victoria
Smith, F. Voss, Trinity College, Parkville
Smith, G. P., Trinity College, Parkville
Stephen, Rev. R., M.A., Trinity College, Parkville
Stewart, C, M.C.E., Shire Hall, Preston
Summers, H., 72 Alfred street, Prahran

Thiele, E. O., 219 Osborne-street, Williamstown
Tisdall, H. T., 7 Washington-street, Toorak

1898
1883
1896
1901
1901
1901
1883
1902

1898

1883

Wedeles, James, 231 Flinders Lane, Melbourne

1896

INDEX.

(^The names of ne%<o genera and species are printed in Italics).

Acanthochites asbestoides, 207.

bednalli, 205.

glyptus, 206.

granostriatus, 207.

matthewsi, 206.

pilsbryi, 205.

speciosus, 206.

wilsoni, 207.
Acmaea alba, 193.

calamus, 197.

cantharus, 196.

conoid ea, 195.

costata, 194.

cruciata, 196.

crucis, 196.

flamruea, 196.

gealei, 197.

jacksoniensis, 196.

marmorata, 197.

petterdi, 195.

saccharina, 194.

scabrilirata, 195.

septiforniis, 195.

striata, 194.

subundulata, 196.
Actaeon austrinus, 211.
Ammonite, a Queensland, 141.
Amphipoda, 47.
Aplysia concava, 219.

tigrina, 219.
Apus australiensis, 241.
Artemia australis, 229.

proxima, 231.

westraliensis, 230.
\ty\o\(\es, fontajia, 49.
Atys exigua, 213.

Beyrichia ki/inoriensis, 112.

kloedeni, 109.

kloedeni, var. granulata,
110.

ligatura, 112.

maccoyana, var. australis,
111.

wooriyallockensis, 110.
Botryocrinus longibrachiattts,

108.
Branchitielia australis., 234.

eyrensis, 239.
Bulla arachis, 214.

australis, 214.

brevis, 216.

exigua, 213.

eumicra, 212.

fusiformis, 212.

oblonga, 215.

ovoidea, 216.

pygmaea, 214.

quoyi, 216.

rostrata, 213,

tenera, 217.
Bulinella arachis, 214.

pygmaea, 214.
Bythotrephis tenuis, 104.

Cadulus acuminatus, 222.

13

280 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

petterdi, 223.
Callochiton crocinus, 199.

platessus, 198.
Cardita excrescens, 98.
Catenariopsis morningtonien-

sis, 17.
Cemori harrisoni, 186.
Chaetopleura conspersa, 205.
Caryocaris afigusta^ 113.
Chiltonia australis, 17.

siibiefiuis, 48.
Chione cognata, 101.

etheridgei, 99.
Chirocephalus, 240.
Chirodota sp., 82.
Chiton australis, 203.

bednalli, 209.

cimolius, 210.

concentricus, 210.

contractus, 20 1 .

crispus, 200.

crocinus, 198.

inquinatus, 198.

jugosus, 210.

limans, 209.

lugubris, 203.

metallicus, 203.

uiuricatus, 209.

novaehollandiae, 204.

pallidus, 201.

petholatus, 204.

platessa, 198.

tricostalis, 209.

ustulatus, 201.

versicolor, 199.

virgatus, 203.

vol vox, 210.
Chitonellus gunnii, 208.

striatus, 208.

Clypidina Candida, 188.
Coorongite, 134.
Crassatellites camurus, 96.

maudensis, 93.

ki?igicoloides, 94.
Crustacea, Amphipoda, 51.

Decapoda, 59.

Phyllopoda,
Cryptodromia wilsoni, 61.
Cryptoplax gunnii, 208.

speciosus, 206.

striatus, 207.
Cyclestheria hislopi, 256.
Cylichna arachis, 214.

atkinsoni, 214.

cuticulifera, 217.

pygmaea, 214.
Cylindrobulla fischeri, 217.

Dentalium lubricatum, 222.
Desmoceras jonesi, 142.
Diatoms, fossil, 45.
Dinesus ida, 154.
Diplodactylus bi/ineatus, 146.
Diporophora amphiholuroides,
76.

Elaterite, 134.
Euiarginula anatinus, 189.

australis, 187.

Candida, 186.

conoidea, 188.

cumingii, 187.

dilecta, 186.

emarginata, 187.

parmophoidea, 190.

rugosa, 187.

tasmaniae, 187.

tenuicostata, 186.

Index.

281

Estheria dictyoii, 255.

elliptica, 252.

lutraria, 254.

packardi, 250.

sarsii, 252.
Eulimnadia dahli, 244.

rivolensis, 245.

sordid a, 245.

victoriensis^ 246.

Fissurella concatenata, 182.

incii, 185.

lineata, 185.

McCoyi, 185.

nigrita, 183.

omicroii, 182.

scutella, 183.

trapezina, 182.
Fissurellidaea concatenata,
182.

inacroschisma, 184.

nigrita, 183.

scutella, 183.
Fissuridaea lineata, 185.
Fossarus bulimoides, 212.
Fossils, 38, 104.

Gadinia angasi, 222.

conica, 222.
Gammarus australis, 51.

haasei, 53.
Gena nigra, 177.

strigosa, 178.
Glacial, Tasmania, 28.
Glycimeris halli^ 89.

var. tntermedius, 90.

var. paucicostaius, 90,
Glyphis lineata, 185.

Haliotis albicans, 178.

euimae, 179,

excavata, 180.

grant!, 180.

naevosa, 178.
Haininea brevis, 216.

cuticulifera, 217.

tenera, 217.
Heathcote, Geology of, 149.
Heathcotian series, 148.
Helcioniscus limbata, 192.

melanostomus, 192.

traraoserica, 192.
Helicoa-imis plu/nosus, 107.
Heniiergis zvooatvardi, 77.
Hemitorna rugosa, 188.
Hyalella australis, 47.
Hyolitlies kptus, 119.
Hymenosoma lacustris, 59.

Isclinocliiton australis, 203.
cariosus, 200.
contractus, 201.
crispus, 200.
inquinatus, 198.
juloides, 200.
novaehollandiae, 204.
pallidus, 201.
ptychius, 203.
pura, 201.
tateanus, 201.
ustulatus, 202.
virgatus, 203.
wilsoni, 201.

Lacertidae, 76, 144.
Lagenipora airensis, 24.
morningtoniensis, 24.

282 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Lekythopora tnooraboolen-
sis, 25.

ki/so/ii, 25.
'Le'pfis pr/fc/iardi, 83.
Lepidopleurus empleurus, 199.

inquinatus, 198.

liratus, 198.

platessa, 199.

ustulatus, 201.
Lepidoradsia australis, 203.
Lepidurus viridis, 242.
Leptochiton versicolor, 199.
Limnadopsis birchii, 249.

brunneus, 250.

squirei, 249.

tatei, 250.
Lithophagus latecaudatus, 88.
Lizards, 76, 144.
Lobiger wilsoni, 218.
Lophyrus australis, 203.

concentricus, 210.

jugosus, 210.

muricatus, 209.
Lorica angasi, 211.

cimolia, 210.

vol vox, 210.
Loricella angasi, 211.
Lottia costata, 194.
Lucapiiiella nigrita, 183.

pritchardi, 184.
Lucina gunyouna^ensis, 98.
Lynceus eremia, 258.

macleayana, 258.

tatei, 258.

Macroschisma producta, 185.

tasmaniae, 184.

weldii, 184.
Megatebeniius concatenata, 182.

nigrita, 183.

trapezina, 182.
Melbourne, Geology, 41.

Tap-water, 69.
Melitodes (?) sp., 81.
Metamorphic rocks. Age of, 1 23.
Microporella fiiarginaia, 18.
Mollusca, Catalogue, 176.
Mucronella airensis, 22.

conica, 21.

irregu/aris, 21.

per sonata, 22.

proboscoides, 20.
Mytilicardia kaliiiinae, 97.
Mytilus moorabfloknsis, 88.

Neoniphargus fuitoni, 57.
Notasaphus fergusoni, 155.

Older Tertiary fossils, 87.

Palaeozoic fossils, 104.
Paralimnadia stanleyana, 248.
Parartemia zietziana, 232.
Pannophorus australis, 188.

elongatus, 188,

convexus, 189.

intermedius, 190.
Patella aculeata, 193.

altioostata, 194.

anatina, 188.

antipodum, 192.

calamus, 197.

cantharus, 195.

chapruani, 193.

costata, 195.

diemenensis, 191.

flammea, 196.

gealei, 197.

Index.

283

' hepatica, 194.

insignis, 197. '

jack.soniensis, 196.

latestrigata, 197.

limbata, 192.

mixta, 196.

perplexa, 194.

squamifera, 193.

tasuiauica, 193.

tramoserica. 191.

ustulata, 193.

variegata, 191.
Patelloida conoidea, 195.

septiforinis, 195.
Pentagona.ster sp., 81.
Philine angasi, 218.
Phyllopoda,
Plaxipliora conspersa, 205.

petholata, 204.
Pleistocene beds, 41.
Pleurobranchus angasi, 219.

maculatus, 220. "
Pleurodictyum niegastomum,

105.
Pontophilus fiindersi^ 67.

ob/iguus, 63.

victoriensis, 65.
Polyzoa, Tertiary, 17.
Porella angustata, 21.

areolata, 19.

den7iaHii, 20.

mi?iiitissiina, 26.

otwayensis, 20.

rho/iiboida/is, 19.

tuberculosa, 23.
PortPhillip Heads, Rocks, 132.
Pre-ordovician rocks, 149.
Puncturella harrisoni, 186.

henniana, 186.

Queensland anunonite, 142.

Recent deposits, Williams-
town, 36.
Retusa apiculata, 213.

eumicra, 212.
Hhinopterocaris m-Accoy\, 114.
Rhodona planiventralis, 78.
Ringicula angasi, 218

australis, 218.
Roxania exigua, 213.

Saccocaris /^//'<7^'^;/a, 113.
Salmacina (?) terehi, 83.
8chismope atkiiisoni, 181.

beddomei, 181.

carinata, 181.

pulchra, 182.
Scissurella atkinsoni, 181.

obliqua, 181.
Scutus anatinus, 188.

elongatus, 189.

unguis, 189.
Shells, marine, 176.
Sigsbeia (?), 82.
Silurian system. Subdivisions

of, 170.
Siphonaria albida, 221.

baconi, 221.

denticulata, 220.

diemenensis, 220.

funiculata, 220.

scabra, 220.

tristensis, 221.

zonata, 221.
^i^honotr et'A tnaccoyi, 118.
Smittia centralis, var. laevi-
gata, 18.

macgillivrayi, 1 7.

284 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

transversa, 17.
Stars, temporary, 1.
Stenochilon juloides, 200-
Stomatella imbricata, 176.

nigra, 177.
Stomatia imbricata, 177.

strigosa, 178.
Streptocephalus archeri, 240.
Subemarginula australis, 187.

emarginata, 187.

intermedia, 191.

parmopboidea, 191.

rugosa, 187,
Table Cwpe, Glacial, 28.
Tasmania, Grlacial, 28.
Tectura jacksoniensis, 196.

septiformis, 195.

subundulata, 196.
Tertiary fossils, 17, 81,87.
Tornatiaa brenclileyi, 212.

fusiformis, 212.

hofmani, 212.

mariae, 212.

Trigonia semiundulata, 91.

var. granosa, 92.

var. /uiosa, 92.
Trigonopora vermicularis, 23
Tugalia australis, 190.

cinerea, 190.

elegaiis, 1 90.

ossea, 190.

parmopboidea, 190.

intermedia, 190.

tasmanica, 191 .
Turbonilla casta, 211.
Umbrella corticalis, 220.

apiculatus, 213.

eumicrus, 213.
Varanus spenceri, 144.
Volvulella rostrata, 213.
Water supply, 69.
Western Australian Lizards,

76.
Williauistovvn, Geology, 36.
Yarra Improvement, Geology,
41.

END OF VOLUME XV.

[Issued February, 1903.]

I'RINTKD BY

FORD AND SON, CARLTON

MRI-BOURNE.

w

PROCEEDINGS

§£ipl ^mt\d of §14

VOL. XV. (New Serie^

PART I.

Edited under the Authority of the Cd\
ISSUED AUGUST, 1902.

{Containing Papers read be/ore the Society during the months of
March, April, June, and July, igo2.

THE AUTHORS OF THE SEVERAL PAPERS ARE SEVERALLY RESPONSIBLE KOR THE

SOUNDNESS OF THE OPINIONS GIVEN AND FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE

STATEMENTS MADE THEREIN.

MELBOUKNE :
FORD & SON, PRINTERS, DRUMMOND STREET, CARLTON.

AGENTS TO THE SOCIETY:

WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14 HENRIETTA STREET, COVENT GARDEN, LONDON.

To whom all couiinunications for transmission to the Royal Society o£ Victoria,
from all parts of Europe, should be sent.

1902.

Publications of the Royal Society of Victoria, and
of the Societies amalgamated with it.

Victorian Institute for the Advancement of Science.
Transactions. Vol, 1. 1855.

Philosophical Society of Victoria.
Transactions. Vol. 1. 1855.

These two Societies then amalgamated and became : —

Philosophical Institute op Victoria.
Transactions. Vols. 1-4.

77ie Society then became : —

Royal Society of Victoria.

Transactions and Proceedings (Vol. 5, entitled Transac-
tions). Vol. 5-24.
Transactions. Vol. 1, 2, 3 (part one only), 4. 1888-95.
Proceedings (New Series). Vol. 1 . 1888 .

Microscopical Society of Victoria.

Journal (Vol. 1, Pt. 1, entitled ^MnxX^exXy Journal). Vol. 1
(Pts. 1 to 4), 2 (Pt. 1), title page and index [all
published]. 1879-82.

[The Society then combined with the Royal Society of Victoria.]

Note. — Most of the volumes published before i8go are out
of print.

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

§0pl ^mti^ of ^irtoria.

VOL. XV. (New Series). X^^^'

PART II.

L- - ' ^ '^
Edited imder the Authority of the Counni/C- '

ISSUED FEBRUARY, 1903. ^^<^

(^Containing Papers read before the Society during the months of
September, October, November, and December, igo2).

THE AUTHORS OF THB SEVERAL PAPERS ARE SEVERALLY RRSF0N8IBLK FOR TUB

SOUNDNESS OF THE OPINIONS GIVEN AND FOR TUB ACCURACT OP THB

STATEMENTS MADE THEREIN.

MELBOURNE :
FOED & SON, PRINTERS, DRUMMOND STREET, CARLTON.

AGENTS TO THE SOCIETY:
WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14 HENRIETTA STREET, COVENT GARDEN, LONDON.

To whom all communications for transmission to the Royal Society of Victoria,
from all parts of Europe, should be sent.

1903.

Publications of the Royal Society of Victoria, and
of the Societies amalgamated with it.

Victorian Institute for the Advancement op Science.
Transactions. Vol. 1. 1855.

Philosophical Society of Victoria.
Transactions. Vol. 1. 1855.

These two Societies the?t amalgamated and became: —

Philosophical Institute op Victoria.
Transactions. Vols. 1-4.

The Society then became: —

Royal Society op Victoria.

Transactions and Proceedings (Vol. 5, entitled Transac-
tions). Vol. 5-24.
Transactions. Vol. 1, 2,' 3 (part one only), 4. 1888-95.
Proceedings (New Series). Vol. 1 . 1888 .

Microscopical Society op Victoria.

Journal (Vol. 1, Pt. 1, entitled Quarterly Journal). Vol. 1
(Pts. 1 to 4), 2 (Pt. 1), title page and index [all
published]. 1879-82.

[^The Society then combified tvith the Royal Society op Victoria.]

Note, — Most of the volumes published before i8go are out
of print.

li

III

,

5 WHSE 00602